Grand c4 Picasso

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.
com manuals search engine

YOUR HANDBOOK
ON THE INTERNET!
CITROËN lets you view your vehicle's Connect to http://service.citroen.com:

documentation on line, to see earlier versions
and the latest information, simply and free of 1 | Select your language and register,
charge.
2 | click on the link in the "Private customer access" zone to consult the
vehicle documentation; a window opens providing access to all of the
handbooks,
3 | select your vehicle, choose the body type then the date of issue of the
handbook,
4 | finally, click on the heading of your choice.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

We draw your attention to the following...
Your vehicle is fitted with only some of the

equipment described in this document, de-
pending on the trim level, version and the
specifications for the country in which it is
sold. CITROËN has a presence on every continent,
a complete product range,
bringing together technology and a permanent spirit of innovation,

The fitting of electrical equipment or ac- for a modern and creative approach to mobility.
cessories which are not recommended by
CITROËN may result in a failure of your ve-
hicle's electronic system. Please note this We thank you and congratulate you on your choice.
specific warning and contact a CITROËN
dealer to be shown the recommended
equipment and accessories.
At the wheel of your new vehicle,
Key getting to know each system,
each control, each setting,

safety warning
makes your trips, your journeys
contributes to the protection of the environment more comfortable and more enjoyable.
refer to the page indicated

Happy motoring!

CONTENTS
FAMILIARISATION 4 Î 30 III - COMFORT 56 Î 77 V - VISIBILITY 94 Î 104
■ Eco-driving 29 ■ Ventilation 56 ■ Lighting controls 94

■ Manual air conditioning 58 ■ LED lamps 96
■ Digital air conditioning 60 ■ Daytime running lamps 96
■ Scented air freshener 65 ■ Automatic illumination of headlamps 97
■ Front seats 67 ■ Headlamp adjustment 98
I - MONITORING 31 Î 44 ■ Rear seats 70 ■ Directional lighting 99
■ Seat modularity 75 ■ Wiper controls 100
■ Instrument panels 31 ■ Mirrors 76 ■ Automatic rain sensitive wipers 101
■ Indicator and warning lamps 33 ■ Steering wheel adjustment 77 ■ Courtesy lamps 103
■ Indicators 42 ■ Interior mood lighting 104
II - MULTIFUNCTION
SCREENS 45 Î 55 IV - ACCESS 78 Î 93 VI - FITTINGS 105 Î 116
■ Monochrome screen A 45 ■ Remote control key 78 ■ Interior fittings 105

■ Monochrome screen C 47 ■ Starting the engine 81 ■ Glove box 106
■ Colour screen (MyWay) 50 ■ Alarm 84 ■ Mats 108
■ NaviDrive colour screen 52 ■ Electric windows 86 ■ Boot fittings 111
■ Trip computer 53 ■ Doors 88 ■ Luggage retaining net 115
■ Boot 90 ■ Torch 116
■ Opening rear screen 90
■ Panoramic sunroof 91
■ Fuel tank 92
VII - CHILD
SAFETY 117 Î 125
■ Child seats 117
■ ISOFIX child seats 122
■ Child lock 125

CONTENTS
XII - TECHNICAL
VIII - SAFETY 126 Î 138 X - CHECKS 173 Î 182 DATA 213 Î 226
■ Direction indicators 126 ■ Bonnet 174 ■ Petrol engines 213
■ Hazard warning lamps 126 ■ Running out of fuel (Diesel) 176 ■ Petrol weights 214
■ Horn 126 ■ Petrol engines 177 ■ Diesel engines 215
■ Tyre under-inflation detection 127 ■ Diesel engines 178 ■ Diesel weights 217
■ Braking assistance systems 128 ■ Checking levels 179 ■ Petrol/Diesel weights - commercial
■ Trajectory control systems 129 ■ Checks 181 versions 221
■ Emergency or assistance call 130 ■ Dimensions 223
■ Seat belts 131 ■ Identification markings 226
■ Airbags 135
IX - DRIVING 139 Î 172 XI - PRACTICAL AUDIO and

INFORMATION 183 Î 212 TELEMATICS 227 Î 336
■ Electric parking brake 139 ■ Temporary puncture repair kit 183 ■ Emergency or assistance 227
■ Hill start assist 146 ■ Changing a wheel 186 ■ NaviDrive 231
■ Manual gearbox 147 ■ Changing a bulb 190 ■ MyWay 275
■ Gear shift indicator 148 ■ Changing a fuse 197 ■ Audio system 307
■ 6-speed electronic gearbox ■ 12 V battery 203 ■ Video pack 329
system 149 ■ Energy economy mode 206
■ Stop & Start 153 ■ Towing the vehicle 207
■ Automatic gearbox 156 ■ Towing a trailer 209
■ Fixed centred controls ■ Roof bars 210
steering wheel 160 ■ Very cold climate screen 210
■ Speed limiter 162 ■ Accessories 211 VISUAL
■ Cruise control 164 SEARCH 337 Î 341
■ Parking space sensors 166
■ Lane departure warning system 168
■ Parking sensors 169 ALPHABETICAL
■ Pneumatic suspension 171 INDEX 342 Î 348

EXTERIOR
Stop & Start

This system puts the engine tempo-
rarily into standby during stops in the
traffic (red lights, traffic jams, etc...).
The engine restarts automatically as
soon as you want to move off.
FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
Stop & Start reduces fuel consump-

tion, exhaust emissions and noise
when stationary.
153
Front/rear parking sensors

Sensors, located in the bumpers, de-
tect obstacles.
169
Parking space sensor Xenon directional headlamps

This system measures the size of a This system allows the light beams
parking space available between two to follow the direction of the road
vehicles or obstacles. ahead.
166 99

EXTERIOR
Panoramic sunroof
91
Opening rear screen
90
Pneumatic rear suspension

This enhances driving comfort and
maintains a constant body height,
whatever the vehicle load.
171
Exterior side spotlamps Door mirrors

These light up the zones facing the With electric foldback.
driver’s and passenger’s doors.
Automatically tilts in reverse gear.
98
76

OPENING
Remote control key Bonnet opening/closing Fuel tank

To release the bonnet, pull the lever Capacity: approximately 60 litres.
located under the dashboard towards
you. Then operate the safety catch at
the front of the bonnet,
A. Central locking
B. Unlocking
C. Remote operation of lighting
D. Key release/storage
Press control A, located on the switch
panel to the left of the dashboard. The
fuel flap automatically opens up fully.
Bonnet stay: Unclip the stay and insert
it into the notch. Insert the pump nozzle so as to push in
Selective opening the metal flap B.
Using the multifunction screen, you can Push the fuel filler flap to close it.
choose from the following options for To close: move the stay back to
opening your vehicle with the remote its initial position, lower the bon-
control: net, then allow it to slam shut at 92
- either all of the doors and the tail- the end of its travel.
gate,
- or the driver’s door with a first press, 174
then all of the other doors with a
second press.
After switching off the ignition, con-
trol A is only active for a few minutes.
78 If necessary, switch on the ignition
again to reactivate it.

OPENING
Opening rear screen Opening the tailgate Modubox (CITROËN

C4 Picasso)
) Press control 1.
This opening gives easy access to the
boot, even if you are parked close to a You cannot open the tailgate if the rear Load: 22 kg maximum.
wall or to another vehicle. screen is already open.
The Modubox is composed of a shop-
Closing the tailgate ping trolley and a flexible bag which can
be used independently of each other
depending on your needs.
Opening
) Press control 2. The grip 4 is in line 112
with the rear wiper.
Closing
) Lower the rear screen.
90
) Lower the tailgate, using one of the
grips 3, located on the interior tail-
gate trim.
) Past the balancing point, allow the
tailgate to close itself (do not assist
it or slow it down).

BOOT
CITROËN C4 Picasso CITROËN Grand C4 Picasso
Luggage cover in two Luggage cover blind

sections 111 112
Access to
spare wheel 187
Pneumatic rear
suspension
Torch Allows the height of the rear
of the vehicle to be adjusted Torch
116 171
Temporary puncture repair kit

Depending on model, the kit is located either in the boot well or in the compartment under the left hand
second-row passenger (open the flap by turning the screw a quarter turn).
This kit is a complete system for a temporary repair; it is made up of a compressor and a sealant car-
tridge.
183
Refer also to the section "Practical information - § Changing a wheel".
186
8

INTERIOR
6-speed electronic gearbox system Electric parking brake

This offers a fully automatic mode, a For holding and releasing the vehicle.
manual mode and an auto-sequential Operation is automatic with manual
mode which combines the advan- operation possible using the dash-
tages of the automatic and manual board control.
modes, using the paddles behind the
steering wheel. 139
149
Scented air freshener
This diffuses the fragrance that you
have chosen throughout the passen-
ger compartment from its location in
the ventilation system.
65
Speed limiter/Cruise control Interior mood lighting

These functions control the speed of This soft lighting of the passenger
the vehicle to the value that you have compartment improves visibility inside
programmed. the vehicle when the light is poor.
162, 164 104

9

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
10

1. Controls: 8. Controls: 18. Optional function controls
- Lighting - Trip mileage recorder reset (on steering wheel)
- Direction indicators button
19. Fusebox access cover
- Front and rear foglamps - Lighting rheostat
9. Warning lamps display (with the 20. Controls:
2. Paddles for automatic gearbox or
6-speed electronic gearbox system MyWay or NaviDrive multifunction - Fuel filler flap
screen) - Front and rear parking sensors
3. Cruise control and speed limiter
- Stop & Start
steering mounted controls 10. Electric parking brake
- Volumetric alarm deactivation
4. Direction indicator warning lamps 11. Instrument panel
- Headlamp adjustment
5. Audio and telematics system 12. Hazard warning lamps
21. Bonnet release
steering mounted controls
13. Switch panels:
22. Mirror controls
6. Gear lever for automatic gearbox or - Emergency or assistance
6-speed electronic gearbox system - Lane departure warning system
7. Controls: 14. ESP deactivation button
- Windscreen wipe
- Screenwash 15. Steering lock - Ignition switch
- Rear screen wipe 16. Multifunction screen steering
- Trip computer mounted controls
17. Horn
11

12

1. Controls: 10. Quarter light glass demist vent 17. Audio and telematics system
- Electric windows
11. Windscreen demist vent 18. Scented air freshener
- Child lock
12. Sunshine sensor 19. Cooled storage
2. Side window demist vent
Side air vent 13. Passenger’s air conditioning 20. USB port (or blanking plug)
controls
3. Driver’s air conditioning controls 21. 12 V accessory socket or cigar
14. Lower glovebox: lighter
4. Driver’s front airbag - Air freshener clips
22. Portable ashtray
5. Left hand upper storage - Various storage
23. Interior mood lighting control
6. Central air vents 15. Key switch:
- Front passenger’s airbag 24. Steering wheel adjustment lever
7. Right hand upper storage activation/deactivation
8. Front passenger’s airbag 16. Central locking button
9. Speaker (Tweeter) (right and left)
13

S I T T I N G C O M F O R TA B LY
Adjusting the steering wheel Automatic photochromic rear Door mirror adjustment
view mirror
It automatically and progressively

The steering wheel can be adjusted for changes between day use and night This operates with the ignition switched on.
height and reach. use. From the driver’s seat, select the door
Release the steering wheel by pulling 77 mirror by moving control 1 to the left or
lever A towards you. right, then adjust the door mirror as re-
Adjust the position of the steering quired in four directions using control 2.
wheel then lock it pushing the lever fully Child surveillance mirror Demisting-defrosting of the door mirrors
back. is linked to that of the rear screen.
77
Door mirror foldback

When the vehicle is parked, the door
For safety reasons, these adjust- mirrors can be folded back either man-
ments must not be carried out whilst ually or automatically.
driving. This additional mirror 1 allows you to 76
monitor the rear passengers. It can be
tilted to eliminate dazzle.
105
14

Front seats Manual adjustments Electric adjustments
Head restraint
Armrest
1. Adjustment of seat height, angle

and forwards-backwards position
Backrest angle 2. Adjustment of backrest angle and
lumbar support
3. Driver: storing driving positions
The seats can also be adjusted on a
temporary basis:
- on opening one of the front doors,
Seat height adjustment - after switching on the ignition.
Lumbar support
Heated seat control (lo-

cated on the inside of the
front seats)
Forwards-backwards 68
adjustment
67
15

Adjusting the seat belt height Electric windows controls Sliding sun visors
To adjust the seat belt, squeeze the From the driver’s seat position, the con- ) Slide the blind on the visor to the
control and slide it in the direction re- trols located on the door are used to op- desired position by pushing at A.
quired. erate the electric windows. The blinds are extended on the sun
visor rails.
131
86 ) Fold the visor downwards, to pre-
vent being dazzled.
105
Panoramic sunroof blind

Opening (positions 1 to 9)
Closing (position 0)
The blind has an anti-pinch system.
91
16

V E N T I L AT I O N
Recommended settings
- Heating/manual air conditioning:
Operate
For...
Fully cold to Maximum to
ON when
start, then start, then
Cooling or ON starting, then
personal personal
OFF
settings settings
Fully hot to Maximum to

ON when
Heating start, then start, then
or starting, then
personal personal
OFF
settings setting
Demisting
Fully hot OFF
Defrosting
- Digital air conditioning: the fully automatic mode is recommended - press "AUTO".
17

MONITORING
Instrument panel Seat belts not fastened/ Manual central locking

unfastened warning lamp
with multifunction screen A or C
This warning lamp informs you if
31 the driver’s or front passenger’s
seat belt is not fastened (de-
pending on model), and if the
front passenger’s (depending
on model) or the second-row
passengers’ seat belts are unfastened.

The illuminated positions represent
those whose seat belts are not fas-
tened/unfastened.
with the MyWay or NaviDrive 41

multifunction screen You can use electrical central locking or
32 Tyre under-inflation detection unlocking by pressing on button A.
If one of the doors is open or is not
This function warns you if a tyre is de- closed properly, central locking will not
flated or punctured. work.
This system does not absolve the driver
of the need to regularly check the tyre
pressures.
Automatic central locking

1. Instrument panel. Under-inflation warning
2. Multifunction screen. Once the function has been activated,
The service warning lamp when starting the engine, the system
3. Control buttons. automatically locks the doors once you
comes on, and a vehicle outline
4. Warning lamps display zone. is displayed, accompanied by a reach approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
message and an audible signal. This function can be deactivated by
pressing button A for more than two
Puncture seconds.
The STOP warning lamp comes 89
on, and a vehicle outline is dis-
played, accompanied by a mes-
sage and an audible signal.
127
18

PA S S E N G E R S A F E T Y
Front airbags Child lock ISOFIX mounting system

Manual control
Deactivation of front passenger The rear doors are locked by operating
airbag the lever using the key (aperture at an
angle).
1. Insert the key in lock A.
2. Select the "OFF" position. Electric control
3. Remove the key.
135
The 3 second-row seats of your vehicle

are fitted with regulation ISOFIX mount-
ing points, with 3 rings for each seat po-
sition A B C.
This fixing system is designed for chil-
dren weighing up to 18 kg.
Pressing the button prohibits operation
of the electric windows from the rear
of the vehicle and opening of the rear 122
doors from inside.
125
19

PA S S E N G E R S A F E T Y
Seat belts
Second row centre seat belt Using the third-row passenger seat
belts (CITROËN Grand C4 Picasso)
Take care to attach the third-row pas- Stowing the tongue of the third-row
senger seat belts to the rings provided seat belt
) Insert tongue C into the buckle on for this purpose.
the right, then insert the second
tongue D into the buckle on the left. Do not attach the belts to the load
anchorage points marked with a red 133
cross (see illustration above).
132
20

INTERIOR
SECOND ROW SEATS
"Comfort" position Longitudinal adjustment
The 3 second-row seats are indepen- Lift up control A, located at the front of
dent of each other and are all the same the seat, and adjust the seat into the
width. They can all be adjusted to the desired position.
"comfort" position.
Placing a seat in the "comfort"

position
) Pull on strap B.
The backrest reclines and the seat base
pivots slightly.
Returning the seat to its original position

) Pull on strap B and guide the seat
forwards.
70
21

INTERIOR
SECOND ROW SEATS

Folding the seats Repositioning the seats Rigid panel (CITROËN Grand
C4 Picasso)
Return the rigid panels of the second-
row seats to their initial (upright) position
and lock them in position (CITROËN
Grand C4 Picasso).
Raise the backrest and push it back-
wards until it locks in position.
From outside
A rigid panel is attached to each sec-
) Pull firmly upwards on strap C, as ond-row seat backrest.
indicated by the red arrow, to unlock
the seat; keep pulling until the seat
is fully folded.
Unlocking/Locking the rigid panel
From the boot - whilst loading, ) Slide latch A of the panel down-
for example (CITROËN Grand wards, to unlock it.
C4 Picasso) ) Return the panel to the upright posi-
tion, then slide latch A upwards to
Having firstly folded the third-row lock it.
seats.
Before deploying the rigid panels, check
) Pull on strap D to unlock the re- that the second row seats are in their
quired seat. fully rear position.
72
22

INTERIOR
THIRD ROW SEATS (CITROËN GRAND C4 PICASSO)

Installing the seats Stowing the seats Access to third-row seats
Fold the concertina boards (1 2 3) ar-
ranged above each of the third-row Put the three sections of the concertina Pull on control E, located at the top of
seats. boards (1 2 3) to their vertical position, the second-row seats backrest.
then pull on the red strap G.
Pull on the black strap F, located on the
seat backrest. Before moving the third-row seats, re-
turn the rigid panels to the upright posi- 73
74 tion and lock them.
Do not leave objects either on or un-

Before moving the third-row seats, derneath the second-row seats when
do not forget to lock in the rigid pan- you are folding them.
els first (located at the base of the
second-row seat backrests).
23

DRIVING
Lighting stalk Wiper stalk Fixed centred controls steering

wheel
Ring A Stalk C: windscreen wipe

1. Off Switching on "AUTO" mode 1. Optional function controls
2. Automatic illumination of headlamps ) Press the stalk down and release. 2. Cruise control/speed limiter and
3. Sidelamps parking space sensor
4. Dipped/main beam headlamps Switching off "AUTO" mode 3. Audio system controls
) Press the stalk up and return it to 4. Multifunction screen controls
94
position "0".
Ring B The automatic rain sensitive wipers
Front foglamps must be reactivated each time the ve- 160
hicle is started.
Rear foglamp
Ring D: rear screen wipe 5. Horn
95
126
Stop.
Under certain climatic conditions
(low temperature, humid), the pres- 6. Warning lamps for direction indica-
ence of condensation on the inner Intermittent. tors and vehicle lamps
surfaces of the headlamps and rear
lamps is not an indication of a fault; 33
this disappears a few minutes after
switching on the lamps. Timed wash and wipe.
100
24

DRIVING
Electric parking brake Parking space sensor

Before leaving the vehicle, check
that the electric parking brake warn-
ing lamp P (red) is on fixed (not < 12 mph (20 km/h)
flashing).
If you leave the vehicle with the en-
gine running, apply the parking brake
manually.
Never leave a child alone inside the
This device combines: vehicle with the ignition on, as they
- automatic functions: Automatic ap- could release the parking brake.
plication when the engine stops and
automatic release on use of the ac-
celerator (automatic operation by
default);
- manual use: Manual application/re-
lease of parking brake is possible You can activate this function by press-
by operating control lever A. ing button A.
Hill start assist Once the space has been measured, the
system displays the following messages:
When in automatic mode, it remains To aid starting on a gradient, your ve-
possible to apply or release the parking hicle is equipped with a system which Parking possible
brake at any time: keeps it immobilised for about 2 seconds,
) To apply it, pull on the lever A. the approximate time it takes to move
your foot from the brake pedal to the
) To release it, pull then release lever A. accelerator pedal.
146 Parking difficult

Do not drive if the parking brake
warning lamp and the P indicator on
the lever A are on.
Parking not advised

139
166
25

DRIVING
6-speed electronic gearbox system Automatic gearbox
R Reverse P Park
N Neutral R Reverse
A Automatic mode N Neutral
M Manual mode D Automatic mode
Using control paddles 1 "+" and 2 "-": M Sequential mode
- gear changing in manual mode, Using control paddles 1 "+" and 2 "-":
- temporary manual operation in au- - gear changing in sequential mode,
tomatic mode. - temporary manual operation in au-
tomatic mode.
Starting Starting
) Check that the gear lever 3 is in ) Check that the gear lever 3 is in po-
neutral (position N). sition P or N and turn the ignition
) Press firmly on the brake pedal and key.
turn the ignition key. To exit position P, press on the brake
pedal before moving the gear lever.
149
156
26

DRIVING
Stop & Start

Engine going into STOP mode Going into engine START mode Deactivation/Reactivation
The "ECO" warning lamp comes The "ECO" warning lamp goes
on in the instrument panel and off and the engine restarts:
the engine goes into stand-by:
- with the 6-speed electronic gear- - with the gear lever in position A or
box system; at speeds below M, release the brake pedal,
4 mph (6 km/h), press the brake - or with the gear lever in position N
pedal or put the gear lever into neu- and the brake pedal released,
tral (position N). change to position A or M,
- or select reverse gear.
You can deactivate the system at any

time by pressing the "ECO OFF" button;
the button's warning lamp comes on.
In certain circumstances the STOP In certain condition, START mode may
mode may not be available; the "ECO" be invoked automatically; the "ECO"
warning lamp flashes for a few seconds warning lamp flashes then goes off.
then goes off.
The system is reactivated autom-
photoatically every time you start the
153 154 engine with the key.
Before refuelling or doing any-

thing under the bonnet, you
must switch off the ignition
with the key.
154
27

DRIVING
Ignition switch Speed limiter Cruise control

● S: Steering lock 1. Limiter mode On/Off. 1. Cruise control mode On/Off.

To release the steering lock, oper- 2. Decrease the programmed value. 2. Programming a speed/Reducing
ate the steering slightly while turn- 3. Speed limiter On/Off. the programmed value.
ing the key, but without forcing. 3. Cruise control On/Off.
4. Increase the programmed value.
● M: On, running position 4. Programming a speed/Increasing
● D: Starter the programmed value.
Release the key as soon as the en- In order to be programmed or activated,
gine starts. Do not operate the start- the vehicle speed must be higher than
er when the engine is running. 25 mph (40 km/h), with at least fourth
gear engaged on a manual gearbox
81 162 (second gear for the 6-speed electronic
gearbox system or automatic gearbox).
164
28

ECO-DRIVING
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO2 emissions.
Optimise the use of your Drive smoothly Control the use of your
gearbox electrical equipment
With a manual gearbox, move off Maintain a safe distance between ve- Before moving off, if the passenger
gently, change up without waiting and hicles, use engine braking rather than compartment is too warm, ventilate it
drive by changing up quite soon. If the brake pedal, and press the accel- by opening the windows and air vents
your vehicle has the system, the gear erator progressively. These practices before using the air conditioning.
shift indicator invites you to change contribute towards a reduction in fuel Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the
up; it is displayed in the instrument consumption and CO2 emissions and windows and leave the air vents
panel, follow its instructions. also helps reduce the background traf- open.
fic noise.
Remember to make use of equipment
that can help keep the temperature
in the passenger compartment down
If your vehicle has cruise control, make (sunroof and window blinds...).
use of the system at speeds above Switch off the air conditioning, unless
With an automatic or electronic gear- 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is it has automatic digital regulation, as
box, stay in Drive "D" or Auto "A", ac- flowing well. soon as the desired temperature is at-
cording to the type of gearbox, without tained.
pressing the accelerator pedal heavily Switch off the demisting and defrost-
or suddenly. ing controls, if not automatic.
Switch off the heated seat as soon as
possible.
29

Limit the causes of excess Observe the recommendations
consumption on maintenance
Switch off the headlamps and front Spread loads throughout the vehicle; Check the tyre pressures regularly,
foglamps when the level of light does place the heaviest items in the bottom when cold, referring to the label in the
not require their use. of the boot, as close as possible to the door aperture, driver's side.
rear seats. Carry out this check in particular:
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle - before a long journey,
Avoid running the engine before mov- and reduce wind resistance (roof bars,
roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use - at each change of season,
ing off, particularly in winter; your ve- - after a long period out of use.
hicle will warm up much faster while a roof box in preference.
driving. Remove roof bars and roof racks after Don't forget the spare wheel and the
use. tyres on any trailer or caravan.
As a passenger, if you avoid connect-

ing your multimedia devices (film, mu-
sic, video game...), you will contribute
towards limiting the consumption of At the end of winter, remove snow tyres Have your vehicle serviced regularly (en-
electrical energy, and so of fuel. and refit your summer tyres. gine oil, oil filter, air filter...) and observe
Disconnect your portable devices be- the schedule of operations recommended
fore leaving the vehicle. by the manufacturer.
When refuelling, do not continue after

the 3rd cut-off of the nozzle to avoid
any overflow.
At the wheel of your new vehicle,

it is only after the first 1 800 miles
(3 000 kilometres) that you will see
the fuel consumption settle down to a
consistent average.
30

MONITORING
MONOCHROME INSTRUMENT PANEL (WITH MULTIFUNCTION SCREEN A)

I
6. Fuel gauge
7. Trip mileage recorder
8. Multifunction screen A/C
9. Total mileage recorder
In this zone, the following infor-
mation appears in succession
when the ignition is switched on:
- service indicator,
- engine oil level indicator,
- total mileage recorder.
TWO-TONE INSTRUMENT PANEL (WITH MULTIFUNCTION SCREEN C)
Controls
A. Lighting rheostat (available day
and night)
B. Trip mileage recorder reset
Central screen
1. Rev counter 3. "Foot on brake" warning lamp for
2. Gear efficiency indicator for a the electronic gearbox system or
manual gearbox or gear selector automatic gearbox/Electric park-
lever and gear for the electronic ing brake
gearbox system or automatic 4. Speedometer
gearbox 5. Cruise control or speed limiter
setting
31

MONITORING
INSTRUMENT PANEL WITH MyWay OR NaviDrive MULTIFUNCTION

I SCREEN
7. Gear efficiency indicator for a
manual gearbox or selector lever
position and gear for the elec-
tronic gearbox system or auto-
matic gearbox
8. Trip mileage recorder
9. Total mileage recorder
In this zone, the following infor-
mation appears in succession
when the ignition is switched on:
- service indicator,
- engine oil level indicator,
- total mileage recorder.
10. Warning lamp zone.
Controls
A. Lighting rheostat (available day
and night)
Central screen B. Trip mileage recorder reset
1. Cruise control or speed limiter 4. Rev counter
setting 5. "Foot on brake” warning lamp for
2. Speedometer the electronic gearbox system or
3. MyWay or NaviDrive multifunc- automatic gearbox/Electric park-
tion screen ing brake
6. Fuel gauge
32

MONITORING
Indicator and warning lamps Associated warnings

The illumination of certain warning lamps may be accompanied I
Visual indicators informing the driver that a system is in by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen.
operation (operation or deactivation indicator lamps) or of
the occurrence of a fault (warning lamp).
The warning lamps may come on continuously (fixed)
or flash.
When the ignition is switched on Certain warning lamps may come on in two different
Certain warning lamps come on for a few seconds when modes. Only by relating the type of illumination to the op-
the vehicle's ignition is switched on. erating status of the vehicle can it be ascertained whether
the situation is normal or whether a fault has occurred.
When the engine is started, these same warning lamps
should go off.
If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the informa- Operation indicator lamps
tion on the warning lamp concerned. If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms
that the corresponding system has come into operation.
Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations
Left-hand
direction flashing with The lighting stalk is pushed down.
buzzer.
indicator
Right-hand flashing with
direction The lighting stalk is pushed up.
buzzer.
indicator
Hazard The hazard warning lamps switch, The left-hand and right-hand direction
flashing with
warning located on the dashboard, has been indicators and their associated indicator
audible signal.
lamps operated. lamps flash simultaneously.
The lighting stalk is in the

Sidelamps fixed.
"Sidelamps" position.
Dipped beam The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped

fixed.
headlamps beam headlamps" position.
Main beam The lighting stalk is pulled towards Pull the stalk to return to dipped
fixed.
headlamps you. beam headlamps.
33

MONITORING
I Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations
Front The front foglamps are Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards twice
fixed.
foglamps switched on. to switch off the front foglamps.
Rear The rear foglamps are Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards to
fixed.
foglamps switched on. switch off the rear foglamps.
Wait until the warning lamp has switched off before starting.
Diesel engine The ignition switch is at the
fixed. The duration for which the warning lamp is on is determined
pre-heating 2nd position (ignition on).
by the climatic conditions.
The parking brake is applied Release the parking brake to switch off the
fixed.
or not properly released. warning lamp, keeping your foot on the
brake pedal.
Parking brake
Observe the safety recommendations.
The parking brake is not fully
flashing. applied or is released. For further information on the parking
brake, refer to the "Driving" section.
The parking space sensors Press the corresponding button

fixed.
Parking function is active. to deactivate it.
space
sensors The system is measuring the Once the measurement has been done,
flashing.
space. the warning lamp comes on fixed again.
Displayed for a few seconds after activating

the function and every time the ignition is
Electric child The electric child lock is switched on.
temporarily.
lock activated.
For more information, refer to the "Child
safety" section.
34

MONITORING
Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations I
The control switch, located in

the glove box, is in the "ON" Turn the control switch to the "OFF"
Passenger's position. position to deactivate the front passenger's
airbag fixed. The passenger's front airbag airbag.
system is activated. In this case you can install a rear-facing
In this case, do not install a child seat.
rear-facing child seat.
When the vehicle stops (red

lights, traffic jams, ...) the The warning lamp goes off and the engine
fixed. restarts automatically in START mode, as
Stop & Start system has put
soon as you want to move off.
the engine into STOP mode.
Stop & Start

STOP mode is temporarily
flashes for a few unavailable. Refer to "Driving - § Stop & Start" for
seconds, then or special cases with STOP mode and
goes off. START mode is invoked START mode.
automatically.
35

MONITORING
Deactivation indicator lamps

I If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.
This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction screen.
The control, located in the

glove box, is set to the OFF
position. Set the control to the ON position to
Passenger's activate the passenger's front airbag.
airbag fixed. The passenger's front airbag
system is deactivated. In this case, do not fit a child seat in the
rear-facing position.
In this case you can install a
"rear facing" child seat.
The button, located in the

middle of the dashboard, is Press the button to activate the ESP/ASR.
pressed. Its indicator lamp is Its indicator lamp switches off.
on. The ESP/ASR system is activated
ESP/ASR fixed. The ESP/ASR is deactivated. automatically when the vehicle is started.
ESP: electronic stability If deactivated, the system is reactivated
programme. automatically from approximately 30 mph
(50 km/h).
ASR: anti-skid regulation.
36

MONITORING
Warning lamps
When the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven, the illumination of one of the following warning lamps indicates I
a fault which requires action on the part of the driver.
Any fault resulting in the illumination of a warning lamp must be investigated further by reading the associated message
in the multifunction screen.
If you encounter any problems, do not hesitate to contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed, associated It is associated with a Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

STOP with another punctured tyre or the engine Park, switch off the ignition and call a
warning lamp. coolant temperature. CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Identify the fault by reading the message

shown in the screen, such as, for example:
- the closing of the doors, boot, rear
screen or bonnet,
A minor fault has occurred - the remote control battery,
temporarily. for which there is no specific
warning lamp. - the tyre pressures,
- saturation of the particle emission filter
Service (Diesel).
For any other faults, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
A major fault has occurred Identify the fault by reading the message
fixed. for which there is no specific shown in the screen and contact a
warning lamp. CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
37

MONITORING
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

fixed, associated Top up with brake fluid recommended by
The braking system fluid level CITROËN.
with the STOP
is too low. If the problem persists, have the system
warning lamp.
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
Braking qualified workshop.
+
fixed, associated You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
The electronic brake force
with the STOP
distribution (EBFD) system Have it checked by a CITROËN or a
and ABS warning
has a fault. qualified workshop.
lamp.
Anti-lock The vehicle retains conventional braking.

Braking The anti-lock braking system Drive carefully at reduced speed and
fixed.
System has a fault. contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
(ABS) workshop without delay.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

The application or release of
Electric flashing. the electric parking brake was Park on level ground, switch off the
parking brake ignition and contact a CITROËN dealer or
interrupted.
a qualified workshop.
+ Automatic application/release is no longer

possible.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop without delay.
Electric
parking brake fixed. The electric parking brake The parking brake can be released
has a fault. manually using the emergency release
malfunction
procedure.
For more information on the electric
parking brake, refer to the "Driving"
section.
38

MONITORING

Activate the function (according to country)
via the vehicle configuration menu or
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
Deactivation of The "automatic application" workshop if automatic application/release
the automatic (on switching off the engine) is not possible.
functions of the fixed. and "automatic release" The parking brake can be released
electric parking functions are deactivated or manually using the emergency release
brake faulty. procedure.
For more information on the electric
parking brake, refer to the "Driving"
section.
The system optimises traction and

The ESP/ASR regulation is
flashing. improves the directional stability of the
Dynamic active.
vehicle.
stability
control Unless it has been
(ESP/ASR) deactivated (button pressed Have it checked by a CITROËN or a
fixed. and its indicator lamp on) the qualified workshop.
ESP/ASR system has a fault.
Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter.
The engine management
flashing. system has a fault. Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
Engine a qualified workshop.
autodiagnosis The warning lamp should go off when the
system The emission control system engine is started.
fixed.
has a fault. If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN
dealer or qualified workshop without delay.
This lamp comes on for a few This lamp should go off when the engine is started.
temporarily. seconds when you turn on the If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN
ignition, then goes off. dealer or a qualified workshop.
Airbags
One of the airbag or seat belt
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
fixed. pretensioner systems has a
a qualified workshop.
fault.
39

MONITORING
You must refuel as soon as possible to

fixed, avoid running out of fuel.
accompanied This warning lamp will come on every time
by an audible When it first comes on there the ignition is switched on, until sufficient
Low fuel level signal and a remains approximately fuel has been added.
message on the 7 litres of fuel in the tank. Fuel tank capacity: 60 litres.
multifunction Never continue to drive until you run out
screen. of fuel, this could damage the emission
control and injection systems.
With the 6-speed electronic gearbox

The brake pedal is not
fixed. system, you must press the brake pedal to
pressed.
start the engine (lever in position N).
With the automatic gearbox, with the

engine running (lever in position P), press
the brake pedal before releasing the
The brake pedal is not parking brake, to unlock the lever and
pressed. come out of position P.
Foot on the
brake pedal If you wish to release the parking brake
without pressing the brake pedal, this
flashing. warning lamp will remain on.
With the electronic gearbox

system, if you hold the vehicle
Use the brake pedal and/or the electric
on an incline using the
parking brake.
accelerator for too long, the
clutch overheats.
40

MONITORING

Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Maximum Wait until the engine has cooled down
coolant fixed red. The temperature of the before topping up the level, if necessary.
cooling system is too high.
temperature If the problem persists, contact a
CITROËN dealer or qualified workshop.
The battery charging circuit The warning lamp should go off when the
Battery has a fault (dirty or loose engine is started.
fixed.
charge terminals, slack or cut If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN
alternator belt, ...). dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed if the speed

is below 6 mph
(10 km/h).
fixed and A door, the boot or the rear
Door(s) open accompanied by screen is still open. Close the door or boot.
an audible signal
if the speed is
above 6 mph
(10 km/h).
Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.

The illuminated dots represent the passengers
that have not fastened/unfastened their seat belt.
They come on:
The driver and/or the front/
Seat belts - fixed for 30 about seconds on starting
rear passenger has not
not fastened/ fixed. the vehicle,
fastened or has unfastened
unfastened - fixed from 0 to 12 mph (0 to 20 km/h)
their seat belt.
when driving,
- flashing above 12 mph (20 km/h),
accompanied by an audible signal for
about 120 seconds.
41

MONITORING
Service indicator 5 seconds after the ignition is switched Service overdue

I on, the spanner goes off; the dis- For 5 seconds after the ignition is
System which informs the driver tance recorder resumes its normal switched on, the spanner flashes
when the next service is due, in ac- operation. The display then indicates to indicate that the service must be
cordance with the manufacturer's the total and trip distances. carried out as soon as possible.
servicing schedule.
Example: the service is overdue by
The point at which the service is due 300 km.
is calculated from the last indicator
zero reset. It is determined by two For 5 seconds after the ignition is
parameters: switched on, the display indicates:
- the distance travelled,
- the time elapsed since the last
service. Less than 1 000 km remain
before the next service is due
More than 1 000 km remain Example: 900 km remain before the
before the next service is due next service is due.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the display indicates:
switched on, the spanner symbol- 5 seconds after the ignition is switched
ising the service operations comes on, the distance recorder resumes its
on. The distance recorder display normal operation. The spanner re-
line indicates the distance remaining mains on.
before the next service is due.
Example: 4 800 km remain before
the next service is due.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the display indicates: 5 seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the distance recorder
resumes its normal operation. The
spanner remains on to indicate that
a service must be carried out soon. The distance remaining may be
weighted by the time factor, depend-
ing on the driver's driving habits.
Therefore, the spanner may also
come on if you have exceeded the
two year service interval.
42

MONITORING
Service indicator zero reset Engine oil level indicator Oil level gauge fault
I
System which informs the driver
whether the engine oil level is cor-
rect or not.
This information is displayed for a This is indicated by the flashing of
few seconds when the ignition is "OIL--". Contact a CITROËN dealer
switched on, after the service infor- or a qualified workshop.
mation.
The level read will only be correct if
After each service, the service indi- the vehicle is on level ground and Dipstick
cator must be reset to zero. the engine has been off for more
than 30 minutes. Refer to the "Checks" section to lo-
The procedure for resetting to zero cate the dipstick and the oil filler cap
is as follows: on your engine.
Oil level correct
) switch off the ignition,
) press and hold the trip distance
recorder zero reset button, There are 2 marks on
) switch on the ignition; the dis- the dipstick:
tance recorder display begins a - A = max; never ex-
countdown, ceed this level (risk
Oil level low
) when the display indicates "=0", of engine damage),
release the button; the spanner - B = min; top up the
disappears. level via the oil filler,
using the type of oil
suited to your en-
gine.
This is indicated by the flashing of
Following this operation, if you wish "OIL", accompanied by an audible
to disconnect the battery, lock the signal and a message on the multi-
vehicle and wait at least five minutes function screen.
for the zero reset to be taken into ac- If the low oil level is confirmed by a
count. check using the dipstick, it is essen-
tial that the level is topped up to pre-
vent damage to the engine.
43

MONITORING
Distance recorders Lighting dimmer Activation

I ) Press the button to change the
The total and trip distances are dis- Permits manual adjustment of the brightness of the instruments
played for thirty seconds when the brightness of the instruments and and controls.
ignition is switched off, when the controls to suit the ambient light level.
driver's door is opened and when Only operates when the vehicle light- ) When the lighting reaches the
the vehicle is locked or unlocked. ing is on, with the exception of the minimum setting, release the
daytime running lamps. button, then press again to in-
crease it.
or
Total distance recorder ) When the lighting reaches the
maximum setting, release the
Measures the total distance trav- button, then press again to re-
elled by the vehicle since its first duce it.
registration.
) When the lighting reaches the
level of brightness required, re-
lease the button.
Trip distance recorder
Deactivation
When the vehicle lighting is off, or
in day mode on vehicles fitted with
daytime running lamps, pressing the
button does not have any effect.
Measures a distance travelled since

it was reset to zero by the driver.
) With the ignition on, press and hold
this button until zeros appear.
44

M U LT I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S
MONOCHROME SCREEN A Controls Main Menu

Displays in the screen
II
) Press button A, then using B,

you have access to the following
menus:
This screen can display the following
information: - radio-CD
- time - vehicle config
- date - options
- ambient temperature - display adjust
When the ambient temperature - languages
is between +3 °C and -3 °C, the - units
temperature display flashes (risk
of ice). The ambient temperature ) Press button C to confirm.
displayed may be higher than
the actual temperature if the ve-
hicle is parked in the sun.
- the current audio source, A. Access to the "Main menu".
- trip computer (see the end of the B. Navigation in the screen menus.
section).
C. Confirmation of the selection of a
Alert messages (e.g.: "Antipollution function in a menu or of a value
system faulty") or information mes- modified.
sages (e.g.: "Boot open") may appear
temporarily. They can be removed by D. Cancellation the current operation.
pressing "ESC". E. Selection of the type of infor-
mation (date, audio-CD and trip
computer).
B or F. In the menus, navigation,
choice of activation/deactiva-
For safety reasons, configuration tion of functions and choice
of the multifunction screen by the of settings.
driver must only be done when
stationary.
45

Vehicle config Display adjust

The "Display adjust" menu is used
for the following settings:
II - year,
- month,
- day,
The"Vehicle config" menu is used - hour,
to activate/deactivate the following - minutes,
functions:
- 12 or 24 hour mode.
- rear wiper coupled to reverse gear
(refer to the "Visibility" section),
- guide-me-home and welcome
lighting (refer to the "Visibility"
section),
- automatic functions (application/
release) of the electric parking
brake*,
- selective door locking,
- daytime running lamps (refer to
the "Visibility" section).
Radio-CD
With the Audio system on, you can
activate or deactivate functions of Languages
the radio (RDS station tracking,
REG mode), CD or CD changer (CD Options You can select the screen display lan-
introscan, shuffle, repeat). guage (Français, Italiano, Nederlands,
This menu is used for diagnosis of Portugues, Portugues-Brasil, Deutsch,
For more information on the "Radio- English, Espanol).
CD" application, refer to the Audio the state of systems (active, inactive,
system section in "Audio and faulty).
Telematics".
Units
This menu is used to select the units
for temperature (°C or °F) and fuel
consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
* Depending on destination country.
46

MONOCHROME SCREEN C Controls Main Menu

II
) Press button A, then using B,

you have access to the following
This screen can display the following menu:
information: - audio functions,
- time - trip computer,
- date, - personalisation-configuration,
- ambient temperature
- Bluetooth telephone (hands-free
When the ambient temperature system).
is between +3 °C and -3 °C, the
temperature display flashes (risk ) Press button C to confirm.
of ice). The ambient temperature
displayed may be higher than the
actual temperature if the vehicle
is parked in the sun.
- the current audio source
A. Access to the "Main Menu".
- trip computer (see the end of the For safety reasons, configuration
section), B. Navigation in the screen menus.
of the multifunction screen by the
- the results of the parking space C. Selection and confirmation in the driver must only be done when
measurement, menus of the function chosen or stationary.
the value modified.
- visual parking sensors.
D. Cancellation of the current opera-
Alert messages (e.g.: "Antipollution tion.
system faulty") or information mes-
sages (e.g.: "Boot open") may appear E. Selection of the type of information
temporarily. They can be removed by (date, radio-CD/audio, telephone
pressing "ESC". and trip computer).
B or F. In the menus, navigation,
choice of activation/deactiva-
tion of functions and choice
of settings.
47

Bluetooth telephone Status of functions

(hands-free system) This allows diagnosis of the state of
systems (active, inactive, faulty).
II With the Audio system on, you can
configure your Bluetooth hands-free
system (pairing), view the various
telephone directories (calls log, ser- Enter the distance to destination
vices..) and manage calls (call, hang You can enter a value for the dis-
up, double call, secret mode...). tance to your final destination.
For more information on the
"Telephone" application, refer to the
Audio system section in "Audio and
Telematics".
Trip computer
Audio functions
You can see information on the state
of the vehicle.
With the Audio system on, you can
activate or deactivate functions as- Warning log
sociated with the radio (RDS, REG, This lists alert messages, displaying
Radio Text), CD or CD changer (CD them successively on the multifunc-
introscan, shuffle, repeat). tion screen.
For more information on the "Audio
functions" application, refer to the
Audio system section in "Audio and
Telematics".
48

Define the vehicle parameters Choice of language

You can activate or deactivate the You can change the screen display
following systems: language (Deutsch, English, Espanol,
- rear wiper coupled with reverse Français, Italiano, Nederlands, Portugues,
gear (refer to the "Visibilty" section), Portugues-Brasil, Türkçe*). II
- automatic guide-me-home lighting,
- directional headlamps,
- automatic functions (application/
release) of the electric parking
brake*
the "Visibilty" section),
Personalisation - Display configuration

Configuration You can make the following adjust-
ments:
- video brightness,
This menu is used to activate/deac-
tivate the following functions: - date and time,
- define the vehicle parameters, - choice of units.
- display configuration,
- choice of language.
* Depending on destination country.

49

MyWay MULTIFUNCTION Controls Menus in the control panel

SCREEN
II
To select one of the applications:

) press the dedicated "RADIO",
"MUSIC", "NAV", "TRAFFIC",
"SETUP" or "PHONE" button to
This screen can display the following open the corresponding menu,
information: For more information on these ap-
- time, plications, refer to the "Audio and
- date, Telematics" section.
- ambient temperature
When the ambient temperature You can press:
is between +3 °C and -3 °C,
the display flashes (risk of ice). A. Opens a contextual menu.
The temperature displayed may B. Navigation through the screen
be higher that the actual tem- menus.
perature if the vehicle has been C. Confirmation of the selection made
parked in the sun. in a menu or a modified value.
- warning and vehicle function status D. Abandon the current operation.
messages, displayed temporarily,
E. Selection of main display (date,
- audio functions, radio-CD/audio, telephone, map,
- trip computer (see the end of the navigation and trip computer).
section), B or F. In the menus, navigation, se-
- result of the parking space mea- lect activation/deactivation of
surement, functions and select settings. For safety reasons, configuration
of the multifunction screen by the
- visual parking sensor information, driver must only be done when
- satellite navigation system infor- stationary.
mation.
50

SETUP menu Date and time Units

This menu allows you to set the date This menu allows you to select the
and time, the format of the date and units: temperature (°C or °F) and
the format of the time (refer to the consumption (km/l, l/100 or mpg).
"Audio and Telematics" section. II
Display System
This menu allows you to set the This menu allows you to restore the
) Press the "SETUP" button to brightness of the screen, the screen factory configuration, display the soft-
open the configuration menu. colour scheme and the colour of the ware version and activate scrolling
This allows you to select from map (day/night or auto mode). text.
the following functions:
- "System language",
Vehicle
- "Date and time",
This menu allows you to activate or
- "Display", deactivate certain driving and comfort
- "Vehicle", equipment:
- "Units", - wiper linked with reverse gear
- "System". (refer to the "Visibility" section),
- guide-me-home lighting (refer to
the "Visibility" section),
- directional headlamp lighting (refer
System language to the "Visibility" section),
This menu allows you to select - interior mood lighting (refer to
the language used by the dis- the "Visibility" section),
play: Deutsch, English, Espanol, - electric parking brake automatic
Français, Italiano, Nederlands, functions (automatic application/
Polski, Portugues, Türkçe*. release)*,
the "Visibility" section),
* According to country.
51

NAVIDRIVE MULTIFUNCTION Controls

SCREEN
II
The screen can display the following - audio functions,

information: - trip computer (see end of the
- time section),
- date - results of the parking space
- ambient temperature measurement,
When the ambient temperature - visual parking sensors,
is between +3 °C and -3 °C, the - satellite navigation system infor- A. Access to the "Main Menu".
temperature display flashes (risk mation. B. Navigation in the screen menus.
of ice). The ambient temperature
displayed may be higher than C. Selection and confirmation in the
the actual temperature if the ve- menus of the function chosen or
hicle is parked in the sun. the value modified.
- alert messages and state of ve- D. Cancellation of the current op-
hicle systems, displayed tempo- eration or return to the previous
rarily. display.
E. Selection of the principal dis-
play (date, radio-CD/audio, tele-
phone, map, navigation and trip
For safety reasons, configuration computer).
of the multifunction screen by the B or F. In the menus, navigation,
driver must only be done when choice of activation/deactiva-
stationary. tion of functions and choice
of setting.
52

Main Menu TRIP COMPUTER The trip computer provides the following
information:
Press button A to display the "Main System which provides current infor- - range,
Menu": mation concerning the trip travelled
- current fuel consumption,
(range, fuel consumption...). II
- distance travelled,
- average fuel consumption,
Navigation/Guidance - average speed.
Monochrome screen A
) The next press then returns you
to the normal display.
Map
Traffic Information
Zero reset
Audio Functions
Telematics
Information displays
Configuration,
to configure the screen (date,
time...) and define vehicle
parameters
Video
) Press the control for more than
two seconds to reset to zero the
Vehicle Diagnostics distance travelled, the average
- "Alert log", fuel consumption and the aver-
) Press the button, located at the age speed.
- "Status of functions". end of the wiper stalk, to display
the various items of trip computer
data in succession.
53

TRIP COMPUTER Display of information - the trip "2" group with:

● the distance travelled,
System which provides current infor-
mation concerning the route travelled ● the average fuel con-
sumption,
II (range, fuel consumption, …) in the
multifunction screen. ● the average speed,
for the second trip.
Monochrome screen C
) Press the button, located at the Trip zero reset

end of the wiper stalk, to display
the various trip computer infor-
mation groups in succession:
MyWay or NaviDrive colour - the current information

screen group with:
● range,
● current fuel consump-
tion,
● distance remaining to
be travelled/Stop &
Start time counter,
) When the trip required is dis-
played, press the control for
- the trip "1" group with: more than two seconds.
● distance travelled, Trips "1" and "2" are independent
● average fuel con- but their use is identical.
sumption, For example, trip "1" can be used for
● average speed, daily figures and trip "2" for monthly
figures.
for the first trip.
54

A few definitions… Current fuel consumption Distance travelled

(mpg or l/100 km or km/l) (miles or km)
Range
(miles or km) This is the average fuel consump- This indicates the distance travelled II
tion during the last few seconds. since the last trip computer zero reset.
This indicates the distance which
can still be travelled with the fuel re-
maining in the tank in relation to the
average fuel consumption over the
last few miles (kilometres) travelled. Distance remaining to
destination
This function is only displayed from (miles or km)
20 mph (30 km/h).
This is the distance remaining to be
This value may vary following a travelled to the final destination. It
change in the style of driving or is either calculated instantly by the
the relief, resulting in a significant navigation system, if guidance is ac-
change in the current fuel con- Average fuel tivated, or entered by the user.
sumption. consumption
If the distance is not entered, dashes
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l) are displayed in place of the digits.
This is the average fuel
When the range falls below 20 miles consumption since the last trip com-
(30 km), dashes are displayed. After puter zero reset.
filling with at least 5 litres of fuel,
the range is recalculated and is dis-
played when it exceeds 60 miles Stop & Start time counter
(100 km). (minutes/seconds or hours/
Average speed minutes)
(mph or km/h)
If your vehicle is fitted with Stop &
If dashes are displayed continu- Start, a time counter calculates the
ously while driving in place of the This is the average speed calculated time spent in STOP mode during a
digits, contact a CITROËN dealer since the last trip computer zero reset journey.
or a qualified workshop. (ignition on). It resets to zero every time the igni-
tion is switched on with the key.
55

COMFORT
RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR VENTILATION, HEATING AND Air intake

AIR CONDITIONING
Check that the exterior grille for the
air intake at the bottom of the wind-
screen, is clean and free of dead
leaves, snow, etc.
III
Air distribution
1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting
vents.
2. Front quarter light window demi-
sting/defrosting vents.
3. Front side window demisting/
defrosting vents.
Adjustable side air vents.
4. Adjustable central air vents.
5. Front passenger footwell air out-
lets.
6. Adjustable 2nd row side air
vents, with air flow and tempera-
ture adjustment.
7. Rear passenger footwell air out-
lets.
8. Adjustable 3rd row side air vents.
The side air vents 8 apply only to the

7-seater versions.
56

COMFORT
Air vents Air conditioning Sensors

The air vents to the face have grilles To ensure that your system operates
and thumb wheels to adjust the air correctly, it is recommended that you
flow and direction (up-down, right- have it checked regularly.
left). Water arising from condensation
in the air conditioning drains away
Air circulation
through a hole provided for this pur- III
pose. A pool of water may thus form
Air vents on the floor underneath the under the vehicle when stationary.
front seats provide enhanced heat- To preserve the sealing of the air
ing for the rear seat positions; take conditioning compressor, operate
care not to obstruct them. the air conditioning at least once a
month.
Regardless of the season, the air
conditioning is useful, since it re- The automatic regulation of the air
Dust filter/Odour filter (active moves humidity and condensation. conditioning in the passenger com-
carbon) partment uses a number of sensors
To be effective, the air conditioning
should only be used with the win- (sunshine sensor, ambient tempera-
There is a filter for excluding odours ture sensor...) that relieve you of the
and dust. dows closed.
need to make frequent adjustments to
This filter has to be changed in ac- If after a lengthy stop in bright sunlight the displayed temperature.
cordance with the vehicle's servicing the interior temperature is excessive,
air the passenger compartment by Take care not to obstruct the sun-
schedule (see the servicing booklet). shine sensor, located on the dash-
opening the windows for a few mo-
ments, then close them again. board behind the instrument panel.
The air conditioning operates by
using power from the engine. This
results in a slight increase in fuel
consumption.
57

COMFORT
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING The level of air flow is shown by the 4. Air recirculation
progressive lighting of the warning
The air conditioning system oper- lamps depicting the fan blades 1. This control is for isolating disagree-
ates with the engine running. By reducing the flow to minimum, able odours or fumes coming from
you deactivate the air conditioning outside.
system (OFF). ) Press button 4 to cut off the intake
To maintain an acceptable level of of outside air and to activate recir-
III A. DRIVER'S CONTROL comfort in the passenger compart- culation of the air in the passenger
ment, you should not leave this con- compartment. The warning lamp
PANEL comes on.
trol too long in the OFF position.
Avoid the extended use of air re-
circulation (risk of deterioration
of air quality and misting).
2. Adjustment of air ) Press button 4 again to allow the
distribution intake of exterior air. The warning
lamp goes off.
) Press button 2 to make the dis-
play run through the different
types of air distribution.
The air distribution chosen

is shown by the lighting of
the corresponding warning
lamps on the display 2. 5. Air conditioning
1. Adjustment of the air fan The air fan control (adjusting the flow
speed of air) has to be activated in order for
air conditioning to be obtained.
The air fan adjustment only operates 3. Mode of adjustment ) Press button 5. The warning
when the engine is running. of temperature for the lamp comes on.
To adjust the air flow, press button 1: passenger To be effective, the air condi-
tioning should be operated only
) Press button 3 to have indepen- with the windows closed.
dent passenger control of cabin
air temperature. The warning If your vehicle is not equipped with
to increase the flow of air, lamp goes off. air conditioning, you will have the
same control panel but without the
While the passenger is adjusting tem- A/C button.
perature, the warning lamp comes on.
to decrease the flow of air.
58

COMFORT
6. Demisting/defrosting the 8. Adjustment of the fan air B. PASSENGER'S CONTROL

rear screen temperature PANEL
This function operates only if the en- This control is for adjusting the tem-
gine is running. perature of the air in the passenger
) Press button 6 to activate/de- compartment. It can be used in cold
activate the electric demisting/ weather as well as in hot weather,
defrosting of the rear screen and provided the air conditioning is ac- III
door mirrors. The warning lamp tive.
comes on. The adjustment of the temperature
is continuous and progressive start-
ing from left to right.
The demisting/defrosting
switches off automatically
to prevent excessive con-
sumption of power.
Adjustment of temperature
7. Rapid demisting/defrosting ) Press button 9 to take control of
of front and rear windows the temperature. The warning
and door mirrors lamp comes on.
) Rotate button 10 to adjust your
) Press button 7. The warning temperature.
lamp comes on. The adjustment of the temperature
This function simultaneously acti- is continuous and progressive start-
vates: ing from left to right.
- front demisting/defrosting,
- optimum flow of air,
- intake of exterior air,
- demisting/defrosting of door mir-
rors and heated rear screen,
- air conditioning, if necessary.
To stop the function, press button 7
again.
59

COMFORT
DIGITAL AIR CONDITIONING For this facility to operate, it is recom- 2. Adjustment of temperature
mended that all air vents are kept
open. To display the desired temperature,
The air conditioning system operates Using the AUTO mode will prevent press button:
with the engine running. the formation of mist inside the ve- - - to decrease the temperature,
hicle in cold or humid weather. - + to increase the temperature.
When starting from cold, in order to A setting around 21 will provide
III A. DRIVER'S CONTROL avoid a rush of cold air, the air fan an agreeable temperature level.
PANEL attains its optimum level progres- However, depending on your prefer-
sively. ence, anything between 18 and 24
is quite normal.
For optimum comfort, it is recom-
Manual resumption of one or mended to avoid a difference of set-
more functions tings of more than than 3 between
It is possible to adjust each of the right and left.
functions 3, 4, 6 and 10 manually. Actual temperatures experienced in
The display of the "AUTO" function the passenger compartment are de-
will then go off. pendent on external factors and for
this reason might not be identical to
those displayed.
Resumption by the driver of the On entering the vehicle, the inside
adjustment of passenger compart- temperature may be much colder (or
ment temperatures (for the front and hotter) than would be comfortable. It
1. Automatic comfort rear passengers) serves no purpose to alter the tem-
regulation A long press on the "AUTO" but- perature displayed in an attempt to
ton cancels all personal settings, attain your preference more rapidly.
A press on this button, including the passenger's tem- The system operates automatically
confirmed by the display of perature, and returns the system to correct the difference in tempera-
the A/C warning lamp and to automatic operation ture as soon as possible.
of AUTO on the screen, pro-
vides automatic control, at the tem-
perature selected, of all the following
5 functions:
- air flow,
- passenger compartment tem-
perature, left and right,
- air distribution,
- air conditioning,
- automatic air recirculation.
60

COMFORT
3. Adjustment of air fan This function is available when This button does not activate the air
speed/Activation of the you switch on the ignition as well conditioning, only the air fans. While
"REST" function as when you stop the engine. the REST function is active, the air
The air conditioning control screens flow and distribution cannot be modi-
Adjustment of air flow come on and the symbol represent- fied.
To adjust the flow of air, press the ing the air fan is displayed while the
button: function is available.
III
to increase the air flow, 4. Adjustment of air
On switching on the ignition: distribution
- A press on the REST button ac- ) Press button 4 to scroll
to decrease the air flow (this tivates the function for a period through the air distribution
button also has the REST of a few minutes. Two blades of settings on the screen.
function). the fan will fill to indicate that the
function is active.
The level of air flow is indicated on - The function can be deactivated
the display by the progressive filling and reactivated during the timed The air distribution you have chosen
of the fan blades. period. is confirmed by the corresponding
If you place the air fan on position 0, - At the end of the timed period, indicators in the screen.
the system is deactivated. The air the screen will go off. There are 7 possible adjustments.
fan display will be empty, with the in-
dication OFF.
On switching off the engine:
"REST" function: activation of
ventilation, engine off - The function can be activated
during a period of 30 seconds.
To allow a degree of comfort - A press on the REST button ac-
in the passenger compart- tivates the function for period of
ment while the engine is off, several minutes. The duration
you can operate the ven- and availability of the function
tilation for a few minutes using the depends on the state of charge
"REST" function. of the battery. Locking the vehi-
When you leave the vehicle, any cle has no effect on the function.
passengers present can still have - A further press before the end of
the benefit of air circulation, even the period of operation stops the
though the engine is not running. function definitively.
61

COMFORT
5. Air recirculation 6. Activation/deactivation of 7. Panel display mode: black

rear passenger controls panel function
This button activates the recir-
culation of air within the pas-
senger compartment and also This button allows you to This function turns the
has an automatic function. permit or not the rear pas- screen and switch backlight-
) Press button 5 to cut off the in- sengers to use their adjusting on or off.
III take of air from outside and to ment controls.
activate recycling of the air in There are three possible states for - Function activated, pressing any
the passenger compartment. the this button: button will illuminate the screen
warning lamp comes on. temporarily.
Locking of the rear - pressing button 7 deactivates
Whilst retaining the other adjust- passenger controls
ments, this function prevents un- the function, the illumination of
pleasant odours or fumes entering of buttons and screen is again
the vehicle. Avoid extended use of permanent.
air recirculation (risk of deterioration The driver imposes his adjustment This function optimises notably the
of air quality and misting). on the rear passengers. In this case, visual comfort for driving at night.
the rear passenger controls are de-
) Press button 5 again to allow entry activated.
of air from the outside. The warn-
ing lamp goes off. Authorisation of
Air recirculation can also be controlled by the rear passenger
pressing the switch located on the lower controls 8. Demisting/defrosting the
left of the steering wheel (see "Fixed
centred controls steering wheel"). rear screen
The rear passengers can use their
adjustment controls at their conve- This function is active only when the
nience. engine is running.
) Press on button 8 to activate/
Reduction of the deactivate the electric demist-
air flow for the rear ing/defrosting of the rear screen
passengers and, according to version, of the
door mirrors. The warning lamp
comes on and the symbol ap-
With additional air conditioning, in pears in the screen.
cold weather you are advised to
close the supply of air to the rear
passengers (no hot air distribution It switches off automatically
possible via these air vents). to prevent excessive con-
sumption of power.
62

COMFORT
9. Rapid demisting/defrosting B. PASSENGER CONTROL 12. Rear passengers (right/left)

of the front and rear PANELS
windows
- Press button 9. The warning By default, in AUTO
lamp comes on. position, the adjust-
ment of the air flow is
aligned on the front
This function gives a rapid
ventilation. III
demisting/defrosting of the
vehicle simultaneously with: ) Rotate the button
to decrease or in-
- front demisting/defrosting at op- crease the air flow.
timum temperature,
- optimum air flow,
- intake of exterior air,
- demisting/defrosting of the door
mirrors and rear screen,
- air conditioning, if necessary.
Press button 9 again or "AUTO"
11. Front passenger
to stop the function. Demisting/ The front passenger can adjust their
defrosting of the door mirrors and temperature control independently You can adjust the air flow only if this
rear screen remains activated. at any time by pressing buttons + is enabled by the driver (see button 6
and -. of the driver’s control panel).
The front passenger con-

trols the adjustment of their
own temperature.
With Stop & Start, when demist-
ing has been activated, the STOP The temperature setting for
mode is not available. the passenger is aligned
with that for the driver.
10. Air conditioning

) Press button 10 to activate the
air conditioning.
The A/C warning lamp comes on.
63

COMFORT
ADDITIONAL AIR C. REAR PASSENGER The level of air flow is indicated on

CONDITIONING CONTROL PANELS the display by the progressive filling
(RIGHT/LEFT) of the fan blades.
By reducing the flow to minimum,
you switch off the air conditioning
system (OFF).
13. Adjustment of
You can adjust the temperature and
III temperature the air flow only if the driver enables
The rear passengers can adjust their you to (see button 6 of the driver’s
temperature controls independently control panel).
via buttons + and -.
Their setting cannot be greater than
that of the driver by more than 2. This warning lamp signifies
Attainment of this maximum setting that the passenger controls
is confirmed by the flashing of its are locked, you can adjust
display. neither the temperature nor
the air flow, which remain aligned on
the preferences of the driver.
This warning lamp indi-

cates that the supply of air
14. Adjustment of air fan is cut off.
speed
This position is recommended in
The air fan operates only when the cold weather conditions, as the air
engine is running. vents do not supply warm air.
To adjust the flow of air, press on
button:
Additional air conditioning allows you
to optimise comfort levels in warm
weather conditions. It produces ad- to increase the air flow,
ditional fresh air which is supplied
using the rear air vents. The supply
of warm air via the rear air vents is
not possible using this system. to decrease the air flow.
64

COMFORT
SCENTED AIR FRESHENER To remove the air freshener To insert the air freshener
The scented air freshener releases a

fragrance into the passenger compart-
ment via the central air vents.
The air freshener contains an III

empty cartridge when your vehicle
is delivered. You therefore need to
insert a cartridge in order to use
the air freshener.
Adjustment of flow
) Press the button A, rotating it a After fitting or changing a cartridge:

quarter turn to the left as far as it ) place the air freshener back in its
will go. housing.
) Remove the air freshener from ) rotate it a quarter turn to the right.
the dashboard.
) Replace the cartridge (see
"Replacing a cartridge”).
) Rotate the button A to adjust (to

the left to reduce, to the right to
increase) or stop (maximum to
the left) the flow of scented air.
The central air vents have to be
open.
A cartridge lasts on average 3 months,

based on one hour’s usage per day.
65

COMFORT
Replacing a cartridge Air freshener button For safety, use only cartridges that
are provided for this purpose.
Retain the containers for storing
used cartridges.
Do not recharge or dismantle the
cartridges.
III Keep them out of reach of children
and animals.
Avoid all contact with the skin and
with the eyes.
In the event of ingestion, consult a
doctor and show them the product
packaging or label.
Do not install or remove a cartridge
while you are driving.
The recharge for the air freshener The air freshener button A is inde-
consists of a cartridge B and its pendent of the cartridge. Cartridges
sealed container C. are supplied without the air freshener
) Remove the protective film D. button A.
) Place the head of the cartridge B The button of the air freshener A
on the button A of the air fresh- can only be fitted to the centre of
ener. the dashboard with a cartridge at-
tached.
) Rotate it a quarter turn to lock
it on the button and remove the Therefore always keep the air fresh-
container. ener button A and one cartridge.
) Insert the air freshener into its Replacement cartridges are avail-
housing. able, depending on country, either on
the Internet site or from a CITROËN
You can change cartridges at any dealer or a qualified workshop.
time, keeping the used cartridges in
their original containers. Locations are provided in the glove
box for storing cartridges and con-
tainers.
66

COMFORT
FRONT SEATS 3. Seat height adjustment

Raise or lower the the control the
number of times necessary to obtain
the position desired.
4. Backrest angle
Operate the control and adjust the III
angle of the backrest.
It is possible to incline the back-
rest 45° rearwards by tilting it until it
locks; to unlock it, lift the control.
5. Armrest
To adjust the position of the armrest,
pull it up and then fully down, and
then raise it to the desired position.
6. Head restraint
To raise it, pull it upwards. To lower
it, press on the control as well as on
the head restraint.
The adjustment is correct when the
top of the head restraint is level with
the top of the head.
It can also be adjusted for tilt (de-
pending on version).
To remove it, press on the unlocking
button and pull it upwards.
To adjust the head restraint for-
wards/backwards, move the base of
MANUAL ADJUSTMENTS the head restraint to obtain the posi-
tion desired.
1. Forwards-backwards 2. Lumbar support
adjustment
Rotate the control until you attain Never drive without the head re-
Raise the control bar, then slide the the position desired. straints fitted. They must be in
seat to the position desired. place and adjusted correctly.
67

COMFORT
FRONT SEATS 2. Adjustment of backrest Heated seats control

angle and lumbar support
ELECTRIC ADJUSTMENTS
Push the top of control

forwards or backwards to
adjust the backrest angle.
III
Raise or lower control to
increase or decrease the
lumbar support.
With the engine running, the front

seats can be heated individually.
1. Adjustment of the The seats can also be adjusted elec-
seat height and angle, trically for a short period: ) Use the corresponding adjust-
ment wheel, placed on the inner
forwards-backwards - on opening one of the front side of each front seat, to switch
doors, on and select the level of heating
Raise or lower the front of
control to raise or lower the - after switching off the ignition. required:
front of the seat base (on 0: Off.
driver’s seat). 1: Low.
Raise or lower the rear of 2: Medium.
control to raise or lower the 3: High.
seat.
Action control forwards or

backwards to slide the seat
forwards/backwards.
68

COMFORT
Storing driving positions Storing a position Recalling a stored position

System which registers the electrical
settings of the driver's seat and door Using buttons M/1/2 Ignition on or engine running
mirrors. It enables you to store and ) Switch on the ignition. ) Press button 1 or 2 to recall the
recall two positions using the but- corresponding position.
tons on the side of the driver's seat. ) Adjust your seat and the door
mirrors. An audible signal indicates the end
) Press button M, then press but- of the adjustment. III
ton 1 or 2 within four seconds. You can interrupt the current move-
An audible signal indicates that ment by pressing button M, 1 or 2 or
the position has been stored. by using one of the seat controls.
Storing a new position cancels the A stored position cannot be recalled
previous position. while driving.
Recalling stored positions is deacti-
vated 45 seconds after switching off
the ignition.
69

COMFORT
REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS SECOND ROW SEATS "Comfort" position
Forwards-backwards adjustment
III
The rear head restraints can be

removed and have two positions:
- high, position for use, The 3 second-row seats are inde-
- low, storage position. pendent of each other and all the
To raise a head restraint, pull it up- same width. They all can have a
wards. Lift the control A, located at the front "comfort" position.
To lower it, press the lug then the of the seat, then move the seat to
head restraint. the desired position. Placing a seat in the "comfort"
To remove it, place it in the high posi- position
tion, push the lug and pull it upwards. ) Pull on the control B and guide
To refit it, engage the head restraint the seat rearwards.
rods in the holes taking care to re- The backrest reclines and the seat
main in line with the seat back. base pivots slightly.
Returning the seat to the initial

position
) Pull on the control B and allow
the seat to come forwards.
Never drive with the head restraints
removed, they must be in place
and correctly adjusted.
Always supervise any movements
of seats by children.
70

COMFORT
SECOND ROW SEATS Repositioning a seat Panels behind the second

(C4 PICASSO) row seats
) Raise the backrest and push it
Folding a seat rearwards until it locks in position
Always supervise any movements

III
of seats by children.
Panels below the second row seats

provide the bottom of the boot space
Each seat can be folded onto the with rigidity. They automatically follow
floor to enable you to modify your the seat movements (e.g. forwards-
vehicle’s interior space. backwards adjustment, folding).
) Pull firmly upwards on strap C, A storage area is available under-
as indicated by the red arrow, to neath the panels.
unlock the seat; keep pulling until
the seat is fully folded.
Push the seat backrest gently
forwards so that the backrest
folds onto the seat cushion. The
assembly lowers onto the floor.
71

COMFORT
SECOND ROW REAR SEATS From the boot (when loading, for Rigid panel
(GRAND C4 PICASSO) example)
You can fold the second-row seat(s)
Each seat can be folded onto the from the boot, having first folded the
floor to form a flat surface, thus en- third-row seats.
abling you to adapt your vehicle’s ) Pull on the strap D to unlock the
interior space. chosen seat, push the backrest
III gently forwards.
To prevent any damage to the
mechanism, the strap D unclips
under excessive force. Simply
clip it back in place to render the
system operational. Each second-row seat backrest has
a rigid panel attached.
This panel enables you:
- to have a continuous load sur-
face in the boot, whatever the
Repositioning a seat positions of the seats,
- to avoid having objects sliding
) Return the second-row seat rigid under the second-row seats.
panels to their initial position and
lock them in position.
) Raise the backrest and push it
rearwards until it locks in position.
Folding a seat Unlocking/Locking the rigid
panel
From the outside
) Slide the latch 1 on the panel
) Pull firmly upwards on strap C, downwards, to unlock.
as indicated by the red arrow, to ) Return the panel to the upright
unlock the seat; keep pulling until position, then slide the latch 1
the seat is fully folded. Before moving the third-row seats, upwards, to lock.
Push the seat backrest gently return the second-row rigid pan- Before positioning the rigid panels,
forwards so that the backrest els to their initial position and lock check that the second-row seats are
folds onto the seat cushion. The them in place. in the fully back position.
assembly lowers onto the floor. Never allow children to operate the 5-seater configurations do not have
seats without supervision. these rigid panels.
72

COMFORT
"Cinema seat" position Access to the third row seats Exit from the third row seats
) Hold the lever E in the raised po-
sition. The seat unlocks and the
seat cushion comes up against
the backrest.
) Push the seat backrest, still hold-
ing the lever E in the raised posi- III
tion.
If the table on the back of the first-
row seat is down, close it to enable
this operation.
Repositioning a seat, from

the outside, with the door
open
This position allows you to free up Access to the third-row seats is via
space between the first row and the the outer second-row seats. If there are passengers seated in
second row. ) Pull the lever E. The seat unlocks the third row:
Pull the lever E under the seat. and the seat cushion comes up ) manually return the assembly as
This position is only possible with against the backrest. far as possible rearwards; the
the outer seats. ) Hold the lever E in the raised seat does not return as far as the
position, pushing forwards. The maximum rearwards position so
whole seat slides towards the as to retain legroom for the third-
front seat. row passengers,
Space becomes free behind the ) fold the seat cushion until it
seat, the third-row passengers can locks.
get to their seats. Ensure that there is no object on
or under the seat that you want to
move.
Emergency exit: should the first

system fail (strap C), use of the le-
ver E allows third-row passengers
to leave.
Do not allow children to operate
the seats without supervision.
73

COMFORT
THIRD ROW SEATS (GRAND Unfolding the seat ) Pull on the control G, located at
C4 PICASSO) the bottom of the seat backrest.
The seat unlocks.
) Next push the backrest gently
Concertina boards forwards. The backrest pivots,
folding onto the seat base. The
seat base then folds into the
III stowage area provided for that
purpose.
) Reposition the concertina boards
over the folded seats.
) Return the second-row rigid

panels to their initial position and
lock them. Before moving the third-row seats,
) Having folded your concertina return the rigid plates of the second-
Two rigid concertina boards, which board, pull on the control F lo- row seats to the upright position
cannot be separated from the ve- cated behind the seat backrest. and lock them.
hicle, cover the 2 third-row seats, The backrest pivots rearwards, Do not try to fold a third-row seat
when these are in the folded posi- pulling the seat base with it. The that has not first had the backrest
tion. seat locks in the open position. fully locked in place.
Do not leave objects either on or
Folding the concertina boards underneath the seat bases of the
Repositioning the seat third-row seats when you are fold-
Pull on the control, the 3 sections of ing them.
the board will fold like a concertina. ) Return the second-row rigid Do not leave your hand on the con-
When the third-row seats are up- panels to their initial position and trol G as you fold the seats, as you
right, these concertina boards can lock them. risk trapping your fingers.
be left either: ) Lower the head restraints. Do not allow children to operate
- flat behind the seats, ) Correctly position the concertina the seats without supervision.
- in the vertical position, board vertically behind the seat.
thereby leaving a storage area avail-
able.
74

COMFORT
SEAT MODULARITY AND THE VARIOUS CONFIGURATIONS

Examples of C4 Picasso seat configurations Examples of seat configurations Grand C4 Picasso
III
5 seats 3 seats 7 seats 6 seats
Maximum loadspace
4 seats Maximum 5 seats 4 seats

loadspace
For easy modification of your interior vehicle space, all the rear seats can be individually folded: onto the second-row floor,
and under the third-row floor (in the case of the Grand C4 Picasso). You can then have a load floor that is continuous up
to the front seat backrests.
75

COMFORT
MIRRORS Automatic tilting in reverse gear

The objects observed are, in reality, System which provides a view of the
Door mirrors closer than they appear. ground during parking manoeuvres
Take this into account in order to in reverse gear.
Each mirror is adjustable to provide correctly judge the distance of ve-
the rear view needed for overtaking hicles approaching from behind.
or parking. They can also be folded Programming
III for parking in confined spaces.
) With the engine running, engage
The demisting/defrosting of the door reverse gear.
mirrors is linked to that of the rear
screen. ) Select and adjust the left-hand
and right-hand mirrors in suc-
Folding cession.
The adjustment is stored immedi-
) From outside: lock the vehicle ately.
using the remote control or the
key.
Switching on
) From inside: with the ignition on,
pull the control A in the central ) With the engine running, engage
position rearwards. reverse gear.
If the mirrors are folded using con- ) Move control A to the right or to
trol A, they will not unfold when the the left to select the correspond-
vehicle is unlocked. Pull again on ing mirror.
control A. The glass of the mirror selected tilts
downwards, in accordance with its
programming.
Unfolding
) From outside: unlock the vehicle Switching off
Adjustment
using the remote control or the ) Exit reverse gear and wait ten seconds.
With the ignition on: key. or
) move control A to the right or to ) From inside: with the ignition on,
the left to select the correspond- ) Return control A to the central
pull the control A in the central position.
ing mirror, position rearwards.
) move control B in one of four di- The mirror glass returns to its initial
The folding and unfolding of the door position.
rections to adjust, mirrors using the remote control can
) return control A to the central po- be deactivated by a CITROËN dealer The mirror glass also returns to its
sition. or a qualified workshop. initial position:
Never fold or unfold the electric fold- - if the speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h),
ing mirrors manually. - if the engine is switched off.
76

COMFORT
Rear view mirror Automatic day/night model STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT

Adjustable mirror providing a central The height and reach of the steer-
rearward view. ing wheel can be adjusted to adapt
the driving position to the size of the
Equipped with an anti-dazzle sys- driver.
tem, which darkens the mirror glass:
this reduces the nuisance to the
driver caused by the headlamps III
from following vehicles, low sun...
Manual day/night model
By means of a sensor, which mea-

sures the light from the rear of the
vehicle, this system automatically
and progressively changes between
the day and night uses.
Adjustment
In order to ensure optimum visibility
during your manoeuvres, the mirror ) First, adjust the driver's seat to
lightens automatically when reverse the most suitable position.
Adjustment gear is engaged. ) When stationary, pull the control
) Adjust the mirror so that the lever to unlock the steering wheel
glass is directed correctly in the adjustment.
"day" position. ) Adjust for height and reach.
) Push the control lever to lock the
Day/night position steering wheel adjustment.
) Pull the lever to change to the After locking, if you press firmly on
"night" anti-dazzle position. the steering wheel, a slight click may
) Push the lever to change to the be heard.
normal "day" position.
As a safety measure, the mirrors As a safety precaution, these

should be adjusted to reduce the operations must only be carried out
"blind spot". while the vehicle is stationary.
77

ACCESS
REMOTE CONTROL KEY Complete unlocking using the According to version, the door mir-
key rors unfold at the same time as the
System which permits central un- ) Turn the key to the left in the first unlocking action.
locking or locking of the vehicle us- driver's door lock to unlock the It also triggers the timed operation of the
ing the door lock or remotely. It is vehicle. exterior side spotlamps and the interior
also used to locate the vehicle, acti- Unlocking is confirmed by rapid welcome lighting for thirty seconds.
vate the guide-me-home lighting and flashing of the direction indicators
start the engine, as well as providing for approximately two seconds.
protection against theft.
According to version, the door mir-
rors unfold at the same time.
IV This also triggers the timed illumina-
The complete or se-
lective unlocking pa-
tion of the exterior side spotlamps rameter is set via the
and the interior welcome lighting for multifunction screen
a period of thirty seconds. configuration menu.
Complete unlocking is activated by

default.
Selective unlocking using
the remote control
Unlocking the vehicle ) Press the open pad-

lock once to unlock the
driver's door only. Selective unlocking is not available
Unfolding the key using the key.
) First press this button to unfold
the key. ) Press the open padlock again to
unlock the other doors and the
boot.
Complete unlocking using the

remote control Unlocking is confirmed by rapid
flashing of the direction indicators
) Press the open padlock for approximately two seconds.
to unlock the vehicle.
78

ACCESS
Locking the vehicle Deadlocking using the remote

control
Normal locking using the remote ) Press the closed pad-
control To allow long objects to be carried,
the vehicle can be locked from the lock to lock the vehicle
inside, using the central locking completely or press the
) Briefly press the closed closed padlock for more
padlock to lock the ve- control on the dashboard, even if
the tailgate or rear screen is open. than two seconds to
hicle. close the windows and
When the vehicle is locked, if it is the panoramic sunroof
unlocked inadvertently, it will lock blind automatically in
) Make a long press on the closed itself again automatically after thirty IV
padlock to lock the vehicle and addition to locking.
seconds unless a door is opened.
also close the windows and the ) Press the closed padlock again
panoramic sunroof blind. When closing the windows and/or within five seconds to deadlock
panoramic sunroof blind using the the vehicle.
remote control, you must ensure
that no one prevents them from
Normal locking using the key closing correctly.
) Turn the key to the right in the The folding and unfolding of the
driver's door lock to lock the ve- door mirrors using the remote
hicle. control can be deactivated by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified
Locking is confirmed by fixed light- workshop.
ing of the direction indicators for ap-
proximately two seconds.
According to version, the door mir-
rors fold at the same time.
Locking also triggers the timed
switching on of the exterior side
spotlamps and the guide-me-home
lighting, if this is activated.
If one of the doors, the rear screen

or the boot is still open, the central
locking does not take place.
79

ACCESS
Deadlocking using the key Folding the key Remote operation of lighting
) Turn the key to the right in the driv- A press on this button
er's door lock to lock the vehicle brings on the temporary
completely and hold it in this posi- illumination of sidelamps,
tion for more than two seconds to dipped beam headlamps,
close the windows automatically number plate lamps and
in addition to locking. the exterior side spotlamps located
) Turn the key to the right again underneath the door mirrors.
within five seconds to deadlock A second press before the end of the
IV the vehicle. timed period cancels the command.
Deadlocking is confirmed by fixed

lighting of the direction indicators for Anti-theft protection
approximately two seconds. ) First press this button to fold the Electronic engine immobiliser
According to version, the door mir- key. The key contains an electronic chip
rors fold at the same time. If you do not press the button when which has a special code. When the
folding the key, there is a risk of ignition is switched on, this code
damage to the mechanism. must be recognised in order for
starting to be possible.
Deadlocking also triggers the timed This electronic engine immobiliser
illumination of the exterior side spot locks the engine management sys-
lamps and guide-me-home lighting, Locating your vehicle tem a few minutes after the ignition
if this is activated. is switched off and prevents starting
This function allows you to identify of the engine by anyone who does
your vehicle from a distance, espe- not have the key.
cially when the light is poor. Your ve-
hicle must be locked. In the event of a fault,
you are informed by il-
Deadlocking renders the exterior and ) Press the closed padlock on the lumination of this warn-
interior door controls inoperative. remote control. ing lamp, an audible
It also deactivates the manual cen- This will bring on the courtesy lamps signal and a message in the screen.
tral control button. and exterior side spotlamps, as well In this case, your vehicle will not
Therefore, never leave anyone in- as flashing the direction indicators start; contact a CITROËN dealer as
side the vehicle when it is dead- for a few seconds. soon as possible.
locked. Keep safely the label attached to the
keys given to you on acquisition of
the vehicle.
80

ACCESS
STARTING Steering lock

1. "S": After removing the key, turn Vehicles equipped with a
the steering wheel to lock the turbocharger
steering. The key can only be
removed in position S. Never stop the engine without having
2. "M": Ignition switched on, the allowed it to run for a few seconds at
steering is unlocked (by turning idle, this being the time required for
the key to position M, move the turbocharger to return to a normal
the steering wheel gently if speed.
necessary). Flicking the accelerator at the mo- IV
3. "D": Starter position. ment of switching off the ignition
could cause serious damage.
Never turn the key to this position
when the engine is running.
1. "S": Steering lock A heavy object (key fob...), attached

Do not run the engine in an en- to the key and weighing down on
To unlock the steering, gently move closed space or where there is its shaft in the ignition switch, could
the steering wheel while turning the insufficient ventilation. cause a malfunction.
key, without forcing it. You must always to keep the
engine running when moving in
2. "M": Ignition on order to retain braking and steer-
ing power assistance.
Depending on the version of your Never remove the ignition key
vehicle, the orange and red warn- before the vehicle has come to a
ing lamps should also come on for complete stop.
a short time.
3. "D": Starter Key left in position "M"

audible warning
Release the key as soon the engine
has started. If you forget to remove the key from
If the first attempt fails, switch off the the ignition, the ignition is switched
ignition. Wait ten seconds then oper- off automatically after one hour.
ate the starter again. To switch the ignition back on, turn
the key to position S then back to
position M.
81

ACCESS
Remote control problems Changing the battery

Following disconnection of the ve-
hicle battery, replacement of the re-
mote control battery or in the event
of a remote control malfunction, you
can no longer unlock, lock or locate
your vehicle.
) First of all, use the key in the lock
to unlock or lock your vehicle.
IV ) Then, reinitialise the remote control.
Battery ref.: CR1620/3 volts.

Reinitialisation
) Switch off the ignition. If the remote control bat-
tery is flat, you are in-
) Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition on). formed by lighting of this
) Press the closed padlock imme- warning lamp, an audible
diately for a few seconds. signal and a message on
) Switch off the ignition and re- the multifunction screen.
move the key from the ignition ) Unclip the casing using a coin at
switch. the notch.
The remote control is fully opera- ) Slide the flat battery out of its lo-
tional again. cation.
) Slide the new battery into its lo-
cation observing the original di-
rection.
) Clip the casing together.
) Reinitialise the remote control.
If the problem persists, contact a

CITROËN dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
82

ACCESS
Do not throw the remote

Lost keys Locking the vehicle control batteries away, they
contain metals which are
Visit a CITROËN dealer with the ve- Driving with the doors locked may harmful to the environment.
hicle's registration document, your make access to the passenger com- Take them to an approved collection
personal identification documents partment by the emergency services point.
and if possible the key code label. more difficult in an emergency.
The CITROËN dealer will be able to As a safety precaution (with children
find the key code and the transpon- on board), remove the key from the
der code required to order a new ignition switch when you leave the
key. vehicle, even for a short time. IV
Remote control Anti-theft protection

The high frequency remote control is Do not make any modifications to
a sensitive system; do not operate it the electronic engine immobiliser
while it is in your pocket as there is a system; this could cause malfunc-
possibility that it may unlock the ve- tions.
hicle, without you being aware of it.
Do not repeatedly press the buttons
of your remote control out of range
and out of sight of your vehicle. You
run the risk of stopping it from work- When purchasing a second-
ing and the remote control would hand vehicle
have to be reinitialised.
The remote control does not operate Have the pairing of all of the keys
when the key is in the ignition switch, in your possession checked by a
even when the ignition is switched CITROËN dealer, to ensure that
off, except for reinitialisation. only your keys can be used to open
and start the vehicle.
83

ACCESS
ALARM Locking the vehicle with full If an opening (door, boot...) is not
alarm system closed fully, the vehicle is not locked
System which protects and provides but the exterior perimeter monitor-
a deterrent against theft and break- ing will be activated after a delay of
ins. It provides the following types of 45 seconds at the same time as the
monitoring. interior volumetric monitoring.
- Exterior perimeter
The system checks for opening of
IV the vehicle.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries
to open a door, the boot, the bonnet... Deactivation
) Press the unlocking button on
the remote control.
The alarm system is deactivated: the
- Interior volumetric Activation indicator lamp in the button goes off.
The system checks for any variation ) Switch off the ignition and get out
in the volume in the passenger com- of the vehicle.
partment. ) Press the locking button on the
The alarm is triggered if anyone remote control.
breaks a window, enters the pas-
senger compartment or moves in-
side the vehicle.
The monitoring system is active: the
Self-protection function indicator lamp in the button flashes
The system checks for the putting once per second.
out of service of its components. After the locking button on the re-
The alarm is triggered if the battery, mote control is pressed, the exterior
the central control or the wires of the perimeter monitoring is activated
siren are put out of service or dam- after a delay of 5 seconds and the
aged. interior volumetric monitoring after a
delay of 45 seconds.
For all work on the alarm system,

contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
84

ACCESS
Locking the vehicle with Reactivation of the interior Failure of the remote control
exterior perimeter monitoring volumetric monitoring
only ) Press the unlocking button on the To deactivate the monitoring func-
remote control to deactivate the tions:
Deactivate the interior volumetric exterior perimeter monitoring. ) Unlock the vehicle using the key
monitoring to avoid unwanted trig- in the driver's door lock.
gering of the alarm in certain cases ) Press the locking button on the
such as: remote control to activate all the ) Open the door; the alarm is trig-
monitoring functions. gered.
- leaving a pet in the vehicle,
The indicator lamp in the button ) Switch on the ignition; the alarm
- leaving a window partially open, again flashes once per second. stops. The indicator lamp in the
- washing your vehicle, button goes off. IV
Locking the vehicle without

Deactivation of the interior activating the alarm
volumetric monitoring Triggering of the alarm
) Lock or deadlock the vehicle us-
) Switch off the ignition. ing the key in the driver's door
This is indicated by sounding of the
) Within ten seconds, press the siren and flashing of the direction in- lock.
button until the indicator lamp is dicators for thirty seconds.
on continuously. Malfunction
) Get out of the vehicle.
) Press the locking button on the When the ignition is switched on, fixed il-
remote control immediately. The monitoring functions remain lumination of the indicator lamp in the but-
active until the alarm has been trig- ton indicates a malfunction of the system.
The exterior perimeter monitoring gered eleven times in succession.
alone is activated: the indicator lamp in Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
the button flashes once per second. When the vehicle is unlocked using a qualified workshop.
the remote control, rapid flashing
of the indicator lamp in the button
informs you that the alarm was trig- Automatic activation*
gered during your absence. When 2 minutes after the last door or the
the ignition is switched on, this boot is closed, the system is activat-
flashing stops immediately. ed automatically.
To be effective, this deactivation
must be carried out each time the ) To avoid triggering the alarm on
ignition is switched off. entering the vehicle, first press
the unlocking button on the re-
mote control.
85

ACCESS
ELECTRIC WINDOWS One-touch electric windows Safety anti-pinch

When the window rises and meets
System intended to open or close a There are two options: an obstacle, it stops and partially
window manually or automatically. lowers again.
Fitted with a safety anti-pinch system
and a system for deactivation in the - manual mode
event of misuse of the rear controls.
) Press or pull the control gently.
The window stops when the If the window cannot be closed (for
control is released. example, in the presence of ice),
immediately after the movement is
IV reversed:
) press and hold the control until
- automatic mode the window opens fully,
) Press or pull the control ) then pull the control immediate-
firmly. The window opens or ly and hold it until the window
closes fully when the control is closes,
released. ) continue to hold the control for
) Pressing the control again approximately one second after
stops the movement of the the window has closed.
window. The safety anti-pinch function
is not operational during these
operations.
1. Driver's electric window The electric window controls re-

control. main operational for approximately
2. Passenger's electric window 45 seconds after the ignition is
control. switched off or until the vehicle is
3. Rear right electric window locked after a door is opened.
control. If one of the passenger windows
4. Rear left electric window cannot be operated from the driv-
control. er's door control panel, carry out
5. Deactivation of the rear the operation from the control
electric window and door panel of the passenger door con-
controls. cerned, and vice versa.
86

ACCESS
Reinitialisation Deactivation of the rear

If a window does not rise automati- electric window and door
cally, its operation must be reini- controls Always remove the key from the
tialised: ignition when leaving the vehicle,
even for a short time.
) pull the control until the window
stops, If an obstacle is encountered during
operation of the electric windows,
) release the control and pull it you must reverse the movement of
again until the window closes the window. To do this, press the
fully, control concerned.
) continue to hold the control for When the driver operates the con- IV
approximately one second after trols for the passengers' electric
the window has closed, windows, they must ensure that no
) press the control to lower the one is preventing correct closing of
window automatically to the low the windows.
position, The driver must ensure that the
) when the window has reached passengers use the electric win-
the low position, press the con- dows correctly.
trol again for approximately Be aware of children when operat-
one second. ) For the safety of your children,
press control 5 to deactivate the ing the windows.
The safety anti-pinch function rear electric window controls re-
is not operational during these gardless of their position.
operations.
This warning lamp comes

on temporarily on the instru-
ment panel on deactivation
and each time the ignition is
switched on.
This control also deactivates the

interior controls for the rear doors
(refer to the section "Child safety -
Electric child lock").
87

ACCESS
DOORS From inside Manual central locking

control
Opening
System for locking or unlocking the
From outside vehicle - the doors and boot - from
the driving position.
IV
) Pull the interior control lever of

a front door; this unlocks the ve-
hicle completely.
) After unlocking the vehicle com-

pletely using the remote control
or the key, pull the door handle. Locking
) Press this button to lock the ve-
hicle.
The red indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
When the selective unlocking is

activated, the first press of the With the selective unlocking acti-
vated: If one of the doors is open, the cen-
remote control unlocking button tral locking does not take place.
permits unlocking of the driver's - the driver's door control unlocks
the driver's door only, If the boot or the rear screen is
door only. open, central locking from the in-
- the other door controls unlock side is active for the doors, to allow
the other doors and the boot. long objects to be carried.
The interior door controls do not
operate when the vehicle is dead-
locked.
88

ACCESS
Unlocking In the event of a fault with the cen-

) Press this button again to unlock tral locking, you must disconnect
the vehicle. the battery to lock the boot and so
ensure the complete locking of the
The red indicator lamp on the button vehicle.
goes off.
Locking the driver's door

If the vehicle is locked or dead-
locked from the outside, the red in- ) Insert the key in the lock, then
dicator lamp flashes and button A turn it to the right.
is inactive.
Unlocking
IV
) In this case, use the remote
control or the key to unlock the ) Above 6 mph (10 km/h), press Unlocking the driver's door
vehicle. this button to unlock the doors, ) Insert the key in the lock, then
the boot and the rear screen turn it to the left.
temporarily.
Ignition on:
Automatic central locking Activation Locking the front and rear
) Press this button for more than passenger doors
This system automatically locks the
doors, boot and rear screen while two seconds.
driving. A confirmation message appears in
You can activate or deactivate this the multifunction screen.
function. Deactivation
) Press this button again for more
than two seconds.
A confirmation message appears in
Locking the multifunction screen.
When the speed exceeds 6 mph
(10 km/h), the doors, the boot and ) Insert the key in the lock, located
the rear screen lock automatically. Emergency control on the edge of the door, then turn
it one eighth of a turn.
System which locks or unlocks the
doors mechanically in the event of
If one of the doors or the boot or a malfunction of the battery or of the Unlocking the front and rear
rear screen is open, the automat- central locking. passenger doors
ic central locking does not take
place. ) Pull the interior door opening
control.
89

ACCESS
BOOT ) Past the balancing point, allow When the rear screen is open,
the tailgate to lower and close you can access the boot by rais-
Opening itself (do not assist it or slow it ing the rear shelf using its tab
down). (C4 Picasso).
If the tailgate is not closed correctly: ) After unlocking the vehicle com-
pletely using the remote control
or the key, with the boot closed,
- when the engine is press the control 2 and raise the
running, this warning rear screen using the base 4 of
lamp comes on, accom- the wiper arm.
panied by a message in
IV the multifunction screen
for a few seconds,
- when the vehicle is moving The boot and the rear screen
(speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), cannot both be open at the same
this warning lamp comes on, ac- time.
companied by an audible signal
) After unlocking the vehicle com- and a message in the multifunc-
pletely using the remote control tion screen for a few seconds.
or the key, with the rear screen Closing
closed, pull on the lever 1 and
raise the tailgate. REAR SCREEN
) Lower the rear screen guiding
Opening it with the wiper arm until it is
Closing closed.
If the rear screen is not closed cor-

rectly:
- when the engine is

running, this warning
lamp comes on, accom-
panied by a message in
the multifunction screen
for a few seconds,
- when the vehicle is moving
This opening gives easy access (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)),
) Lower the tailgate using one of to the boot, even if you are parked this warning lamp comes on, ac-
the two handholds 3, located on close to a wall or another vehicle. companied by an audible signal
the interior trim. and a message in the multifunc-
tion screen for a few seconds.
90

ACCESS
Emergency boot release PANORAMIC SUNROOF Closing the roof blind

System for mechanical unlocking of It is fitted with an electrically con- ) Rotate the control knob B to po-
the boot in the event of a battery or trolled blind. sition 0 to close the roof blind.
central locking malfunction.
Recommendations
- Pressing the locking button on
the remote control for more than
two seconds will close the blind
(practical when, for example, IV
you leave your vehicle in a sunlit
car park).
- On returning to your vehicle, a
press on control knob B reposi-
tions the blind to the last position
selected.
Unlocking Opening the roof blind Anti-pinch

) Fold back the rear seats to gain
access to the lock from inside ) Rotate the control knob B to slide The blind has an anti-pinch func-
the boot. the roof blind to the desired position.
tion (positions 1 to 9). At the end of its travel, when the blind
) Insert a small screwdriver into
hole A of the lock to unlock the encounters an obstacle on closing, it
tailgate. stops and moves back slightly.
) Push the white part, located in- Following a fault or after a battery
side the lock, to the left to unlock disconnection during the movement
the boot. of the blind or after it has stopped,
you must re-initialise the anti-pinch
function:
) place the blind in the closed po-
sition,
) press control knob B for approxi-
mately two seconds.
91

ACCESS
FUEL TANK Refuelling Opening the filler cap may result in

an inrush of air. This is entirely nor-
mal and results from the sealing of
Capacity of the tank: approxi- the fuel system.
mately 60 litres. ) Press control switch A, situated
on the switch panel on the left of
Low fuel level the dashboard, until the fuel flap
opens.
When the low fuel level is This control switch remains ac-
reached, this warning lamp tive for a few minutes after
IV on the instrument panel switching of the ignition. If nec-
comes on, accompanied by essary, switch the ignition on
an audible warning and a message again to reactivate it.
on the multifunction screen. ) Take care to select the pump
When it first comes on, about 7 litres A label on the inside of the fuel filler that delivers the correct type of
of fuel remain in the tank. flap reminds you of the type of fuel fuel for your vehicle.
Until sufficient fuel has been to use, depending on your engine ) Introduce the nozzle so as to push
added, this warning lamp appears type. in the metal non-return flap B.
every time the ignition is switched ) Make sure that the nozzle is
on, accompanied by an audible pushed in as far as possible
warning and a message. Depending before starting to refuel (risk of
on version, this audible warning blowback).
and message are repeated with ) Maintain this position throughout
increasing frequency as the fuel the refuelling operation.
level drops towards "0".
) Push the fuel flap to close it.
Refuel as soon as possible to avoid
running out.
Additions of fuel must be of at least

5 litres to be registered by the fuel
gauge.
With Stop & Start, never refuel with If you are filling your tank to
the system in STOP mode; you the top, do not persist after the
must switch off the ignition with the 3rd cut-off; this could cause
key. malfunctions.
92

ACCESS
The petrol or Diesel engine of your ve- Quality of the fuel used for Quality of the fuel used for
hicle is fitted with a catalytic converter, a petrol engines Diesel engines
device which helps to reduce the level of
harmful emissions in the exhaust gases.
For petrol engines, you must use
unleaded fuel.
The filler neck is narrower, allowing only
unleaded petrol nozzles to be intro-
duced. The petrol engines are perfectly The Diesel engines are perfectly
compatible with E10 or E24 type pet- compatible with biofuels which con-
rol biofuels (containing 10 % or 24 % form to current and future European IV
ethanol), conforming to European standards (Diesel fuel which com-
standards EN 228 and EN 15376. plies with standard EN 590 mixed
If you have put in the wrong fuel with a biofuel which complies with
for your vehicle, you must have E85 type fuels (containing up to
85 % ethanol) are reserved exclu- standard EN 14214) available at the
the fuel tank drained and filled pumps (containing up to 7 % Fatty
with the correct fuel before start- sively for vehicles marketed for the
use of this type of fuel (BioFlex ve- Acid Methyl Ester).
ing the engine.
hicles). The quality of the ethanol The B30 biofuel can be used in cer-
must comply with European stan- tain Diesel engines; however, this
dard EN 15293. use is subject to strict application
For Brazil only, special vehicles are of the special servicing conditions.
Fuel cut-off marketed to run on fuels containing Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
up to 100 % ethanol (E100 type). qualified workshop.
Your vehicle is equipped with a safe- The use of any other type of (bio)fuel
ty device which cuts off the fuel sup- (vegetable or animal oils, pure or di-
ply in the event of a collision. luted, domestic fuel...) is strictly pro-
hibited (risk of damage to the engine
and fuel system).
93

VISIBILITY
EXTERIOR LIGHTING Programming A. Main lighting mode selection

CONTROLS ring: turn it to position the symbol
Various automatic lighting control required facing the mark.
Control stalk for the selection and con- modes are also available depending
trol of the various front and rear lamps on options:
providing the vehicle's lighting. - guide-me-home lighting,
- automatic illumination of headlamps, Lamps off.
- directional lighting.
Main lighting
The various front and rear lamps of Automatic illumination of head-
the vehicle are designed to adapt lamps.
the driver's visibility progressively in
Manual controls
V relation to the climatic conditions:
Sidelamps.
- sidelamps, to be seen,
- dipped beam headlamps to see
without dazzling other drivers,
- main beam headlamps to see Dipped headlamps or
clearly when the road is clear. main beam headlamps.
B. Stalk for switching headlam-

ps: pull the stalk towards you
to switch the lighting between
Additional lighting dipped and main beam head-
lamps.
Other lamps are fitted to fulfil the require-
ments of particular driving conditions: In the lamps off and sidelamps
The lighting is controlled directly by modes, the driver can switch on the
- a rear foglamp to be seen from a the driver by means of the ring A main beam headlamps temporarily
distance, and the stalk B. ("headlamp flash") by maintaining a
- front foglamps for even better pull on the stalk.
forward vision,
- directional headlamps for improved Displays
visibility when cornering,
- daytime running lamps to be Illumination of the corresponding
seen during the day. indicator lamp in the instrument pan-
el confirms that the lighting selected
is on.
94

VISIBILITY
C. Foglamps selection ring. In good or rainy weather, both day

The foglamps operate with the side- and night, use of the front foglamps
lamps and the dipped and main and the rear foglamp is prohibited.
beam headlamps. In these situations, the power of
their beams may dazzle other dri-
vers. They should only be used in
Model with rear foglamp only Model with front and rear fog or snow.
foglamps
In these weather conditions, it is
your responsibility to switch on the
foglamps and dipped beam head-
lamps manually as the sunshine
sensor may detect sufficient light.
Do not forget to switch off the front
foglamps and the rear foglamp V
when they are no longer necessary.
Switching off the lamps when

the ignition is switched off
- 1st turn forwards: rear foglamp on. - 1st turn forwards: front foglamps on. On switching off the ignition, all of the
- 1st turn rearwards: rear foglamp off. - 2nd turn forwards: rear foglamps on. lamps turn off immediately, except
for the dipped beam headlamps if
- 1st turn rearwards: rear foglamps off. guide-me-home lighting is activated.
- 2nd turn rearwards: front foglamps off.
Switching on the lamps after
the ignition is switched off
To reactivate the lighting control, rotate
ring A to the "0" position - lamps off,
then to the desired position.
In some weather conditions (e.g. low On opening the driver's door a
temperature or humidity), the pres- temporary audible signal warns the
ence of misting on the internal sur- driver that the lighting is on.
face of the glass of the headlamps The lamps, with the exception of
and rear lamps is normal; it disap- the sidelamps, switch off automati-
pears after the lamps have been on cally after a period that depends on
for a few minutes. the state of charge of the battery
(entering energy economy mode).
95

VISIBILITY
LED lamps Daytime running lamps Manual guide-me-home

lighting
Daytime lighting, compulsory in cer-
tain countries, which comes on auto- The temporary lighting of dipped
matically when the engine is started headlamps after the vehicle's igni-
making the vehicle more visible to tion has been switched off makes
other users. the driver's exit easier when the light
is poor.
This function is assured:

- in countries where it is imposed
by regulations,
V by illumination of the dipped
beam headlamps with the side-
They come on when the engine is lamps and number plate lamps.
started. - for other countries where it is
Depending on the destination country, provided,
they are used for: by the use of dedicated LED lamps.
- daytime running lamps in day mode
and sidelamps in night mode,
or
Switching on
- sidelamps in day and night mode
Where LED lamps are fitted, the fila- ) With the ignition off, "flash" the
ment bulbs for the sidelamps in the headlamps using the lighting
This function can be activated or stalk B.
front lamp units are not used. deactivated via the vehicle configu-
ration menu. ) A second "headlamp flash"
switches the function off again.
Switching off
The manual guide-me-home lighting
switches off automatically after a set
Activation or deactivation of this time.
lighting is done via the vehicle con- The instruments and controls (mul-
figuration menu. tifunction screen, air conditioning
control panel, ...) are not illuminated, The manual guide-me-home light-
except in night mode with manual or ing is also available by pressing the
automatic illumination of headlamps. lighting button on the remote con-
trol (refer to the section "Access -
§ Remote control key").
96

VISIBILITY
Automatic illumination of Automatic "guide-me-home"

headlamps lighting
When a low level of ambient light When the automatic illumination of
is detected by a sunshine sensor, headlamps function is activated,
the number plate lamps, sidelamps under low ambient light the dipped
and dipped beam headlamps are beams headlamps come on au-
switched on automatically, without tomatically when the ignition is
any action on the part of the driver. switched off.
They can also come on if rain is de-
tected, at the same time as auto-
matic operation of the windscreen
wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns Activation Programming V
to a sufficient level or after the wind- ) Turn ring A to the "AUTO" posi- The activation and the duration of
screen wipers are switched off, the tion. The activation of the function the guide-me-home lighting can
lamps are switched off automatically. is accompanied by a message in be set in the vehicle configuration
the screen. menu.
For a vehicle fitted with the mono-
chrome screen A, the duration is fixed.
Deactivation
) Turn ring A to a position other
than "AUTO". Deactivation of
the function is accompanied by a
message in the screen.
In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor
may detect sufficient light. Therefore,
the lighting will not come on auto-
matically.
Operating fault
Do not cover the sunshine sen-
In the event of a malfunction of the sor, linked with the rain sensor and
sunshine sensor, the lamps comes located in the centre of the wind-
on, a message appears in the screen behind the rear view mirror;
screen, accompanied by an audible the associated functions would no
signal. longer be controlled.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
97

VISIBILITY
EXTERIOR SIDE SPOTLAMPS MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF

HEADLAMPS OF XENON HEADLAMPS
Switching on To avoid dazzling other road users,

the height of the halogen bulb head- This system adjusts the height of the
The side spotlamps come on tempo- lamps must be adjusted according xenon headlamp beams automati-
rarily: to the load in the vehicle. To do this, cally and when stationary, according
- when you unlock the vehicle, turn the control, located below the to the load in the vehicle, so as to
dashboard to the left of the driver, to avoid causing a nuisance to other
- when you press the lighting button the appropriate position: road user.
on the remote control,
0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.
- with the automatic guide-me-home If a malfunction occurs,
lighting, on switching off the ignition, -. 3 people.
this warning lamp is dis-
- when you remove the key from 1. 4 to 7 people. played in the instrument
the ignition, -. Intermediate setting. panel, accompanied by
- when you open a door, 2. 4 to 7 people + maximum autho- an audible signal and a message in
- when you use the remote control rised loads. the screen.
to locate the vehicle. -. Intermediate setting. The system then places your head-
lamps in the lowest position.
3. Driver + maximum authorised loads.
Do not touch the xenon bulbs.

qualified workshop.
Initial setting is position "0".
98

VISIBILITY
DIRECTIONAL LIGHTING Programming

When the dipped or main beam The function is activat-
headlamps are on, this function en- ed or deactivated via
ables the light beam to follow the di- the multifunction screen
rection of the road. configuration menu.
The use of this function, coupled
with the xenon headlamps only,
considerably improves the quality of
your lighting when cornering.
Operating fault
with directional lighting V
If a malfunction occurs, this
warning lamp flashes on the
instrument panel, accompa-
nied by a message on the
multifunction screen.
qualified workshop.
When stationary or moving at very

low speed or when reverse gear is
without directional lighting engaged, the system is inactive.
The status of the system remains
in the memory when the ignition is
switched off.
On vehicles fitted with daytime run-
ning lamps, the function is activated if
the lighting stalk is in the "AUTO" or
"Dipped/main beam headlamps"
position. In position "0", the function
is not activated.
99

VISIBILITY
WIPER CONTROLS Manual controls Rear wiper

System for selection and control of The wiper commands are issued di-
the various front and rear wiping rectly by the driver by means of the
modes for the elimination of rain and stalk A and the ring B.
cleaning.
The vehicle's front and rear wipers
are designed to improve the driver's
visibility progressively according to
the climatic conditions.
Windscreen wipers
A. Wiping speed selection stalk:
V
B. Rear wiper selection ring:
fast (heavy rain),
normal (moderate rain), park,
intermittent (proportional to
the speed of the vehicle),
intermittent wipe,
park,
single wipe (press down and

release), wash-wipe (set duration).
Programming or
Various automatic wiper control
modes are also available according automatic, then If a significant accumulation of snow
to the following options: single wipe (see or ice is present, or when using a
- automatic rain sensitive windscreen following page). tailgate bicycle carrier, deactivate
wipers, the automatic rear wiper via the
multifunction screen configuration
- rear wiping on engaging reverse menu.
gear.
100

VISIBILITY
Reverse gear Automatic rain sensitive

The automatic rain sensitive wipers
When reverse gear is engaged, the windscreen wipers must be reactivated if the ignition has
rear wiper will come into operation if been off for more than one minute,
the windscreen wipers are operating. The windscreen wipers operate au-
tomatically, without any action on the by pushing the stalk downwards.
part of the driver, if rain is detected
(sensor behind the rear view mirror),
Programming adapting their speed to the intensity
of the rainfall.
The function is activated
or deactivated via the Activation
vehicle configuration Operating fault
menu. If an automatic wiping malfunction
This function is activated occurs, the wipers will operate in in-
by default. termittent mode. V
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
Windscreen and headlamp
wash This is controlled manually by the
driver by pushing the stalk down- Do not cover the rain sensor, linked
) Pull the windscreen wiper stalk wards to the "AUTO" position. with the sunshine sensor and locat-
towards you. The windscreen It is accompanied by a message in ed in the centre of the windscreen
wash then the windscreen wip- the screen. behind the rear view mirror.
ers operate for a fixed period.
Switch off the automatic rain sen-
The headlamp washers only operate sitive wipers when using an auto-
when the dipped beam headlamps Switching off matic car wash.
are on.
In winter, to avoid damaging the
wiper blades, it is advisable to wait
until the windscreen is completely
clear of ice before activating the
automatic rain sensitive wipers.
This is controlled manually by the

driver by moving the stalk upwards
then returning it to position "0".
It is accompanied by a message in
the screen.
101

VISIBILITY
Special position of the

windscreen wipers
V This position permits release of the

windscreen wiper blades. To maintain the effectiveness of the
It is used for cleaning or replacement "flat-blade" type of wiper blades, it
of the blades. It can also be useful, is advisable to:
in winter, to detach the blades from - handle them with care,
the windscreen. - clean them regularly using soapy
water,
- avoid using them to retain card-
) Any action on the wiper stalk in board on the windscreen,
the minute after switching off the - replace them at the first signs
ignition places the blades verti- of wear.
cally on the screen.
) To park the blades again, switch
on the ignition and operate the
wiper stalk.
102

VISIBILITY
COURTESY LAMPS Map reading lamps

) With the ignition on, press the
corresponding switch.
Panoramic sunroof courtesy

lamps
These courtesy lamps have two oper-
ating modes:
- automatic lighting when a door is
opened or when the front cour- V
tesy lamp is in the "permanent
1. Front courtesy lamp It switches off gradually: lighting" position,
2. Map reading lamps - when the vehicle is locked, - permanent lighting.
- when the ignition is switched on,
Front courtesy lamp - 30 seconds after the last door is
closed.
Opening the boot switches on the
In this position, the courtesy Permanently off. third row courtesy lamp and the
lamp comes on gradually: boot lamps.
- when the vehicle is unlocked, Permanent lighting.

- when a door or the boot is
opened,
- when the key is removed from In permanent lighting mode, different
the ignition, lighting times are available:
- when the remote control locking - with the ignition off, approxi-
button is activated, in order to locate mately ten minutes,
your vehicle.
- in energy economy mode, approxi-
mately thirty seconds,
- with the engine running, unlimited.
103

VISIBILITY
LIGHTING PACK Operation Front door pockets with

This back-lit control, located near
automatic lighting
Interior mood lighting the steering wheel below the dash- The lighting for the door pockets
board, is used to switch on and off comes on automatically when you
This lighting, available once the and adjust the brightness of this place a hand inside one of the com-
sidelamps are on, in night mode, lighting. partments.
provides subdued lighting in the
passenger compartment. It goes off after a few seconds when
To increase brightness: you take your hand away.
) Press the right of the control to
obtain the desired level.
Reading lamps on front seat
backrests
V
To reduce brightness:
) Press the left of the control to obtain
the desired level.
The setting is stored when the ignition
is switched off.
This function activates the light sources

which are located in the dashboard, near
the interior door levers and in the roof.
Interior welcome lighting
When unlocking the vehicle with the There are reading lamps in the back-
remote control or the key, the foot- rests of the front seats, behind the
well lamps, interior lamps and interior rear tables. They can operate only
mood lighting sources come on for when the table is lowered.
30 seconds.
) Press the "On/Off" button to switch
This function cannot be deactivated. the reading lamp on or off.
104

FITTINGS
SLIDING SUN VISOR The visors are fitted with a lock- Child surveillance mirror
ing system on their central housing
when the blind is reeled in. To re-
Sliding blinds move the visor from its central hous-
ing or to reposition it, it must be in a
vertical position.
Do not attach or suspend heavy

objects on the slide rail of the sun
blind.
A child surveillance mirror is fitted

TOLL CARD/CAR PARK above the rear view mirror. This al- VI
Sliding blinds are provided for your TICKET WINDOWS lows you to monitor the vehicle’s
protection against bright sunlight. rear passengers, or it can facilitate
They can be adjusted manually. Facility for affixing toll cards and/or conversation between the front and
) Slide the blind to the desired po- car park tickets. rear passengers without the need to
sition by pushing at A. These windows are located on each move the rear view mirror.
side of the base of the child surveil- It can be folded away to eliminate
lance mirror. dazzle.
They are two non-reflective areas of
the athermic windscreen.
Visor rails The athermic windscreen limits

The blinds are extended on the sun heating of the passenger compart-
visor rails. ment by reducing the effects of the
sun's rays (ultra-violet). It consists of
Fold the visor downwards, to protect a reflective layer, which also blocks
against dazzle to the face. certain radio-electric signals (auto-
If dazzle is coming from the side matic toll card payments, etc.).
windows, detach the visor from its
housing above the centre of the
windscreen and pivot it to the side.
105

FITTINGS
UPPER STORAGE ILLUMINATED GLOVE BOX COOLED GLOVE BOX

COMPARTMENTS
There are large storage compart- It includes storage areas for a bottle of It is cooled by a ventilation nozzle
VI ments at the top of the dashboard, water, the vehicle handbook pack, ... that can be closed manually.
one on the driver's side and one on Its lid has areas for storing a pen, a It is directly linked to the vehicle’s air
the passenger's side. pair of spectacles, tokens, cards, a conditioning system, being supplied
) To open, press the button at the cup, fragrance cartridges... with cooled air whatever the require-
bottom corner. ) To open the glove box, raise the ments of the passenger compart-
) To close, lower the lid fully until it handle and lower the lid. ment.
clicks. The lamp comes on automatically The cooling of your glove box only
when the lid is opened. operates when the engine is running
and the air conditioning is on.
For safety reasons, the up- For safety reasons, the

per storage compartments glove box should remain
should be kept closed when closed when the vehicle is
the vehicle is moving. moving.
106

FITTINGS
COOL STORAGE The cooled storage has a ventilation CENTRE CONSOLE

nozzle. It is directly linked to the ve-
hicle’s air conditioning system, and The centre console contains, de-
is supplied with cooled air whatever pending on version:
the settings for the passenger com- - two cup-holders,
partment.
- two storage compartments,
The cooling of this storage area only
operates when the engine is running - a 12 V accessory socket (Maxi-
and the air conditioning is on. mum power: 120W); this is
operational when the ignition is
on.
There may be an additional 12 V
accessory socket in the boot,
For safety reasons, the - a USB port.
cooled storage compart-
ment should be kept closed
when the vehicle is moving. SMOKER'S KIT
Vehicles with the electronic gearbox VI
system or an automatic gearbox
possess an additional storage space
in the middle of the dashboard.
) To open, pull the handle and lower
the lid.
The cooled storage has automatic
lighting.
It can accommodate a 1.5 litre bottle
and two 0.5 litre bottles, for example.
Two cup-holders are available when
the lid is open.
This kit consists of a cigar lighter

and a portable ashtray.
These are located on the centre
console. The portable ashtray can
be placed in a cup holder.
) To use the cigar lighter, press it
in and wait a few seconds until it
pops out automatically.
107

FITTINGS
MATS
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
Removable carpet protection com- pedals:
Front door
ponent. - only use mats which are suited
to the fixings already present in The front door pockets can hold ob-
the vehicle; their use is essen- jects equivalent in volume to a 1.5 litre
tial, bottle.
- never fit one mat on top of They may have their own lighting,
another. which comes on automatically when
your hand approaches.
This lighting goes out automatical-
ly after a few moments when your
hand is taken away.
USB BOX
Fitting This connection box, consisting of an Rear door

VI auxiliary JACK socket and a USB port,
When fitting the mat for the first time, is located on the centre console. The rear door pockets can hold
on the driver's side, use only the fix- It permits the connection of portable objects equivalent in volume to a
ings provided in the wallet attached. equipment, such as a digital audio 0.5 litre bottle.
The other mats are simply placed on player of the iPod® or USB memory
the carpet. stick type.
It reads the audio file formats which are
Removal transmitted to your audio equipment
and played via the vehicle's speakers.
To remove the mat on the driver's side: You can manage these files using the
) move the seat as far back as steering mounted controls or the audio
possible, equipment control panel and display
) unclip the fixings, them on the multifunction screen.
) remove the mat.
Refitting
When it is in use, the portable equip-
To refit the mat on the driver's side: ment charges automatically.
) position the mat correctly,
) refit the fixings by pressing,
) check that the mat is secured For more information on the use of
correctly. this equipment, refer to the "Audio
and Telematics" section.
108

FITTINGS
AIRCRAFT-STYLE REAR ) Pull the table downwards to

TABLES open. SECOND ROW FOOTWELL
) To stow the table, raise it until
the latch locks.
For safety reasons, these tables col-
lapse downwards if excessive pressure
is exerted on them.
Individual reading lamps
Rear table stowed

VI
Depending on the configuration, the
vehicle has one or two storage com-
partments under the footwell, locat-
ed between the seats of the first and
second rows. They can be accessed
via clipped flaps with a handle A.
The compartment on the left-hand
side may contain the temporary
puncture repair kit and the tool kit
Reading lamps C may be fitted in may be stored in the compartment
the front seat backrests, behind the on the right-hand side. In this case
tables. They illuminate the surface the flap is secured by means of a
of the tables without disturbing the screw B. To gain access to the com-
Rear table opened other passengers. partment, turn the screw a quarter
They can be used only while the table turn anticlockwise using a coin.
The backrests of the front seats are is down. On vehicles fitted with pneumatic
fitted with aircraft-style tables. These ) Press the "on/off" button to turn suspension, the left-hand flap is
incorporate a cup-holder A and a the lamp on or off. locked.
retaining strap B, for the placing of
objects.
109

FITTINGS
THIRD ROW STORAGE SIDE BLINDS

(GRAND C4 PICASSO) (GRAND C4 PICASSO)
Third-row passengers may have Fitted on the 2nd and 3rd row rear ) Pull on the tab and anchor the
storage pockets in the side panel windows, these protect young children blind on the hooks.
and each of them will have a cup- from the sun's rays.
holder (7 seater model).
Do not attach or suspend heavy
objects in the environs of the sun
SIDE BLINDS visors (blind housings and hooks...).
(C4 PICASSO)
Fitted on the 2nd row rear windows,
these protect young children from
the sun's rays.
VI
Second row
) Pull on the tab A and anchor the
blind on the hooks B.
Third-row
) Pull on the tab A and anchor the
blind on the hook B. The blinds are fitted in the third-row
trim panels.
) Pull on the tab and anchor the
blind on the hooks.
110

FITTINGS
LUGGAGE COVER
(C4 PICASSO)
This is in two parts.
VI
Rear parcel shelf Front parcel shelf

Removal Removal
) Unhook the cords. ) First remove the rear shelf.
) Push upwards, then lift on each ) Push upwards, then lift on each
side of the luggage cover. side.
Fitting Refitting
) Offer up the shelf to its housings ) Direct the flap downwards.
and push firmly down until it en- ) Offer up the shelf to its housings
gages. and push firmly down until it en-
) For the shelf to rise with the tail- gages.
gate, take the cords and attach
them on the tailgate.
111

FITTINGS
MODUBOX (C4 PICASSO) Use outside the vehicle LUGGAGE COVER ROLLER
(GRAND C4 PICASSO)
Equipment for use both inside the
vehicle and away from the vehicle.
It comprises a shopping trolley and Position 1
a flexible bag (insulated on some
versions) which can be used inde- 5-seat configuration; installed be-
pendently of each other depending hind the second-row seats, with the
on your needs (by detaching the fas- third-row seats folded away.
tenings on each side at the top and
bottom).
) Press on the recess on the left

VI hand side of the Modubox to
raise (or lower) the handle.
Stowing inside the vehicle

) Perform the operations in re- Installing the roller
verse to fold and stow inside the ) Position the left-hand end of the
vehicle. roller in notch A.
To use ) If you have used your Modubox ) Compress the right-hand end of
) Unhook the red strap to free the away from the vehicle, take care the roller and place it in notch B.
Modubox. to reposition it correctly in the ) Pull out the blind until it reaches
housings provided for this pur- the boot pillars.
) Unhook the black strap then pose.
press on the round buttons on ) Insert the guides of the blind into
either side of the Modubox si- the rails on the pillars.
multaneously to unfold it.
BAG HOOK
Located on the left-hand interior wall Removing the roller
of the boot, this can be used to se-
cure shopping bags. ) Carry out these operations in
reverse order.
112

FITTINGS
) Engage the lug on the left of the Position 3

The roller has a moving flap to roller in notch C.
avoid interference with the second- 7-seat configuration; stowed behind
row passengers when the seats ) Pass the right-hand end above
the third-row armrest. the third row seats when these are
are in the "reclined" position. folded away.
) Engage the lug in notch D.
) Pull the seat belt(s) so that they
reel out without locking.
Position 2 ) Pull out the blind and engage
the guides into the rails on the
7-seat configuration; installed be- pillars.
hind the third-row seats when these ) Lock the seat(s) in position.
are folded away. This position con-
ceals objects stowed in the boot
from outside view.
VI
Removing the roller
) Push the flap towards the seat Installing the roller
backrest. ) Fold the concertina boards.
) Lift the concertina board by tak- ) Position the roller, with the blind
ing it at the side, then position it pull bar uppermost, flap down-
vertically. ward.
) Release the seat by pulling the ) Engage the lug on the left of the
strap E. roller in notch C.
) Push the backrest towards the front. ) Pass the right-hand end above
) Proceed in reverse order to in- the third-row armrest.
Installing the roller stalling. ) Engage the lug in notch D.
) Reel in the blind, then remove
the roller from its initial position. The roller can only be stored when
) Position the roller, with the blind the seats are folded away.
pull bar uppermost, flap down- You can position the concertina
ward. board vertically to lodge a bulky ob- Removing the roller
) Fold the concertina boards. ject in the boot well. ) Proceed in reverse order to in-
stalling.
113

FITTINGS
CARGO NET Position 1 Position 2

(GRAND C4 PICASSO)
5-seat configuration: installed behind 2-seat configuration; installed be-
the second row. hind the first row.
Installing the roller Installing the roller

) Remove the protective covers ) With the second-row seats fold-
located under the blind roller ed away, remove the covers of
notches. the Isofix mounting points locat-
) Position the roller under that of ed on the seat backrests.
the luggage-cover blind. ) Secure the roller on the Isofix
) Raise the flap on the blind, posi- mounting points.
tioning it on top of the blind. ) Deploy the net and pull it up-
) Deploy the net, passing it be- wards.
This enables you to maximise the tween the rollers and the seats. ) Anchor it to the roof by means of
VI vehicle’s loadspace. ) Pull the net upwards. the fixing points (after you have
removed their covers).
It retains objects, preventing them ) Anchor it to the roof by means of
from sliding towards the front of the the fixing points (after you have
passenger compartment. removed their covers).
You insert it under the luggage-
cover roller securing it on the Removing the roller Removing the roller
third-row side mouldings.
) Carry out these operations in re- ) Carry out these operations in re-
verse order. verse order.
114

FITTINGS
LUGGAGE ANCHORING LUGGAGE ANCHORING LUGGAGE RETAINING NET

RINGS (C4 PICASSO) RINGS (GRAND C4 PICASSO) (GRAND C4 PICASSO)
Attached to the luggage anchoring
rings, it allows objects to be held on
the boot floor.
For reasons of safety in the event of

sudden braking, it is recommended
that you place heavy objects on
the floor as:m! close as possible
to the backrests of the second-row
seats.
There are 4 anchoring rings in the There are 4 anchoring rings in the
VI
boot to enable you to secure your boot to enable you to secure your
luggage: luggage:
- 1, 2, 3 and 4 on the boot floor. - 1, 2, 3 and 4 on the boot floor.
115

FITTINGS
TORCH Boot lamp Using the torch

The boot lamp A comes on automat-
This is a portable lamp, fitted in the ically when the boot is opened and
boot wall, which can be used to illu- switches off automatically when the
minate the boot or as a torch. boot is closed.
Various lighting durations are avail-
able:
- ignition off, approximately ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode, approxi-
mately thirty seconds,
- engine running, no limit.
) Extract the torch from its location

pulling it upwards, as indicated
by the arrow.
Operation of the torch
VI ) Press the switch B, located on
This torch operates with NiMH re- the back, to switch the torch on
chargeable batteries. or off.
Grand C4 Picasso
It has a battery life of approximately ) Unfold the support C, located on
45 minutes and recharges while you the back, to set down and raise
are driving. the torch; for example, when
changing a wheel.
Stowing the torch

Observe the polarities when fitting ) Put the torch back in place in its
the batteries. location, starting at the bottom.
Never replace the rechargeable If you have forgotten to switch off
batteries with normal single-use the torch, this switches it off auto-
batteries. matically.
For replacement of the batteries,
see the "Practical information -
Changing a bulb" section.
It the torch is not engaged correct-
C4 Picasso ly, it may not charge and may not
come on when the boot is opened.
116

CHILD SAFETY
GENERAL POINTS RELATING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

TO CHILD SEATS
Although one of CITROËN's main "Rearwards-facing" "Forwards-facing"
criteria when designing your vehicle, When a "rearwards-facing" child seat When a "forwards-facing" child seat
the safety of your children also de- is installed on the front passenger is installed on the front passenger
pends on you. seat, it is essential that the passenger seat, adjust the vehicle's seat to the
For maximum safety, please observe airbag is deactivated. Otherwise, the intermediate longitudinal position
the following recommendations: child would risk being seriously in- with the seat back upright and leave
- in accordance with European jured or killed if the airbag were to the passenger airbag activated.
regulations, all children under inflate.
the age of 12 or less than one
and a half metres tall must
travel in approved child seats
suited to their weight, on seats
fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX
mountings*,
- statistically, the safest seats in
your vehicle for carrying chil-
dren are the rear seats, VII
- a child weighing less than 9 kg
must travel in the "rearwards-
facing" position both in the
front and in the rear.
Intermediate longitudinal
position
CITROËN recommends that chil-

dren should travel in the rear seats
of your vehicle:
- "rearwards-facing" up to the
age of 2,
- "forwards-facing" over the
age of 2.
* The rules for carrying children are
specific to each country. Refer to the
current legislation in your country.
117

CHILD SAFETY
Passenger airbag OFF Refer to the advice given on the la-

bel present on both sides of the pas-
senger's sun visor.
VII
To assure the safety of your child, you must deactivate the passenger's front
airbag when you install a child seat in the rearwards facing position on the
front passenger's seat.
Otherwise, there is a risk that the child could be seriously injured or killed if
the airbag were deployed.
118

CHILD SAFETY
CHILD SEATS RECOMMENDED BY CITROËN

CITROËN offers a complete range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt:
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Groups 1, 2 and 3: from 9 to 36 kg
L2
L1
"KIDDY Comfort Pro"
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus"
The impact shield must be used
Installed in the rearwards-facing for carrying young children
position.
(from 9 to 18 kg).
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg VII
L4
L3 "KLIPPAN Optima"
"RECARO Start'' From the age of 6 years
(approximately 22 kg), the booster
is used on its own.
L5
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
119

CHILD SAFETY
LOCATIONS FOR CHILD SEATS SECURED WITH THE VEHICLE SEAT BELT
In conformity with European law, this table tells you to what extent each of the seat positions in your vehicle may take a
child seat that is secured with the vehicle seat belt and approved as Universal (a), according to the weight of the child and
the position in the vehicle.
Weight groups established by legislation
Seat position < 10 kg and < 13 kg 9 – 18 kg 15 – 25 kg 22 – 36 kg

(groups 0 (b) and 0+) (group 1) (group 2) (group 3)
1st row Front passenger (c) U U U U
Outer U U U U
2nd row
VII
Centre U U U U
3rd row* Outer U U U U
(a) Universal child seat: child seat which can be installed in all vehicles by means of the seat belt.
(b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Shell seats and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat.
(c) Consult the legislation in force in your country before installing your child on this seat.
U: seat position suitable for the installation (in conjunction with the vehicle seat belt) of a universal rearwards-facing and/or
forwards-facing child seat.
For seats in groups 1, 2 and 3, check that the child seat is correctly secured on the backrest of the vehicle seat. If
necessary, remove and stow the head restraint.
To install a voluminous child seat in the 2nd or 3rd row, move the rear seat fully back so as to avoid interference with the
front seat.
* Applies only to the CITROËN Grand C4 Picasso.

120

CHILD SAFETY
ADVICE ON CHILD SEATS

The incorrect installation of a child Children under the age of 10 must Installing a booster seat
seat in a vehicle compromises the not travel in the "forwards-facing" The chest part of the seat belt must
child's protection in the event of an position on the front passenger seat, be positioned on the child's shoul-
accident. unless the rear seats are already oc- der without touching the neck.
When installing a child seat using the cupied by other children, cannot be
used or are absent. Ensure that the lap part of the
seat belt, check that the seat belt is seat belt passes correctly over the
tightened correctly on the child seat Deactivate the passenger airbag* child's thighs.
and that it secures the child seat when a "rearwards-facing" child
firmly on the seat of your vehicle. seat is installed on the front seat. CITROËN recommends the use of
Otherwise, the child would risk be- a booster seat which has a back,
Remember to fasten the seat belts or fitted with a seat belt guide at
the child seat harnesses keeping the ing seriously injured or killed if the
airbag were to inflate. shoulder level.
slack in relation to the child's body to
a minimum, even for short journeys.
For optimum installation of the "for- As a safety precaution, do not leave:
wards-facing" child seat, ensure - one or more children alone and
that the back of the child seat is in unsupervised in a vehicle,
contact with the back of the vehicle's VII
seat and that the head restraint does - a child or an animal in a vehicle
not cause any discomfort. which is exposed to the sun, with
the windows closed,
If the head restraint has to be re-
moved, ensure that it is stored or - the keys within reach of children
attached securely to prevent it from inside the vehicle.
being thrown around the vehicle in To prevent accidental opening of the
the event of sharp braking. doors, use the "Child lock".
Take care not to open the rear win-
dows by more than one third.
To protect young children from the
rays of the sun, fit side blinds on the
rear windows.
* According to country and current

local legislation.
121

CHILD SAFETY
"ISOFIX" MOUNTINGS There are three rings for each seat: This ISOFIX mounting system pro-
vides fast, reliable and safe fitting of
Your vehicle has been approved in the child seat in your vehicle.
accordance with the latest ISOFIX
regulations.
The three second row seats are fitted ISOFIX child seats are fitted with
with regulation ISOFIX mountings. two latches which are secured easily
on the two rings A.
The incorrect installation of a child Some also have an upper strap

seat in a vehicle compromises the which is attached to the ring B.
child's protection in the event of an
accident.
To attach this strap, remove the ve-
hicle seat's head restraint and the
cover at the top of the seat back.
For information on installing ISOFIX - two rings A, located between the Then fix the hook on the ring B and
child seats in your vehicle, refer to the vehicle seat back and cushion, tighten the upper strap.
table showing the locations that can indicated by a label,
VII be used for ISOFIX child seats.
- a ring B, used to fix the upper

strap, referred to as the TOP
TETHER, indicated by a label
on a cover at the top of the seat
back.
122

CHILD SAFETY
RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX

(size category B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Installed only in the forwards-facing position.

Fitted with an upper strap to be secured on the upper ring B,
referred to as the TOP TETHER.
Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying.
) Adjust the front seat of the vehicle so that the child's feet do not touch VII
the back of the seat.
This child seat can also be used on seats which are not fitted with ISOFIX mountings. In this case, it must be attached
to the vehicle seat using the three point seat belt.
Follow the instructions for fitting the child seat given in the seat manufacturer's installation guide.
123

CHILD SAFETY
LOCATIONS FOR INSTALLING ISOFIX CHILD SEATS

In compliance with European legislation (ECE 16), this table indicates which of the ISOFIX child seats can be installed in
seat positions in your vehicle that are equipped with ISOFIX mounting points.
For ISOFIX universal and semi-universal child seats, the ISOFIX size class, defined by a letter from A to G, is shown on
the child seat to the right of the ISOFIX logo.
Child weight/age given as a guide
Less than 10 kg
Less than 10 kg (group 0)
(group 0) Less than 13 kg 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
Up to approx. (group 0+) From 1 to 3 years approx.
6 months Up to approx.
1 year old
"Rearwards- "Rearwards-
Type of ISOFIX child seat Shell seat* "Forwards-facing"
facing" facing"
VII
ISOFIX size classes F G C D E C D A B B1**
ISOFIX outer rear seats IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IUF
ISOFIX centre rear seat X IL-SU IL-SU IUF
IUF: seat position suitable for installation of an ISOFIX Universal "Forwards-facing" seat attached using the top belt.
IL-SU: seat position suitable for installation of an ISOFIX Semi-Universal seat: ISOFIX "rearwards-facing" child seats
equipped with a top belt and ISOFIX "shell" child seats with a top belt.
Do not install ISOFIX child seats equipped with a bar.
* The ISOFIX shell is secured to the bottom rings on an ISOFIX position, occupying 2 rear seat positions.
** To install ISOFIX child seats type B1, remove the head restraints from the seats.
124

CHILD SAFETY
MANUAL CHILD LOCK ELECTRIC CHILD LOCK Deactivation

) Press button A again.
Mechanical system to prevent open- Remote control system to prevent
ing of the rear door using its interior opening of the rear doors using their
control. interior controls and use of the rear
The control is located on the edge of electric windows.
This system is independent of and
each rear door. in no circumstances takes the place
of the central locking system.
Check the status of the child
lock each time you switch on the
ignition.
Always remove the key from the
ignition when leaving the vehicle,
even for a short time.
In the event of a serious impact,
the electric child lock is deactivated
automatically to permit the exit of
the rear passengers.
VII
Locking The control is located on the driver's

) Using the ignition key, turn the door, with the electric window controls.
red control one eighth of a turn,
following the instructions on the
label.
Activation
) Press button A.
Unlocking
) Using the ignition key, turn the This warning lamp comes
red control one eighth of a turn on temporarily on the instru-
to return to the original position. ment panel when the child
lock is activated.
It also comes on when the ignition is
switched on, then goes off approxi-
mately ten seconds after the engine
is started.
125

SAFETY
DIRECTION INDICATORS HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Horn

Selection of the left or right direc- A visual warning by means of the Audible warning system to alert other
tion indicators to signal a change of direction indicators to alert other road users to an imminent danger.
direction of the vehicle. road users to a vehicle breakdown,
towing or accident.
) Left: lower the lighting stalk ) Press this button, the direction
beyond the point of resistance. indicators flash. ) Press at the lower part of the
VIII ) Right: raise the lighting stalk They can operate with the ignition fixed centred controls steering
beyond the point of resistance. off. wheel.
Automatic operation of Use the horn moderately and only

hazard warning lamps in the following circumstances:
- immediate danger,
"Motorway" function When braking in an emergency,
depending on the deceleration, the - approaching a location lacking
) Press briefly upwards or down- hazard warning lamps come on visibility.
wards, without going beyond the automatically.
point of resistance; the direction They switch off automatically the
indicators will flash 3 times. first time you accelerate.
) You can also switch them off by
pressing the button.
126

SAFETY
TYRE UNDER-INFLATION Puncture

DETECTION
The STOP warning lamp
comes on in the instrument All repairs and changing of tyres
Sensors fitted in each valve check on a wheel fitted with this system
the tyre pressure during driving and panel, accompanied by an
audible signal and a mes- must be carried out by a CITROËN
trigger a warning in the event of dealer or a qualified workshop.
malfunction (speed above 12 mph sage on the multifunction screen lo-
(20 km/h)). cating the wheel concerned. If, when changing a tyre, you in-
Stop immediately, avoiding any sud- stall a wheel which is not detected
den movement of the steering wheel by your vehicle (example: fitting
and the brakes. of snow tyres), you must have the
system reinitialised by a CITROËN
Change the damaged wheel (punc- dealer or a qualified workshop.
tured or very deflated tyre), and
have the tyre pressure checked as
soon as possible.
Sensor(s) not detected or faulty
The service warning lamp This system does not avoid the
comes on in the instrument need to have the tyre pressures
panel, accompanied by an checked regularly (refer to the
audible signal and a mes- "Technical data - Identification
The tyre under-inflation detection
sage on the multifunction screen markings" section) to ensure that VIII
locating the wheel or wheels which the optimum dynamic performance
system is an aid to driving which are not detected or indicating a fault
does not replace the vigilance or of the vehicle is maintained and
in the system. prevent premature wear of the
responsibility of the driver.
Have the faulty sensor(s) checked tyres, particularly in arduous driv-
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified ing conditions (heavy load, high
Under-inflated tyre workshop. speed).
The tyre pressures must be
The service warning lamp checked cold, at least once a
comes on in the instrument This message is also displayed month. Remember to check the
panel, accompanied by an when one of the wheels is away pressure of the spare wheel.
audible signal and a mes- from the vehicle (being repaired) or The tyre under-inflation detection
sage on the multifunction screen lo- when one or more wheels without a system may experience temporary
cating the wheel concerned. sensor are fitted. interference due to electro-magnetic
Check the tyre pressures as soon as The spare wheel is not fitted with a signals on a frequency close to that
possible. This check must be carried sensor. used by the system.
out when the tyres are cold.
127

SAFETY
BRAKING ASSISTANCE Operating fault Emergency braking assistance

SYSTEMS
System which, in an emergency,
Group of supplementary systems If this warning lamp comes enables you to obtain the optimum
which help you to obtain optimum on, accompanied by an au- braking pressure more quickly, thus
braking in complete safety in emer- dible signal and a message reducing the stopping distance.
gency situations: in the screen, it indicates a
malfunction of the anti-lock braking
- anti-lock braking system (ABS), system which could result in loss of Activation
- electronic brake force distribu- control of the vehicle when braking. It is triggered by the speed at which
tion (EBFD), the brake pedal is pressed.
- emergency braking assistance The effect of this is a reduction in
(EBA). If this warning lamp comes the resistance of the pedal and an
on, together with the STOP increase in braking efficiency.
and ABS warning lamps,
accompanied by an audible
signal and a message in the screen,
Anti-lock braking system it indicates a malfunction of the elec-
and electronic brake force tronic brake force distribution which
distribution could result in loss of control of the When braking in an emergency,
vehicle when braking. press firmly without releasing the
Linked systems which improve the You must stop as soon as it is pressure.
stability and manoeuvrability of your safe to do so.
VIII vehicle when braking, in particular
In either case, contact a CITROËN
on poor or slippery surfaces.
Activation
The anti-lock braking system comes
into operation automatically when
there is a risk of wheel lock. When replacing wheels (tyres and
Normal operation of the ABS may rims), ensure that they conform to
make itself felt by slight vibration of the manufacturer's recommenda-
the brake pedal. tions.
When braking in an emergency,

press very firmly without releasing
the pressure.
128

SAFETY
TRAJECTORY CONTROL Intelligent Traction Control Deactivation

SYSTEMS system* In exceptional conditions (starting a
vehicle which is bogged down, stuck
Your vehicle has a system to help in snow, on soft ground...), it may be
Anti-slip regulation (ASR) driving on snow. advisable to deactivate the ASR and
and electronic stability This automatic system continuously ESP systems, so that the wheels
programme (ESP) checks for situations of difficult sur- can move freely and regain grip.
face adhesion that could make it dif-
The anti-slip regulation (also known ficult to move off or make progress
as Traction Control) optimises trac- on deep fresh snow or compacted
tion to prevent skidding of the wheels, snow.
by acting on the brakes of the driving
wheels and on the engine. In these situations, the system takes
over from the ASR system by opti-
The electronic stability programme acts mising the amount of wheel slip to
on the brake of one or more wheels provide the best traction and trajec-
and on the engine to keep the vehicle tory control, even without snow tyres
on the trajectory required by the driver, and with or without chains.
within the limits of the laws of physics.
In extremely severe conditions (snow
on top of ice, sand, deep mud…), it
Activation can be useful to deactivate the ESP/
ASR systems to allow a degree of
These systems are activated auto- wheel spin and so recover grip.
matically each time the vehicle is
started. ) Press the "ESP OFF" button, lo- VIII
cated in the centre of the dash-
They come into operation in the event board.
of a grip or trajectory problem.
If this warning lamp comes

This is indicated by flashing on in the instrument panel
of this warning lamp in the and the indicator lamp on the
instrument panel. button comes on, this indi-
cates that the ASR and ESP
systems are deactivated.
* Depending on engine type.

129

SAFETY
Reactivation EMERGENCY OR
These systems are reactivated au- ASSISTANCE CALL
tomatically each time the ignition is The ESP/ASR systems offer ex-
switched back on or from 30 mph ceptional safety in normal driving,
(50 km/h). but this should not encourage the
) Press the "ESP OFF" button again driver to take extra risks or drive at
to reactivate them manually. high speed.
The correct operation of these sys-
tems depends on observation of This system allows you to make an
the manufacturer's recommenda- emergency or assistance call to the
Operating fault emergency services or to the dedi-
tions regarding wheels (tyres and
rims), braking components, elec- cated CITROËN service.
If this warning lamp comes For more information on the use of
on, accompanied by an au- tronic components and assembly
and repair procedures. this function, refer to the "Audio and
dible signal and a message telematics" section.
in the multifunction screen, After an impact, have these systems
this indicates a malfunction of these checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
systems. qualified workshop.
Have it checked by a CITROËN
VIII
130

SAFETY
SEAT BELTS The pretensioning seat belts are Height adjustment

active when the ignition is on.
The force limiter reduces the pres-
sure of the seat belt against the
chest of the occupant, so increasing
his protection.
Fastening
) Pull the belt down in front of you
in a steady movement, making
sure that it does not become
twisted.
) Press the fastening into its buckle.
) Check that it is properly secured When correctly adjusted, the seat
and that the automatic locking belt shoulder strap falls over the
mechanism operates correctly middle of the shoulder.
by pulling sharply on the belt ) To adjust the belt, squeeze the
strap. control and slide it in the direc-
) The lap strap should be position required.
tioned as low down as possible in VIII
the lap and as tight as possible.
) The diagonal strap should be Unfastening
Front seat belts positioned across the chest and
away from the neck. ) To unfasten the belt, press on
The front seat belts are fitted with a Each belt has a reel that adjusts its the red button in the buckle.
pretensioning system and force limiter. length automatically to the girth of The belt retracts automatically when
This system improves safety in the front the seat occupant. not in use.
seats in the event of a front impact.
Depending on the seriousness of the
impact, the pretensioning system in-
stantly tightens the seat belt against
the body of the occupant.
131

SAFETY
Centre rear seat belt
Using the seat belt Fastening the seat belt Unfastening the seat belt
(C4 Picasso) (C4 Picasso and Grand (C4 Picasso and Grand C4 Picasso)
C4 Picasso)
) Open the cover A. ) Pull the strap and insert the ) Release the right hand buckle C,
) Remove the belt tongues from tongue C into the right hand then the left hand buckle.
their housing. buckle, then insert the tongue D ) Guide the seat belt back to its
VIII into the left hand buckle. stowed position.
) Bring the belt tongues up to the
relay ring B. ) Check that each buckle has en-
gaged by pulling on the strap.
) Insert the attachment, then pass
the tongues through the ring.
Stowing the belt tongues
) Close the cover A. Make sure (C4 Picasso)
that the belt is correctly posi-
tioned in the recess in the cover ) Carry out the seat belt fastening
provided for this purpose. Before use operation (C4 Picasso) in reverse
For safety reasons, it is essential order to stow the belt tongues.
that the seat belt passes through You may opt to leave the seat belt in
the relay ring. the relay ring even if not using it.
To avoid damaging or jamming the
seat belts, stow them carefully on
the sides of the seat backrests.
132

SAFETY
Third row rear seat belts

(Grand C4 Picasso)
Before use:
To avoid damaging or jamming the
seat belts, stow them carefully on
the sides of the seat backrests.
Instructions for use of Stowing the tongue of

the third row passenger seat belts the third-row seat belt
Take care to attach the third-row ) Secure the tongue in the location
passenger seat belts securely to the provided on the rear pillar trim.
rings provided for this purpose. The third-row passenger seat belts
Do not attach the belts to the lug- that are not being used can be VIII
gage anchoring rings marked stowed in order to free up loadspace
with a red cross, as shown in the and facilitate use of the luggage
illustration. cover.
133

SAFETY
The driver must ensure that passen- In order to be effective, a seat belt Recommendations for children
gers use the seat belts correctly and must: Use a suitable child seat if the pas-
that they are all restrained securely - be tightened as close to the body senger is less than 12 years old or
before setting off. as possible, shorter than one and a half metres.
Wherever you are seated in the ve- - be pulled in front of you with a Never use the same seat belt to se-
hicle, always fasten your seat belt, smooth movement, checking cure more than one person.
even for short journeys. that it does not twist, Never allow a child to travel on your
Do not interchange the seat belt - be used to restrain only one person, lap.
buckles as they will not fulfil their
role fully. - not bear any trace of cuts or fraying,
The seat belts are fitted with an in- - not be converted or modified to
ertia reel permitting automatic ad- avoid affecting its performance.
In the event of an impact
justment of the length of the strap
to your size. The seat belt is stowed Depending on the nature and se-
automatically when not in use. riousness of the impact, the pre-
tensioning device may be deployed
Before and after use, ensure that the before and independently of the
seat belt is reeled in correctly. In accordance with current safety
regulations, for all repairs on your airbags. Deployment of the preten-
The lower part of the strap must be sioners is accompanied by a slight
positioned as low as possible on the vehicle, go to a qualified workshop
with the skills and equipment need- discharge of harmless smoke and
pelvis. a noise, due to the activation of the
ed, which a CITROËN dealer is able
The upper part must be positioned pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated
VIII in the hollow of the shoulder.
to provide.
in the system.
Have your seat belts checked reg-
The inertia reels are fitted with an ularly by a CITROËN dealer or a In all cases, the airbag warning lamp
automatic locking device which qualified workshop, particularly if the comes on.
comes into operation in the event straps show signs of damage. Following an impact, have the seat
of a collision, emergency braking or belts system checked, and if neces-
if the vehicle rolls over. You can re- Clean the seat belt straps with soapy
water or a textile cleaning product, sary replaced, by a CITROËN dealer
lease the device by pulling firmly on or a qualified workshop.
the strap and releasing it so that it sold by CITROËN dealers.
reels in slightly. After folding or moving a seat or rear
bench seat, ensure that the seat belt
is positioned and reeled in correctly.
134

SAFETY
AIRBAGS Impact detection zones Front airbags

System designed to maximise the System which protects the head and
safety of the occupants (with the chest of the driver and front passen-
exception of the rear centre pas- ger in the event of a front impact.
senger) in the event of violent col-
lisions. It supplements the action of The driver's airbag is fitted in the
the force-limiting seat belts. centre of the steering wheel; the
front passenger's airbag is fitted in
If a collision occurs, the electronic the dashboard above the glove box.
detectors record and analyse the
front and side impacts sustained in
the impact detection zones:
- in the case of a serious impact,
the airbags are deployed instant-
ly and protect the occupants of
the vehicle (with the exception of
the rear centre passenger); im-
mediately after the impact, the A. Front impact zone.
airbags deflate rapidly so that B. Side impact zone.
they do not hinder visibility or the
exit of the occupants,
- in the case of a minor or rear im-
pact or in certain roll-over con-
ditions, the airbags will not be VIII
deployed; the seat belt alone
is sufficient to provide optimum
protection in these situations. Deployment
Deployment of the airbag(s) is ac- The airbags are deployed simultane-
companied by a slight emission of ously, unless the passenger's front
harmless smoke and a noise, due to airbag is deactivated, in the event of
the activation of the pyrotechnic car- a serious front impact applied to all
tridge incorporated in the system. or part of the front impact zone A,
The airbags do not operate This smoke is not harmful, but sen- in the longitudinal centreline of the
when the ignition is switched sitive individuals may experience vehicle on a horizontal plane and di-
off. slight irritation. rected from the front to the rear of
This equipment will only operate The noise of the detonation may the vehicle.
once. If a second impact occurs result in a slight loss of hearing for The front airbag inflates between the
(during the same or a subsequent ac- a short time. front occupant of the vehicle and the
cident), the airbag will not operate. dashboard to cushion their forward
movement.
135

SAFETY
Deactivation Activation
When you remove the child seat,
turn switch 1 to the "ON" position to
reactivate the airbag and so ensure
the safety of your front passenger in
the event of an impact.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes
on on the instrument panel,
Only the front passenger's airbag accompanied by an audible
can be deactivated: warning and a message in
) with the ignition off, insert the the multifunction screen, contact a
key in the passenger airbag de- CITROËN dealer or a qualified work-
activation switch 1, shop to have the system checked. The
) turn it to the "OFF" position, airbags may no longer be deployed in
) then, remove the key keeping the event of a serious impact.
VIII the switch in this position.
If this warning lamp flashes,
contact a CITROËN dealer
This warning lamp comes on or a qualified workshop.
in the instrument panel when
the ignition is on and until the
airbag is reactivated.
To ensure the safety of your child,

it is imperative that the passenger If both airbag warning lamps come
airbag is deactivated when you in- on continuously, do not install a
stall a "rearwards-facing" child seat "rearwards-facing" child seat on
on the front passenger seat. the front passenger seat.
Otherwise, the child would risk be- Have it checked by a CITROËN
ing seriously injured or killed if the dealer or a qualified workshop.
airbag were deployed.
136

SAFETY
Lateral airbags* Impact detection zones Operation

It is deployed at the same time as
System which protects the driver the corresponding lateral airbag in
and front passenger in the event of the event of a serious side impact
a serious side impact in order to limit applied to all or part of the side im-
the risk of injury to the chest. pact zone B, perpendicular to the
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle
front seat back frame, on the door on a horizontal plane and directed
side. from the outside towards the inside
of the vehicle.
The curtain airbag inflates between
the front or rear occupant of the ve-
hicle and the windows.
In the event of a minor impact or

A. Front impact zone. bump on the side of the vehicle or
B. Side impact zone. if the vehicle rolls over, the airbag
may not be deployed.
The airbag is not deployed in the
event of a rear or front collision.
Curtain airbags* VIII
System which protects the driver
Operation and passengers (with the exception
of the rear centre passenger) in the
It is deployed unilaterally in the event of a serious side impact in or- Operating fault
event of a serious side impact ap- der to limit the risk of head injuries.
plied to all or part of the side impact If this warning lamp comes
zone B, perpendicular to the longi- Each curtain airbag is fitted in the
pillars and the upper part of the pas- on in the instrument panel,
tudinal centreline of the vehicle on accompanied by an audible
a horizontal plane and directed from senger compartment.
signal and a message on
the outside towards the inside of the the multifunction screen, contact a
vehicle. CITROËN dealer or a qualified work-
The lateral airbag inflates between shop to have the system checked. The
the front occupant of the vehicle and airbags may no longer be deployed in
the corresponding door trim panel. the event of a serious impact.
* According to country. * According to country.

137

SAFETY
For the airbags to be fully

effective, observe the following
safety rules:
Sit in a normal upright position. Front airbags Curtain airbags
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt. Do not drive holding the steering Do not fix or attach anything to the
Do not leave anything between the wheel by its spokes or resting your roof. This could cause injury to the
occupants and the airbags (a child, hands on the centre part of the head if the curtain airbag is de-
pet, object...). This could hamper wheel. ployed.
the operation of the airbags or injure Passengers must not place their feet If fitted on your vehicle, do not re-
the occupants. on the dashboard. move the grab handles installed on
After an accident or if the vehicle If possible, do not smoke as deploy- the roof, they play a part in securing
has been stolen or broken into, have ment of the airbags can cause burns the curtain airbags.
the airbag systems checked. or the risk of injury from a cigarette
All work on the airbag system must or pipe.
be carried out by a CITROËN dealer Never remove or pierce the steering
or a qualified workshop. wheel or hit it violently.
Even if all of the precautions men-
tioned are observed, a risk of injury
or of minor burns to the head, chest
or arms when an airbag is deployed
VIII cannot be ruled out. The bag inflates Lateral airbags
almost instantly (within a few mil- Use only approved covers on the seats,
liseconds) then deflates within the compatible with the deployment the
same time discharging the hot gas lateral airbags. For information on the
via openings provided for this pur- range of seat covers suitable for your
pose. vehicle, you can contact a CITROËN
dealer (see "Practical information - §
Accessories").
Do not fix or attach anything to the
seat backs (clothing...). This could
cause injury to the chest or arms if
the lateral airbag is deployed.
Do not sit with the upper part of the
body any nearer to the door than
necessary.
138

DRIVING
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE Manual application Manual release

With the vehicle stationary, to apply With the ignition on or the engine
the parking brake whether the en- running, to release the parking
gine is running or not, pull control brake, press on the brake pedal, or
lever A. the accelerator, pull then release
The application of the parking brake control lever A.
is confirmed by:
The full application of the parking
- the illumination of the warn- brake is confirmed by:
ing lamp P in control lever A
and in the instrument panel, - the warning lamp P in con-
trol lever A and in the in-
- the display of a message strument panel going off,
"Parking brake on" in the multi-
function screen. - the display of a message
"Parking brake off" in the multi-
The electric parking brake operates function screen.
as follows:
- automatic application/release When the driver’s door is
Application is automatic when opened with the engine run-
the engine stops, release is au- ning, a beep is heard and a
tomatic on use of the accelerator message displayed if the parking
brake has not been applied. If you pull control lever A
(active by default). without pressing the brake
- manual application/release Before getting out of the vehicle, pedal, the parking brake
check that the warning lamp P is will not be released and
Manual application/release of on fixed in the instrument panel the "Foot on brake" warn- IX
the parking brake is possible (not flashing).
by pulling control lever A while ing lamp will come on in
pressing the brake pedal. the instrument panel.
139

DRIVING
Maximum application Automatic application, Automatic release

engine off
If necessary, you can use maximum The electric parking brake releases
application of the parking brake. It With the vehicle stationary, the park- automatically and progressively
is obtained by means of a long pull ing brake is automatically applied when you press the accelerator:
on control lever A, until you see the when the engine is switched off. ) Manual gearbox (first gear or
message "Parking brake on" and an reverse gear engaged): press
audible signal is heard. down fully on the clutch pedal
Maximum application is essential: then press on the accelerator
- when towing a caravan or a trail- pedal and move off.
er, if the automatic functions are ) Automatic gearbox: accelerate
activated but you are applying with the selector in position D, M
the parking brake manually, or R.
- when the gradient you are parked ) Electronic gearbox: accelerate
on is variable in its effect (e.g. on with the selector in position A, M
a ferry, in a lorry, during towing), or R.
- when towing, when loaded or
when parking on a gradient, turn The application of the parking brake
the front wheels towards the is confirmed by:
pavement and engage a gear Full release of the parking brake is
when you park, - the illumination of warning confirmed by:
- after a maximum application, the lamp P in control lever A
release time will be longer. and in the instrument panel, - the warning lamp P in con-
trol lever A and in the in-
- the display of a message strument panel going off,
IX "Parking brake on" in the multi-
function screen.
- the display of a message "Parking
The normal operating sound will con- brake off" in the multifunction
firm to you the application/release of screen.
the electric parking brake.
When stationary, with the engine
Before leaving the vehicle, running, do not press the acceler-
check that warning lamp P ator pedal unnecessarily, as you
in the instrument panel is may release the parking brake.
on fixed, not flashing.
Never leave a child alone inside the
vehicle with the ignition on, as they
could release the parking brake.
140

DRIVING
To immobilise the vehicle, Activation/Deactivation of the Particular situations

engine running automatic functions*
In certain situations (e.g. starting
To immobilise the vehicle when sta- The automatic application when the engine), the parking brake can
tionary with the engine running, you the engine is switched off and the automatically alter its force. This is
must apply the parking brake manu- automatic release when you press normal operation.
ally by pulling on control lever A. the accelerator can be deactivated. To move your vehicle without start-
Activation/deactivation is performed ing the engine (towing, etc...), but
using the configuration menu of the with the ignition on, press the brake
multifunction screen. To do so, se- pedal and release the parking brake
The application of the parking brake lect "Vehicle parameters/Comfort/
is confirmed by: by pulling then releasing control
Automatic handbrake." lever A.
- the illumination of warning The full release of the parking brake
lamp P in control A and in The deactivation of these is confirmed by the warning lamp P
the instrument panel, functions is confirmed by the (red) in the instrument panel going
lighting of this warning lamp off and the display of a message
- the display of a message in the instrument panel. "Parking brake off" in the multifunc-
"Parking brake on" in the multi- tion screen.
function screen. With the automatic functions deac-
tivated, the application and release If the parking brake malfunctions
When the driver’s door is opened, a of the parking brake are done manu- while applied or if the battery runs
beep is heard and a message dis- ally. flat, an emergency release remains
played if the parking brake has not possible.
been applied.
IX
Before leaving the vehicle,
check that warning lamp P
in the instrument panel is
on fixed (not flashing).
* According to country
141

DRIVING
Dynamic emergency braking If a failure of the ESP sys-

tem is signalled by the il-
lumination of this warning
lamp, then braking stability
is not guaranteed. In this event, sta-
bility must be assured by the driver
by repeating alternate "pull-release"
actions on control lever A.
The dynamic emergency

braking must only be used in
exceptional circumstances.
In the event of a failure of the vehi-

cle’s main braking system or in an
exceptional situation (e.g. driver tak-
en ill, under instruction, etc) a con-
tinuous pull on the control lever A
will stop the vehicle.
The electronic stability programme
(ESP) provides stability during dy-
namic emergency braking.
If the dynamic emergency braking
IX malfunctions, one of the following
messages will be displayed in the
multifunction screen:
- "Parking brake faulty".
- "Parking brake control faulty".
142

DRIVING
Emergency release In the event of a malfunction of the ) Slide the front left-hand seat
electric parking brake or the battery back as far as possible.
running flat, an emergency mecha- ) Lift up the floor plug B on the
nism can release the parking brake. carpet in front of the seat.
) Immobilise the vehicle, with the ) Pierce the tab C on the tube D
engine running, by engaging first with the release tool F.
gear (manual gearbox), posi-
tion P (automatic gearbox) or M ) Place the end of the handle F in
or R (6-speed electronic gearbox the tube D.
system). ) Turn the release tool F clock-
) Switch off the engine, but leave wise. For safety reasons, it is
the ignition on. essential to continue turning the
device as far as it will go. The
If the vehicle cannot be immo- parking brake is released.
bilised, do not do anything and
contact a CITROËN dealer or a ) Remove the release tool F and
qualified workshop without delay. store it with the blocks E in the
toolbox.
) Fetch the vehicle blocks E and
the release tool F (handle) from - The operation of the parking
the toolbox. brake reinitialises itself when
the ignition is switched off then
) If on a gradient: chock the vehi- on again. If the reinitialisation of
cle by placing the blocks in front the parking brake proves impos-
of or behind the front wheels, on sible, contact a CITROËN dealer
the falling side of the gradient. or a qualified workshop.
If on level ground: chock the - The subsequent time required
vehicle by placing the blocks in for application may be longer
front of and behind one of the than during normal operation.
IX
front wheels.
When the release tool F is engaged, do not operate the control lever or the ignition switch.
Immobilisation of the vehicle is no longer assured once the manual emergency release has been used.
The emergency release system cannot be used to apply the parking brake mechanically.
Take care not to allow moisture or dust in the proximity of the plug.
For safety reasons, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible to have the plug replaced.
143

DRIVING
Operating faults
If any of these instances arises, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
SITUATION CONSEQUENCES
Electric parking brake fault and display of If the electric parking brake fault warning lamp and the service
message "Parking brake faulty" and the fol- warning lamp come on, position the vehicle in a safe location (on
lowing warning lamps: flat ground, with a gear engaged).
Display of message "Parking brake faulty" - The automatic functions are deactivated.
and the following warning lamps: - Hill start assist is not available.
- The electric parking brake is only available manually.
2
IX
Display of message "Parking brake faulty" - The manual release of the electric parking brake is not avail-
and the following warning lamps: able.
- Hill start assist is not available.
- The automatic functions and manual application are still available.
3
144

DRIVING
SITUATION CONSEQUENCES
Display of message "Parking brake faulty" - The automatic functions are deactivated.
and the following warning lamps: - Hill start assist is not available.
To apply the electric parking brake:
) Immobilise the vehicle and switch off the ignition
) Pull the control lever for at least 5 seconds or until maximum
application.
) Switch on the ignition and check that the electric parking brake
warning lamps are on.
4
- Application may take longer than in normal operation.
and/or flashing - If warning lamp P flashes or if the warning lamps do not come
on when the ignition is switched on, this method does not work.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified work-
shop.
To release the electric parking brake:
) Switch on the ignition.
) Pull the control lever and hold it for approximately 3 seconds.
Display of message "Parking brake control - Only the functions for automatic application on switching off the
faulty – auto parking brake activated" and engine and automatic release on acceleration are available.
the following warning lamps: - Manual application/release of the electric parking brake and dy-
namic emergency braking are unavailable. IX
5
and/or flashing
Battery fault - Lighting of the battery warning lamp makes it essential to stop
the vehicle as soon as traffic allows. Stop and immobilise your
vehicle.
6 - Apply the electric parking brake before switching off the engine.
145

DRIVING
HILL START ASSIST Operation
System which holds your vehicle tem-

porarily (approximately 2 seconds)
when starting on a slope, the time it
takes to move your foot from the brake
pedal to the accelerator pedal.
This function is only active when:
- the vehicle is completely station-
ary, with your foot on the brake
pedal,
- in particular conditions on a
slope,
- with the driver’s door closed. On an ascending slope, with the On a descending slope, with the
The hill start assist cannot be deac- vehicle stationary, the vehicle is vehicle stationary and reverse
tivated. held for a brief moment when you gear engaged, the vehicle is held
release the brake pedal: momentarily when you release
- provided you are in first gear or the brake pedal.
neutral on a manual gearbox,
- provided you are in position A
or M with the electronic gearbox
system,
- provided you are in position D or
IX M on an automatic gearbox.
Operating fault
Do not exit the vehicle while
it is being held in the hill
start assist phase.
If you need to exit the ve-
hicle with the engine running, man- If a malfunction of the system oc-
ually apply the parking brake and curs, these warning lamps come
ensure that the warning lamp P on. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
(red) in the instrument panel is on qualified workshop to have the sys-
(not flashing). tem checked.
146

DRIVING
5-SPEED MANUAL
GEARBOX
Engaging reverse gear
) Move the gear lever to the right
then back.
Only engage reverse gear when

the vehicle is stationary with the
engine at idle.
Starting the vehicle

) Check that the gear lever is in
neutral.
) Do not touch the accelerator.
) For Diesel engines: turn the
key to position M and wait until
the pre-heating warning lamp
switches off if it has come on.
) Operate the starter, turning the IX
key until the engine starts (no
more than ten seconds).
) In temperatures lower than 0°C,
declutch while operating the
starter to facilitate starting.
147

DRIVING
GEAR SHIFT INDICATOR* Example: The information appears in the form

- You are in third gear. of an arrow in the instrument panel
System which reduces fuel con- screen.
sumption by advising the driver to - You press the accelerator pedal
moderately. Depending on your vehicle's equip-
change up on vehicles fitted with a ment, this arrow may be accompa-
manual gearbox. - The system may suggest that nied by the recommended gear.
you engage a higher gear, if ap-
propriate.
In the case of driving which

Operation makes particular demands
on the performance of the
The system intervenes only when engine (firm pressure on
driving economically. the accelerator pedal, for example,
Depending on the driving situation when overtaking...), the system will
and your vehicle's equipment, the not recommend a gear change.
system may advise you to skip one The system never suggests:
or more gears. You can follow this
instruction without engaging the in- - engaging first gear,
termediate gears. - engaging reverse gear,
The gear recommended should not - engaging a lower gear.
be considered compulsory. In fact,
the configuration of the road, the
amount of traffic and safety remain
IX determining factors when choosing
the best gear. Therefore, the driver
remains responsible for deciding
whether or not to follow the advice
given by the system.
This function cannot be deactivated.
* According to engine.
148

DRIVING
6-SPEED ELECTRONIC Displays in the instrument panel Moving off

GEARBOX SYSTEM
The 6-speed electronic gearbox of-
fers a choice between the comfort of
fully automatic operation or the driving
pleasure of manual gear changing.
You have a choice of two driving
modes:
- automatic mode for automatic con-
trol of the gears by the gearbox,
- manual mode for sequential
changing of the gears by the
driver. - The gear lever position is dis-
played in the instrument panel, ) To start the engine, the gear le-
on the left on the A and C multi- ver must be in position N.
Mode selection function screens and on the right
on NaviDrive and MyWay multi- ) Press firmly on the brake pedal.
function screens. ) Operate the starter.
- A back-lit position grille associ- ) When the engine is running,
ated with the gear lever shows place the gear lever on R, A or
the position selected. M as desired.
) In the instrument panel, check
When the ignition is on, il- the position engaged.
lumination of the service
) Release the brake pedal and ac-
warning lamp, accompa-
celerate. IX
nied by an audible signal and
the message "Gearbox faulty" If the gear lever is not in position N,
indicates a malfunction. and/or if the brake pedal is not
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a pressed, the corresponding warning
qualified workshop. lamp(s) are displayed and a mes-
sage informs you that at least one of
) Automated mode: gear lever 2 in For safety: these two conditions is not met.
position A. ) position N can only be disen- In this case, the engine will not start,
) Manual mode: gear lever 2 in po- gaged if you are pressing the recommence the above procedure.
sition M. brake pedal.
In automated mode, temporary man- ) if the gearbox is in position N
ual operation is possible any time by but the gear lever position is dif-
using one of the paddles 1. ferent, reposition the gear lever
on N in order to be able to start.
149

DRIVING
Reverse gear Automatic mode Operation in automatic mode

To engage reverse, the vehicle must
be immobilised with your foot on the
brake pedal. ) Move the gear lever to A.
) Move the gear lever to R.
At low speeds, if reverse is selected,

the N indicator flashes and the gear-
box goes into neutral automatically.
To engage reverse, put the gear le- Manual mode
ver in position N, then in position R.
) Move the gear lever to M. ) Move the gear lever to

position A. The warn-
ing lamp A comes on in
the instrument panel to
) Pull the "+" paddle to change up confirm the selection.
a gear.
Neutral ) Pull the "-" paddle to change The gearbox then functions in auto-
down a gear. matic mode, without any action on
your part.
IX ) Move the gear lever to N. It constantly selects the gear that is
best suited to the following condi-
tions:
If the vehicle is moving, do not select - driving style,
this position even momentarily. - road profile,
When the engine is running, - optimum fuel consumption.
before accelerating to move
the vehicle, make sure that
the position engaged on the
selector grille or in the instrument
panel is either: R, A or M
Do not leave the vehicle with the
engine running in R, A or M.
150

DRIVING
Temporary manual operation Operation in manual mode Changing gear

when in automatic mode
By pulling either of the "+" or "-" pad- ) Move the gear lever to
dles, you can exercise temporary position M.
control over the gearbox. ) Pull the "+" paddle to change up
a gear.
The request to change gear will be
taken into account. You will still be ) Pull the "-" paddle to change
in automatic mode. The warning down a gear.
Steering mounted paddle controls
lamp A remains on in the instrument
panel. The steering mounted paddles are
used for the six forward gears.
This function enables you to antici-
pate certain situations such as the IX
approach of a bend or the need to
overtake another vehicle.
Cancellation of automatic mode

The change from position A (driv-
ing in automatic mode) to position M
(driving in manual mode) or vice
versa can be made at any time. The
warning lamp A goes off in the in-
strument panel.
151

DRIVING
The paddles cannot be used to se- Acceleration Stopping the vehicle

lect neutral or reverse gear, or to exit
reverse gear. For optimum acceleration (e.g. to Before stopping the engine, you can
- If the vehicle stops or reduces overtake another vehicle), simply choose:
speed (for example when ap- press the pedal beyond the point of ) to leave the vehicle in neutral;
proaching a stop sign), the gear- resistance at the end of its travel, by move the gear lever to position N.
box changes down automatically, pressing down firmly.
) to leave the vehicle with a gear
to first gear if needed. engaged (R, A or M); place the
- In manual mode, it is not neces- gear lever in the chosen position
sary to release the accelerator prior to stopping the engine. In
completely during gear changes. this case, the vehicle cannot be
- A request to change gear is ac- Vehicle stationary, with the moved.
cepted only if the engine speed engine running In all cases, it is essential to apply
permits it. the parking brake. Check that the
In the event of a prolonged stop with parking brake warning lamp is on in
- For safety reasons, depending the engine running, the gearbox
on the engine speed, a change the instrument panel.
changes automatically to neutral N.
down may be performed auto-
matically.
Do not use the accelera-

tor to hold your vehicle on
a gradient. Use either the
IX brake pedal or the parking
brake.
Before doing anything in the en-
gine compartment, check that the
gear lever is in neutral N.
In situations of high engine

speeds (heavy accelera-
tion), a change up will not
occur unless the driver op-
erates the paddle.
152

DRIVING
If your vehicle is fitted with the sys- Special cases: STOP mode not
tem, a time counter calculates the available
The Stop & Start system puts the en- sum of the periods in STOP mode
gine temporarily into standby - STOP during a journey. It rests itself to zero STOP mode is not invoked
mode - during stops in the traffic (red every time the ignition is switched on when:
lights, traffic jams, or other...). The en- with the key.
gine restarts automatically - START
mode - as soon as you want to move - the driver's door is open,
off. The restart takes place instantly, - the driver's seat belt is not fas-
quickly and silently. For your comfort, during parking tened,
maoeuvres, STOP mode is not
Perfect for urban use, the Stop & available for a few seconds after - the vehicle has not exceeded
Start system reduces fuel consump- coming out of reverse gear. 6 mph (10 km/h) since the last
tion and exhaust emissions as well engine start using the key,
as the noise level when stationary. STOP mode does not affect the
functionality of the vehicle, such as - the electric parking brake is ap-
for example, braking, power steer- plied or being applied,
ing... - the engine is needed to maintain
a comfortable temperature in the
passenger compartment,
- demisting is active,
- some special conditions (battery
Operation charge, engine temperature,
Never refuel with the en- braking assistance, ambient
Going into engine STOP mode gine in STOP mode; you temperature...) where the engine
must switch off the ignition is needed to assure control of a
with the key. system.
The "ECO" warning lamp comes In this case, the "ECO" warning IX
on in the instrument panel and lamp flashes for a few seconds then
the engine goes into standby: goes off.
- with the electronic gearbox This operation is perfectly normal.
system, at speeds below 4 mph
(6 km/h), press the brake pedal or
put the gear lever in position N.
153

DRIVING
Going into engine START mode Special cases: START invoked Deactivation
automatically
The "ECO" warning lamp START mode is invoked au-
goes off and the engine tomatically when:
starts with the electronic
gearbox system:
- gear lever in position A or M, re- - the driver's door is open,
lease the brake pedal,
- the driver's seat belt is not fas-
- or gear lever in position N and the tened,
brake pedal released, move the
gear lever to position A or M, - the speed of the vehicle exceeds
7 mph (11 km/h) with the elec-
- or engage reverse gear. tronic gearbox system,
- the electric parking brake is be- At any time, press the "ECO
ing applied, OFF" switch to deactivate the system.
- some special conditions (battery This is confirmed by the switch warn-
charge, engine temperature, ing lamp coming on accompanied by
braking assistance, ambient tem- a message in the screen.
perature...) where the engine is
needed for control of a system.
In this case the "ECO" warning lamp
flashes for a few seconds, then goes If the system has been deactivated
off. in STOP mode, the engine restarts
This operation is perfectly normal. immediately.
IX
Reactivation
Press the "ECO OFF" switch again.
The system is active again; this is
confirmed by the switch warning
lamp going off and a message in the
screen.
The system is reactivated auto-

matically at every new start using
the key.
154

DRIVING
Operating fault Maintenance
Before doing anything un-

der the bonnet, deactivate
the Stop & Start system to
avoid any risk of injury resulting
from automatic operation of START
mode.
This system requires a 12 V battery

with a special specification and tech-
nology (reference numbers available
from CITROËN dealers).
In the event of a fault with the sys- Fitting a battery not listed by
tem, the "ECO OFF" switch warning CITROËN introduces the risk of
lamp flashes then comes on con- malfunction of the system.
tinuously. To charge the battery, use a 12 V
Have it checked by a CITROËN charger and observe the polarity.
In the event of a fault in STOP mode,
the vehicle may stall. It is then nec-
essary to switch off the ignition and
start the engine again using the
key. IX
The Stop & Start system

makes use of advanced
technology. For any work
on the system go to a qualified
workshop with the skills and equip-
ment required, which a CITROËN
dealer is able to provide.
155

DRIVING
AUTOMATIC GEARBOX Displays in the instrument panel
Automatic gearbox which offers a

choice between the ease of fully
automatic operation or the driving
pleasure of manual gear changing.
There is a choice of two driving
modes:
- automatic operation for elec-
tronic control of the gears by the Multifunction screen A or C MyWay or NaviDrive
gearbox, multifunction screen
- manual operation for sequen-
tial changing of the gears by the
driver.
The position of the gear lever is dis-
played in the instrument panel, on Position P can only be dis-
Mode selection the left on the A and C multifunc- engaged if pressing the
tion screens and on the right in the brake pedal.
MyWay and NaviDrive multifunction On opening a door, there is
screens. an audible signal if the gear lever is
A grille associated with the gear le- not in position P.
ver also allows you to see the se- In all circumstances, ensure that
lected position. the gear lever is in position P be-
fore leaving your vehicle.
IX If P is displayed in the instrument
panel but the position of the gear
lever is different, reposition the
gear lever on P so that you can
start the vehicle.
Never press the brake and ac-
celerator pedals simultaneously.
) Automatic mode: gear lever 1 in Braking and acceleration should
position D, be done only with the right foot.
) Manual mode: gear lever 1 in po- Pressing both pedals simultane-
sition M. ously introduces a risk of damage
to the gearbox.
156

DRIVING
Moving off To avoid any difference between the Reverse gear

position of the gear lever and the
true position of the gearbox, always Only engage this position
come out of position P with the igni- when the vehicle is station-
tion on and your foot on the brake. ary. To prevent snatching,
do not accelerate too soon
Foot on the brake after selection.
) When this warning lamp
comes on in the instru-
ment panel, press the Neutral
brake pedal to disen-
gage the gear lever from Never select position N if
position P. the vehicle is moving.
) To start the engine, press the

brake pedal and place the gear Park
lever in position P. Never select positions P or
) Operate the starter. This position of the gear le- R unless the vehicle is sta-
) When the engine is running, ver is used to prevent the tionary.
place the gear lever on R, D or vehicle from moving when If, while the vehicle is moving, po-
M as required. you are stationary. sition N is engaged inadvertently,
) Check, in the instrument panel, allow the engine to idle before en-
) To select position P, move the gaging position D or M.
the position engaged. gear lever back to the highest
) Release the brake pedal and ac- position (towards R), then push IX
celerate. it forwards and then to the left.
If the gear lever is not in position P, a ) To exit position P, move the gear
message "Place automatic gearbox lever to the right and then to the
in position P" is displayed in the mul- position you want.
tifunction screen. It is accompanied ) Only engage this position when
by an audible signal and flashing of the vehicle is completely sta-
P in the instrument panel. tionary. In this position, the front
wheels are locked. Make sure
that the gear lever is correctly
positioned.
157

DRIVING
Automatic operation The gearbox is then operating in Temporary manual operation

auto-adaptive mode, without requir- when in automatic mode
ing any intervention on your part.
For certain manoeuvres (for exam-
ple overtaking), you can obtain max-
imum acceleration by pressing the
accelerator pedal down hard, which
then produces an automatic change
down to a lower gear.
When braking, the gearbox may
change down automatically in order
to provide effective engine braking.
If you lift your foot off the accelerator
abruptly, the gearbox will not change
up.
Position of the gear lever for
automatic gear changing. At any time, operating the "+" or "-"
paddle allows you to exercise tem-
porary control over the gearbox. The
) Move the gear lever to position D. request to change gear will be taken
into account. You will still be in auto-
The gearbox constantly selects matic mode. The indicator D remains
the gear that is best suited to the on in the instrument panel.
following conditions:
This function enables you to antici-
- driving style, pate certain situations such as the
IX - road profile, approach of a bend or the need to
- vehicle load. overtake another vehicle.
158

DRIVING
Manual operation - For safety reasons, depending

on the engine speed, a change
up or down may be performed
automatically.
- It is possible at any time to
change mode, by moving the
gear lever from position D to po-
sition M or vice versa.
Flashing of the indicator for

the position requested sig-
Position of the gear lever for manual ) Pull the "+" paddle to change up nals that this position is not
gear changing. a gear. yet obtained.
) Pull the "-" paddle to change If the indicator is on fixed, the posi-
) Move the gear lever to down a gear.
position M. tion is confirmed.
- If the vehicle stops or reduces Display of a dash in the rev counter
speed (for example when ap- indicates a malfunction. Contact
proaching a stop sign), the gear- a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
box changes down automatically workshop.
to first gear.
Illumination of the service warning
- In manual mode, it is not neces- lamp accompanied by a message
sary to release the accelerator and an audible signal indicates an
IX
during gear changes. operating fault. In this case:
- A request to change gear is ac- - a marked snatching may be felt
cepted only if the engine speed when selecting R for reverse
permits it. gear,
- the gearbox is locked in one
gear,
- do not exceed a speed of 60 mph
(approximately 100 km/h).
Have it checked by a CITROËN
159

DRIVING
FIXED CENTRED CONTROLS STEERING WHEEL
Cruise control/speed limiter Audio system controls

and parking sensor controls
A. Volume decrease.
1. Activation of the parking B. Volume increase.
sensors function. C. Search of higher frequencies.
2. Selection of cruise control or D. Scrolling pre-set stations.
speed limiter.
E. Mute.
3. Activation/Deactivation of speed
limiter. (see "Audio and Telematics" section)
Deactivation/Reactivation of
cruise control.
4. Increase speed/Activation of
cruise control.
5. Decrease speed/Activation of
cruise control.
IX
160

DRIVING
Optional function controls Multifunction screen controls

1. Call/Hang up the telephone (see A. Selection of the type of informa-
"Audio and Telematics" section). tion to be displayed on the right
2. Rheostat for dashboard lighting. of the screen (radio, trip comput-
er, navigation/guidance…).
3. Start of voice recognition (see
"Audio and Telematics" section). For the multifunction screen A,
choice of activation/deactivation
4. Personalisation button: of functions and setting choices.
- courtesy lamp on/off or B. Access to the "Main Menu"*.
- diagnostics C. Confirmation of the function cho-
Press this button for more than sen or of the value modified.
two seconds to display the per- Call/Hang up (see "Audio and
sonalisation menu. Telematics" section).
5. Air recirculation. D. Scrolling in the multifunction
screen.
E. Cancellation of the current op-
eration or return to the previous
display.
IX
* To comply with legislation in certain coun-

tries, the "Menu" control may be deacti-
vated while the vehicle is in motion.
161

DRIVING
SPEED LIMITER Displays in the instrument With the engine running, you can
panel adjust the memorised maximum
System which prevents the vehi- speed , by means of short or long
cle from exceeding the speed pro- presses on:
grammed by the driver. ) button 4 to increase the memo-
Once the limit speed has been rised maximum speed,
reached, the accelerator pedal no ) button 2 to decrease the memo-
longer has any effect. rised maximum speed.
The speed limiter is switched on Successive presses will modify the
manually: a speed of at least 20 mph maximum speed in steps of 1 mph
(approximately 30 km/h) must be pro- (1 km/h) and a sustained press in
grammed. steps of 3 mph (5 km/h).
The programmed information is
grouped together in zone A of the
instrument panel screen. Activation
The speed limiter cannot, in any circum-
stances, take the place of the obser- When the desired maximum speed
vance of speed limits or of the vigilance is displayed, press button 3 so that
and responsibility of the driver. the limitation is activated.
Programming The information "OFF"
then disappears from
Steering mounted controls Rotate the control 1 to the "LIM" po- the instrument panel
sition. screen.
On selection of the
IX function, the previous
memorised speed and
the information "OFF"
are displayed in the in-
strument panel. While the function is active, press-
ing the accelerator pedal will not en-
able the programmed speed to be
exceeded, except if you press the
pedal hard down to beyond the end-
of-travel switch.
The speed of your vehicle may vary
The speed limiter controls are locat- slightly in relation to that memo-
ed on the left-hand side of the steer- rised.
ing wheel.
162

DRIVING
Deactivation If during the operation of the speed Operating fault

limiter, the system is unable to keep
Press on button 3. within the maximum speed (for ex- If there is a speed limiter malfunc-
ample on a steep descent or under tion, a message will display accom-
This action causes the heavy acceleration) then the speed panied by an audible signal and
information "OFF" to flashes. Adapt your speed as neces- lighting of the service warning lamp.
appear on the instru- sary. Have it checked by a CITROËN
ment panel screen. The function will re-engage when dealer or a qualified workshop.
your speed returns below the de-
sired maximum speed.
This action does not cancel the Return to normal driving On a steep downhill gradi-
memorised maximum speed which
remains displayed in zone A of the ent or on sharp accelera-
instrument panel. tion, the speed limiter will
not be able to prevent the vehicle
from exceeding the programmed
speed.
Override of the programmed
speed Use of floor mats that are not ap-
proved by CITROËN may hinder
The accelerator pedal is equipped access to the accelerator pedal
with an end-of-travel switch. If you and thus interfere with the function-
action this switch by pressing the ing of the speed limiter.
pedal hard down, you can exceed To avoid any risk of interfering with IX
the memorised maximum speed at the pedals:
any time. - check that the floor mat is cor-
During the time the speed is be- ) By moving the control 1 from po-
sition "LIM" to position 0. rectly positioned,
ing exceeded, the displayed speed - never use more than one floor
flashes. ) By the engine stopping.
mat.
You have only to release the ac- The speed previously chosen is still
celerator pedal to return below the memorised.
maximum speed and render the
function active again.
163

DRIVING
CRUISE CONTROL Displays in the instrument You can then release the accelera-
panel tor pedal. The vehicle will automati-
System which automatically main- cally keep to the speed chosen.
tains the vehicle speed programmed The speed of your vehicle may vary
by the driver, without any action on slightly in relation to that memo-
the accelerator pedal. rised.
The cruise control is switched on You can adjust the memorised speed
manually: the vehicle speed must in the instrument panel screen by
be at least 25 mph (approximately pressing:
40 km/h) and you must engage: ) button 4 to increase the speed,
- fourth gear on a manual gear- ) button 2 to decrease the speed.
box,
The programmed information is Successive presses modify the
- second gear, in manual mode, cruise speed in steps of 1 mph
on an electronic or automatic grouped together in zone A of the
instrument panel screen. (1 km/h) and a sustained press in
gearbox, steps of 3 mph (5 km/h).
- position A on an electronic gear-
box or D on an automatic gearbox. Programming
Rotate the control 1 to the "REG"
The cruise control cannot, in any cir- position.
cumstances, take the place of the Deactivation
observance of speed limits or of the vig-
ilance and responsibility of the driver. ) Either by pressing the brake or
Activation the clutch pedal.
Steering mounted controls ) Or by pressing button 3.
On selection of the
IX function via control 1, ) Or if either the ESP or the ASR
no cruise speed has system is active.
yet been memorised. The cruise control is not active if the
gear lever is in neutral.
These actions cause

Once the desired speed has been the information "OFF"
reached using the accelerator, press to appear in the instru-
button 2 or 4. The cruise speed is ment panel screen.
then memorised. It is displayed in These actions do not
The cruise control switches are lo- zone A of the instrument panel. cancel the cruise speed
cated on the left-hand side of the which remains displayed
steering wheel. in the instrument panel.
164

DRIVING
Reactivation Operating fault

If during the operation of cruise
) By recall of the memorised control, the system is unable to If there is a malfunction, a message
speed keep within the memorised speed will display accompanied by an au-
(for example on a steep descent), dible signal and lighting of the ser-
After a disengagement, press on then the speed flashes. Adapt your
button 3. Your vehicle automati- vice warning lamp.
speed as necessary.
cally returns to the memorised Have it it checked by a CITROËN
cruise speed which is displayed dealer or a qualified workshop.
in zone A.
If the memorised cruise speed
is higher than the current speed,
the vehicle will accelerate to
reach the former.
Return to normal driving
) By selection of the current
speed
Press on button 2 or 4 once the Cruise control should only
desired speed has been reached. be used when the driving
The information "OFF" will then conditions allow you to drive
disappear from the instrument at a constant speed.
panel display. Do not use it in heavy traf-
fic, or on dangerous or slippery
roads.
The driver must remain attentive
Overriding the programmed and in full control of his vehicle.
speed You are recommended to always
During the operation of cruise con- keep your feet within range of the IX
trol, it is always possible to use the pedals.
accelerator to go faster than the ) By an action on the control 1 from To avoid any risk of interfering with
cruise speed (for example to over- position "REG" to position 0. the pedals:
take another vehicle). The speed ) By the engine stopping. - check that the floor mat is cor-
displayed in zone A flashes. The cruise speed previously rectly positioned,
You have only to release the accel- chosen is no longer memorised. - never use more than one floor
erator pedal to return to the cruise mat.
speed.
165

DRIVING
PARKING SPACE SENSORS
After measuring the parking space Displays in the instrument You can activate the "parking space
available between two vehicles or panel sensor" function by pressing but-
obstacles, this system gives you in- The parking space sensor ton A. The fixed illumination of the
formation on: function warning lamp can warning lamp indicates that the
- the possibility of fitting into a free have three different states: function is selected.
space, depending on the dimen-
sions of your vehicle and the dis-
tances needed for manoeuvring, - off: the function is not selected,
IX - the level of difficulty of the ma- - on fixed: the function is selected
noeuvre to be performed. but the conditions for measure-
ment are not yet met (direction
The system does not measure spaces indicator not operating, speed
which are clearly much smaller or too high) or the measurement
larger than the size of the vehicle. phase has ended,
- flashing: measurement is in
progress or the message is be-
ing displayed.
166

DRIVING
Operation The function displays the following The function deactivates itself auto-
types of message: matically:
You have identified a parking - when you engage reverse gear,
space: Parking possible - when you switch off the ignition,
) Press button A to activate the
function. - five minutes after activation of
the function or after the last mea-
) Activate the direction indicator surement operation,
on the side where the space is to
be measured. - if the vehicle speed exceeds the
threshold of 45 mph (approxi-
) During the measuring, go for- mately 70 km/h) for one minute.
ward the length of the space, at
a speed less than 12 mph (ap-
proximately 20 km/h), to prepare Parking difficult
for your manoeuvre.
The system then measures the If the lateral distance between your
size of the space. vehicle and the parking space is too
) The system informs you of the great, the system may not operate.
level of difficulty of the manoeu-
vre via a message in the multi- - The function remains available
function screen accompanied by after each measurement and so
an audible signal. can measure a number of places
Parking not advised
successively.
- In bad weather or in winter, en-
sure that the sensors are not cov-
ered by dirt, or by ice or snow.
IX
- The parking space sensor func-
tion deactivates the front parking
sensors during the space mea-
suring phase when you are in
forward gear.
If there is a malfunction,
have the system checked
by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
167

DRIVING
LANE DEPARTURE Activation Operating fault

WARNING SYSTEM
) Press this button, the indicator In the event of a malfunction, the
System which detects the involun- lamp comes on. service warning lamp comes on, ac-
tary crossing of longitudinal traffic companied by an audible signal and
lane markings on the ground (solid a message in the screen.
or broken line). Deactivation Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
Sensors, fitted below the front bum- qualified workshop.
per, trigger a warning if the vehicle ) Press this button again, the indi-
drifts over a lane marking (speed cator lamp goes off.
higher than 50 mph (80 km/h)). The status of the system remains The detection may be impeded:
in the memory when the ignition is - if the sensors are dirty (mud,
switched off. snow...),
Detection - if the markings on the ground
are worn,
You are warned by the vibration of
the driver's seat cushion: - if there is little contrast between
the markings on the ground and
- on the right-hand side, if the the road surface.
marking on the ground has been
crossed on the right,
- on the left-hand side, if the marking
on the ground has been crossed
on the left.
No warning is transmitted while the
direction indicator is active and for
IX approximately 20 seconds after the
direction indicator is switched off.
This system is particularly useful on A warning may be transmitted if a
motorways and main roads. direction marking (e.g. arrow) or
non-standard marking (e.g. graffiti)
is crossed.
The lane departure warning sys-

tem cannot, in any circumstances,
replace the need for vigilance and
responsibility on the part of the
driver.
168

DRIVING
PARKING SENSORS Rear parking sensors

This system indicates the proximity
of an obstacle (person, vehicle, tree,
gate, etc.) which comes within the
field of detection of sensors located
in the bumper.
Certain types of obstacle (stake,
roadworks cone, etc.) detected ini-
tially will no longer be detected at
the end of the manoeuvre due to the
presence of blind spots.
The system is switched on by en-

gaging reverse gear. This is accom-
panied by an audible signal.
The system is switched off when you
exit reverse gear.
Visual assistance
This supplements the audible signal
by displaying bars in the multifunc-
Audible assistance tion screen which move progressive-
The proximity information is given ly nearer to the vehicle. When the
by an intermittent audible signal, the obstacle is near, the "Danger" sym-
frequency of which increases as the bol is also displayed in the screen.
vehicle approaches the obstacle. IX
The sound emitted by the speaker
(right or left) indicates the side on
which the obstacle is located.
When the distance between the
vehicle and the obstacle becomes
less than approximately thirty centi-
metres, the audible signal becomes
continuous.
This function cannot, in any circum-

stances, take the place of the vigi-
lance and responsibility of the driver.
169

DRIVING
Front parking sensors The sound emitted by the speaker Operating fault
(front or rear) indicates whether the
In addition to the rear parking sen- obstacle is in front or behind.
sors, the front parking sensors are In the event of a malfunction
triggered when an obstacle is detect- of the system, when reverse
ed in front and the speed of the ve- gear is engaged this warn-
hicle is still below 6 mph (10 km/h). ing lamp is displayed in the
The front parking sensors are inter- instrument panel and/or a message
rupted if the vehicle stops for more appears in the screen, accompanied
than three seconds in forward gear, by an audible signal (short beep).
if no further obstacles are detected Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
or when the speed of the vehicle ex- qualified workshop.
ceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).
Deactivation/Activation of the
front and rear parking sensors
The function is deactivated by press-
ing this button. The indicator lamp in
the button comes on. In bad weather or in winter, ensure
Pressing this button again reacti- that the sensors are not covered
vates the function. The indicator with mud, ice or snow. When re-
lamp in the button goes off. verse gear is engaged, an audible
signal (long beep) indicates that
IX the sensors may be dirty.
When the vehicle is moving at a
speed below 6 mph (10 km/h), cer-
The function will be deactivated au- tain sound sources (motorcycle,
tomatically if a trailer is being towed lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may trig-
or a bicycle carrier is fitted (vehicle ger the audible signals of the park-
fitted with a towbar or bicycle car- ing sensor system.
rier recommended by CITROËN).
170

DRIVING
PNEUMATIC SUSPENSION Operation Activation/Deactivation

The automatic height correction can
- If there is an increase in vehicle be deactivated:
load, a sinking of the rear of
the vehicle is detected and the ) press button B located on the
pneumatic springs inflate in or- left hand boot interior trim for ap-
der to compensate for the extra proximately two seconds,
weight. ) release the button when you
- If there is a decrease in load, a hear a beep. Deactivation is con-
rising of the rear of the vehicle is firmed by the lighting of the indi-
detected and so the pneumatic cator lamp in button B.
springs deflate to return the ve-
hicle to its nominal height.
- If the vehicle has been unused You must deactivate the system in
for a long period, the pneumatic the following circumstances:
springs may inflate if necessary - when working under the vehicle,
when you unlock or open a door, - when changing a wheel,
Grand C4 Picasso so as to return the vehicle to its
C4 Picasso - when transporting the vehicle on
nominal height. a lorry or ferry.
The pneumatic rear suspension en- If you do not reactivate the system
hances driving comfort by maintain- manually, automatic height correc-
tion will be activated as soon as the To reactivate automatic height cor-
ing a constant body height whatever rection:
the vehicle load. vehicle starts to move. During height
correction, the service warning lamp ) press button B again for approxi-
comes on and a message on the mately two seconds,
screen reminds you not to exceed 6 ) release the button when you hear
mph (10 km/h). a beep. Activation is confirmed IX
The automatic correction does not by the extinction of the indicator
function if the doors or the boot are lamp in button B.
open.
The automatic correction operates
even if your vehicle is in power
economy mode.
In the event of a system fault,
alert messages, always in asso-
ciation with the service warning
lamp, will appear in the instru-
ment panel. Contact a CITROËN
171

DRIVING
Loading/unloading Increasing the height of the boot Returning to the normal height
assistance floor ) Press briefly the top of control A
) Press continuously the top con- twice.
trol A, which is located in the
boot, on the left-hand side.
Particular points
This action will be accompanied by
an audible signal. You can stop the - If you start the vehicle without
movement at any time by releasing having returned it to the normal
the control. height, automatic correction will
activate as soon as the vehicle
3 beeps will confirm that the move- starts to move. During the cor-
ment has gone as far as it can. rection, the service warning
lamp comes on and a message
on the screen reminds you not to
exceed 6 mph (10 km/h).
Returning to the normal height
- Loading assistance does not
) Press briefly the bottom of con- function in the following circum-
trol A twice. stances:
Grand C4 Picasso
C4 Picasso - If button B is illuminated,
The pneumatic suspension has an - in power economy mode,
additional function: the possibility to - when you first use the function,
raise or lower the height of the rear Decreasing the height of the boot press control A for two seconds
of the vehicle when stationary, in or- floor to initialise the system. The sys-
der to facilitate loading/unloading of ) Press continuously the bottom of tem will respond normally to sub-
the boot. control A. sequent operation of the control.
IX This action will be accompanied by
an audible signal. You can stop the
movement at any time by releasing
the control.
3 beeps will confirm that the move-
ment has gone as far as it can.
Driving with the boot in a
low position may damage
underbody components.
172

CHECKS
PARTNERS IN PERFORMANCE
AND PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
Innovation in the search for
performance
For over 40 year, the TOTAL Research and
Development departments have developed
for CITROËN, lubricants to match the latest
technical innovations on CITROËN vehi-
cles, both for competition and for everyday
motoring.
For you, this is an assurance that you will
obtain of the best performance for your
engine.
Optimum protection for your
engine
By having your CITROËN vehicle
serviced with TOTAL lubricants,
you are contributing towards im-
proving the life and performanc-
es of your engine, while also
protecting the environment.
prefers
173

CHECKS
The location of the interior release

Opening lever prevents opening of the bon-
net while the left hand door is
closed.
Before doing anything un- This operation must only be carried
der the bonnet, switch off out when the vehicle is stationary.
the Stop & Start system Avoid opening the bonnet in strong
to avoid any risk of injury result- winds.
ing from an automatic change to When the engine is hot, take care
START mode. when handling the exterior safety
catch and the bonnet stay (risk of
burns).
) At the front of the bonnet, push
the exterior safety catch B to the
left and raise the bonnet.
Closing
) Take the stay out of the support
notch.
) Clip the stay in its housing.
) Lower the bonnet then slam it
closed at the end of its travel.
) Pull on the bonnet to check that
it is fully closed.
) Open the left hand front door.
) Pull the interior release lever A,
X located at the bottom of the door
frame.
) Unclip the stay C from its housing.

) Fix the stay in the notch to hold
the bonnet open.
174

CHECKS
BLEEDING THE DIESEL FUEL Bleeding water from the fuel

FILTER filter
Protective cover
Bleed the filter regularly (at every oil

change).
Removal To evacuate the water, slacken the
) Remove the protective cover by bleed screw or the water-in-Diesel
unclipping first point 1, then 3 sensor, which is located at the base
and 4. of the filter.
) Unclip point 2 pulling towards Persist until water ceases to flow
you, then lift. out.
Then retighten the bleed screw or
the water-in-Diesel sensor.
Refitting
) Clip point 2 first.
X
) Lower the cover, centring it.
) Clip points 1 and 4, pushing ver-
tically and slightly rearwards.
) Clip point 3, pushing vertically.
175

CHECKS
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL Priming the fuel system

(DIESEL)
In the event of running out of fuel:
) after filling (minimum 5 litres),
squeeze the manual priming
pump repeatedly, until some re-
sistance is felt,
) then operate the starter, gently
pressing the accelerator until the
engine starts.
If the engine fails to start at the first
attempt, wait 15 seconds before
trying again.
If the engine fails to start after a few
attempts, repeat the procedure from
the beginning. When the engine is
idling, accelerate gently to complete
1.6 litre HDi engine 2.0 litre HDi engine the purge of the circuit.
Detach the protective cover for ac- Detach the protective cover for ac-
cess to the priming pump. cess to the priming pump.
HDi engines are of a highly

technical nature.
All maintenance and repairs
must be done only by a CITROËN
176

CHECKS
PETROL ENGINES X
The covers and caps provide access for checking the levels of the various fluids and for replacing certain components.
1. Power steering fluid reservoir. 4. Air filter. 7. Fusebox.
2. Screenwash and headlamp 5. Brake fluid reservoir. 8. Engine oil filler cap.
wash reservoir. 6. Battery/Fuses. 9. Engine oil dipstick.
3. Coolant header tank.
177

CHECKS
X DIESEL ENGINES
The covers and caps provide access for checking the levels of the various fluids, for replacing certain components and
for priming the fuel system.
1. Power steering fluid reservoir. 6. Fusebox. As the Diesel fuel system
2. Screenwash and headlamp 7. Air filter. is pressurised, any work on
wash reservoir. 8. Engine oil filler cap. this system is prohibited.
3. Coolant header tank 9. Engine oil dipstick.
4. Brake fluid reservoir. 10. Priming pump*.
5. Battery/Fuses. 11. Bleed screw*.
* According to engine.
178

CHECKS
CHECKING LEVELS Brake fluid level

If a level drops significantly, have After topping up the oil, the check The brake fluid level should
the corresponding system checked when switching on the ignition with be close to the "MAX" mark.
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified the oil level indicator in the instru- If it is not, check the brake
workshop. ment panel is not valid during the pad wear.
Check all of these levels regularly 30 minutes after topping up.
and top them up if necessary, unless
otherwise indicated.
Changing the fluid
Refer to the servicing booklet for de-
tails of the interval for this operation.
Take care when working
under the bonnet, as cer-
tain areas of the engine
may be extremely hot (risk
of burns). Fluid specification
Engine oil change The brake fluid must conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations
Refer to the servicing booklet for de- and meet the DOT4 standard.
tails of the interval for this operation.
Oil level
The check is carried out ei-
ther when the ignition is
In order to maintain the re-
switched on using the oil lev-
liability of the engine and
el indicator on the instrument Power steering fluid level
emission control system,
panel, or using the dipstick. the use of additives in the engine
This manual check will only be cor- oil is prohibited.
rect if the vehicle is on level ground The power steering fluid
and the engine has been off for more level should be close to the X
than 30 minutes. "MAX" mark. With the en-
gine cold, unscrew the cap
It is normal to top up the oil lev- to check the level.
el between two services (or oil Oil specification
changes). CITROËN recommends The oil must be the correct grade
that you check the level, and top for your engine and conform to the
up if necessary, every 3 000 miles manufacturer's recommendations.
(5 000 kms).
179

CHECKS
Coolant level Screenwash and headlamp wash Used products

fluid
The coolant level should be In the case of vehicles fitted Avoid prolonged contact of
close to the "MAX" mark but with headlamp washers, the used oil or fluids with the
should never exceed it. low fluid level is indicated skin.
When the engine is warm, by an audible signal and a Most of these fluids are harmful to
the temperature of the coolant is message in the screen. health or indeed very corrosive.
regulated by the fan. This can oper- Top up the reservoir when you next
ate with the ignition off. stop the vehicle.
On vehicles which are fitted with
a particle emission filter, the fan Do not discard used oil or
may operate after the vehicle has Fluid specification fluids into sewers or onto
been switched off, even if the en- For optimum cleaning and to avoid the ground.
gine is cold. freezing, this fluid must not be Take used oil to a CITROËN
In addition, as the cooling system is topped up with or replaced with plain dealer or a qualified workshop
pressurised, wait at least one hour water. (France) or to an authorised waste
after switching off the engine before disposal site.
carrying out any work.
To avoid any risk of scalding, un-
screw the cap by two turns to al- Diesel additive level (Diesel
low the pressure to drop. When the engine with particle emission
pressure has dropped, remove the filter)
cap and top up the level.
A low additive level is indicated by
illumination of the service warning
lamp, accompanied by an audible
Changing the coolant warning and a message in the multi-
X The coolant does not have to be
function screen.
changed.
Fluid specification Topping up

The coolant must conform to the This additive must be topped up by
manufacturer's recommendations. a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop without delay.
180

CHECKS
CHECKS Failure to observe this recommen- Particle filter system (Diesel)

dation may shorten the life of the
Unless otherwise indicated, check battery. Complementary to the catalytic
these components in accordance converter, this filter makes an ac-
with the servicing booklet and active contribution to the preservation
cording to your engine. of air quality by the retaining of the
Otherwise, have them checked by Air filter and passenger unburnt pollutant particles. Black
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified compartment filter exhaust fumes are thus no longer
workshop. emitted.
Refer to the servicing
booklet for details of the After prolonged idling or driving
12 V battery replacement intervals for at very low speeds, you may oc-
these components. casionally notice water vapour be-
The battery does not re- ing emitted from the exhaust when
quire any maintenance. Depending on the environ- accelerating. This is of no conse-
However, check that the ment (e.g. dusty atmosphere) and quence to the running of the vehicle
terminals are clean and the use of the vehicle (e.g. city driv- or to the environment.
correctly tightened, partic- ing), replace them twice as often
ularly in summer and winter. if necessary (refer to the "Engines"
section).
When carrying out work on the bat-
tery, refer to the "Practical information" A clogged passenger compartment If there is risk of clogging, a mes-
section for details of the precautions filter may have an adverse effect on sage appears on the multifunction
to be taken before disconnecting the the performance of the air condition- screen, accompanied by an audible
battery and following its reconnection. ing system and generate undesir- signal and lighting of the service
able odours. warning lamp.
This alert tells you that the particle
filter is starting to fill up (in condi-
tions of urban driving of excep-
Oil filter tionally long duration: low speeds,
traffic jams etc.)
Replace the oil filter each To regenerate the filter, it is advised X
time the engine oil is to drive as soon as possible, when
changed. traffic conditions permit, at a speed
The presence of this label, in par- Refer to the servicing of 40 mph (around 60 km/h) or
ticular with the Stop & Start system, booklet for details of the more for at least five minutes (until
indicates the use of a specific 12 V replacement interval for this compo- the alert message disappears).
lead-acid battery with special tech- nent.
nology and specification, for which If this alert persists, consult a
the involvement of a CITROËN CITROËN dealer or a qualified
dealer or a qualified workshop is workshop.
required when replacing or discon-
necting the battery.
181

CHECKS
Manual gearbox Brake pads Electric parking brake

The gearbox does not re- Brake wear depends on
quire any maintenance (no the style of driving, par- This system does not require any
oil change). ticularly in the case of ve- routine servicing. However, in the
hicles used in town, over event of a problem, have the system
short distances. It may be checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
Refer to the servicing booklet for the necessary to have the condition of qualified workshop.
details of the level checking interval the brakes checked, even between For more information, see "Driving -
for this component. vehicle services. Electric parking brake - § Operating
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a faults".
drop in the brake fluid level indicates
6-speed electronic that the brake pads are worn.
gearbox system
The gearbox does not re-
quire any maintenance (no Brake disc wear
oil change).
For information on checking
brake disc wear, contact a
Refer to the servicing booklet for de- CITROËN dealer or a quali-
tails of the checking interval for this fied workshop.
component.
Automatic gearbox
The gearbox does not re-

X quire any maintenance (no
oil change).
Refer to the servicing booklet for de-

tails of the level checking interval for
this component.
182

P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N
TEMPORARY PUNCTURE Using the kit

REPAIR KIT
) Tick the wheel to be repaired
Complete system consisting of a on the speed limitation sticker
compressor and a sealant cartridge enclosed then affix the sticker
which permits temporary repair of to the vehicle's steering wheel
a tyre so that you can drive to the to remind you that a wheel is in
nearest garage. temporary use.
) Switch off the ignition.
) Clip the cartridge 1 on the com-
pressor 2.
) Check that the switch A is tilted

to position "0".
) Connect the pipe of the car-
tridge 1 to the valve of the tyre to
be repaired.
) Unwind the pipe of the compres-
sor 2 fully before connecting it to
the cartridge.
The kit is located in the boot under

the floor or under the flap in the sec-
ond row left-hand passenger foot-
well (open by turning the screw a
quarter of a turn).
) Connect the compressor's elec-
tric plug to the vehicle's 12 V
socket.
) Start the vehicle and leave the
It is designed to repair holes of a
engine running. XI
maximum diameter of 4 mm, locat-
ed exclusively on the tyre tread or
shoulder. Avoid removing any for-
eign bodies which have penetrated
the tyre.
183

) Switch on the compressor by

moving the switch A to position If this pressure has not been
"1" until the tyre pressure reaches reached after approximately three
2.0 bars. minutes, the tyre cannot be re-
paired; contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop for assis-
tance.
) Remove the compressor and

store the cartridge in the plastic
bag, supplied in the kit, to avoid
staining your vehicle with traces
of fluid.
) Drive immediately for approxi-
mately two miles (three kilome-
tres), at reduced speed (between
15 and 35 mph - 20 and 60 km/h),
to plug the puncture.
) Stop to check the repair and the
pressure.
) Connect the compressor pipe di-

rectly to the valve of the repaired
wheel.
XI
184

) Connect the compressor's elec-

tric plug to the vehicle's 12 V Take care, the sealant
socket again. cartridge contains ethyl-
ene-glycol. This product is
) Start the vehicle again and leave harmful if swallowed and causes
the engine running. irritation to the eyes. Keep it out of
reach of children.
The expiry date of the sealant is
indicated on the base of the car-
tridge.
The cartridge is designed for a sin-
gle use; even if only partly used, it
must be replaced.
After use, do not discard the car-
) Adjust the pressure using the tridge into the environment, take it
compressor (to inflate: switch A to a CITROËN dealer or to an au-
in position "1"; to deflate: thorised waste disposal site.
switch A in position "0" and Do not forget to obtain a new
press button B), in accordance sealant cartridge, available from
with the vehicle's tyre pressure a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
label (located on the door aper- workshop.
ture on the driver's side), then re-
member to check that the leak is
plugged correctly (no further loss
of pressure after several miles).
) Remove the compressor, then
store the whole kit.
) Drive at reduced speed (50 mph
[80 km/h]).
) Visit a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop as soon as Under-inflation detection
possible to have the tyre repaired If the vehicle is fitted with tyre un- XI
or replaced by a technician. der-inflation detection, the tyre
under-inflation warning lamp will
remain on after the wheel has been
repaired until the system is reini-
tialised by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
185

CHANGING A WHEEL
Access to the tools
Depending on equipment, the tools 7. Short extension for C4 Picasso

are to be found either in the com- Switch on your hazard
8. Long extension for Grand C4 warning lamps, ensure that
partment under the second-row pas- Picasso (located in the well
senger footwells (the compartment any passengers leave the
under the right hand third row vehicle and find a safe place to wait
is opened by turning the screw a seat)
quarter turn) or in the well under the away from traffic (e.g. behind crash
third-row left-hand seat. 9. Two chocks, provided for chang- barriers or on a grass verge).
ing a wheel or for other uses on Never get underneath the vehicle
the vehicle (such as releasing if it is supported only by the jack;
1. Tool for removing the central trim the electric parking brake)
on alloy wheels* use a stand.
10. Parking brake release tool (elec- The jack and the tools are specific
or tric parking brake) to your vehicle. Do not use for any
2. Tool for removing the chrome 11. Removable towing eye other purpose.
XI covers on the wheel bolts on al-
Do not to exceed a speed of 50 mph
loy wheels*
(80 km/h) on your spare wheel.
3. Centring guide*
Have the original wheel repaired
4. Wheelbrace and refitted as soon as possible.
5. Vehicle jack with integral handle * With alloy wheels only.
6. Security bolt socket (located in ** With security bolts only.
the glovebox)**
186

Access to the spare wheel Putting the wheel back in place

) The tyre valve must be facing
upwards.
) Pass the linking plate through
the centre of the wheel (first re-
moving the central trim on cer-
tain alloy wheels).
) Turn the carrier drive anti-clock-
wise to draw in the carrier cable.
Initially the drive will turn freely,
then the cable will tighten to raise
the wheel.
Check that the wheel is tight
C4 Picasso Grand C4 Picasso against the vehicle floor and
not interfering with other nearby
components (e.g. the exhaust).
Taking out the wheel (C4 Picasso) Taking out the wheel (Grand
C4 Picasso) ) Stow the tools.
) Lift the boot floor covering to re-
veal the spare wheel carrier drive ) Lift the boot floor covering to re-
on the left. veal the spare wheel carrier drive
) Take the extension 7 from the on the right.
set of tools. ) Take the extension 8 clipped in
) Lift up the spare wheel carrier the rear of the well below the
drive aperture cap, if fitted. right hand third-row seat.
) Fit the extension to the drive then ) Lift up the spare wheel carrier
engage the head of the wheel- drive aperture cap.
brace 4 on the extension. ) Fit the extension to the drive then With the damaged wheel
engage the head of the wheel- now under the vehicle floor,
) Turn the assembly clockwise to the vehicle has reduced
the end of its travel to lower the brace 4 on the extension.
ground clearance, so take extra
spare wheel carrier; the spare ) Turn the assembly clockwise to care when reversing or driving on
wheel is now resting on the the end of its travel to lower the uneven surfaces, including kerbs. XI
ground. spare wheel carrier; the spare
wheel is now resting on the Retrieval of the spare wheel and
) Pull the wheel towards you and stowage of the affected road wheel
pass the linking plate through ground.
are operations that should be done
the centre of the wheel. ) Pull the wheel towards you and with the vehicle standing on its
pass the linking plate through wheels, not supported by the jack.
the centre of the wheel.
187

Removing a wheel
) Park the vehicle on level, stable ) Detach the trim using the remov- ) Slacken the wheel bolts. For ve-
and non-slippery ground. Apply ing tool 4, pulling in the area of hicles with alloy wheels, undo
the parking brake (a message the valve. the security bolts using the secu-
and a warning lamp appear on For vehicles with alloy wheels, rity socket 6.
the instrument panel). insert the trim removing tool 1 ) Position the jack under the vehi-
Switch off the ignition and en- into the recess in the central trim cle, at the jacking point A closest
gage first gear or reverse gear and lever it off. to the wheel to be changed.
depending on the slope (posi- For vehicles with alloy wheels ) Unwind the jack 5 until its brack-
tion P if an automatic gearbox, that have visible bolts, remove et is in contact with the ground.
D or R if a 6-speed electronic the chrome covers using the re- Make sure that the jack is verti-
gearbox). moving tool 2. cal under the jacking point used.
) Use a chock to secure the vehi- ) Continue to extend the jack so
cle more safely. Place the chock as to raise the vehicle.
9 in front of the wheel that is op-
posite the wheel affected. ) Undo the wheel bolts and re-
XI move the wheel.
Before any operation of this

sort, it is advisable to deactivate
your pneumatic suspension.
188

Temporary use spare wheel Fitting a wheel Spare wheel dimensions

) Position the wheel with the aid of If your spare wheel has dimensions
the centring guide 3. different from those of the standard
) Do up the 3 bolts by hand, then vehicle wheels (identified by a la-
remove the centring guide 3. bel), it is imperative to use the spare
Position the 4th bolt. wheel only temporarily, to drive
with caution, not to exceed 50 mph
) Pre-tighten the wheel bolts, us- (80 km/h) and to have the tyre re-
ing the wheelbrace 4. paired and the standard wheel refit-
) Retract the jack 5 and disengage it. ted as soon as possible.
) Tighten the wheel bolts, using
the wheelbrace 4.
) Ensure that the tyre pressure is Tyre pressures
If your vehicle is equipped with a correct.
spare wheel for temporary use only, These are indicated on the label
when fitting this it is normal to ob- on the front left-hand door pillar
serve that the wheel bolts do not (see "Technical Data - Identification
come to bear directly on the wheel Under-inflation detection markings").
rim.
Wheels with under-inflation detection
The spare wheel is secured by the have tyre pressure sensors. Have repairs
conical tapering of the wheel bolt’s to them carried out by a CITROËN dealer
shaft. or a qualified workshop. The spare wheel
When refitting the original wheel, en- does not have a sensor.
sure that the wheel bolts and wash-
ers are clean and in good condition. Security bolts (alloy wheels) The wheel bolts are specific
to each type of wheel.
Each wheel may be equipped with
one security bolt (depending on the If new wheels are fitted, check with
country of sale). your CITROËN dealer or a qualified
To remove it: workshop that the wheel bolts are
) remove its protective cover us-
compatible with the new wheels. XI
ing of the tool for removing the Make a note of the code number on
chrome covers 2. the head of the security bolt sock-
et. This will enable you to obtain a
) use the security bolt socket 6 replacement security bolt socket
with the wheelbrace 4. from your dealer.
189

CHANGING A BULB Front lamps

Model with halogen headlamps Model with Xenon headlamps
and directional headlamps
The headlamps are fitted
with polycarbonate glass
with a protective coating:
) do not clean them using a dry
or abrasive cloth, nor with a
detergent or solvent product,
) use a sponge and soapy water,
) when using a high pressure
washer on persistent marks, do
not keep the lance directed to-
wards the lamps or their edges
for too long, so as not to dam-
age their protective coating and
seals.
) Do not touch the bulb directly

with your fingers, use lint-free 1. Dipped beam headlamps 1. Dual-function Xenon
cloths. (H7-55 W) headlamps (dipped/main
Changing a bulb should only be 2. Main beam headlamps beam)
done after the headlamp has been (H1-55 W) 2. Additional main beams
switched off for a few minutes (risk 3. Sidelamps (H6W-6 W) (H7-55W)
of serious burns). 3. Sidelamps (H6W-6W)
Daytime running lamps/
It is imperative to use only anti-ul- sidelamps (LEDs) Daytime running lamps/
traviolet (UV) type bulbs in order sidelamps (LEDs)
XI not to damage the headlamp. 4. Direction indicators
(H21-21 W) 4. Direction indicators (H21-21W)
Always replace a failed bulb with a
new bulb with the same type and
specification.
190

Dual-function Xenon headlamps Dipped beam headlamps Main beam headlamps

(dipped/main beam)
If the headlamp bears this

symbol, any operation to
change the Xenon dual-
function directional head-
lamp (D1S-35 W) must be carried
out by professionals (risk of elec-
trocution).
qualified workshop.
It is recommended to change both
bulbs at the same time if one of
them is faulty.
Additional main beam headlamps ) Remove the rubber cover. ) Remove the rubber cover.
) Remove the rubber cover. ) Rotate the bulb-holder a quarter ) Detach the clips by lowering
) Rotate the bulb-holder a quarter turn anti-clockwise and remove it them on each side of the bulb.
turn anti-clockwise and remove it from its housing. ) Pull on the bulb-holder to remove it.
from its housing. ) Replace the faulty bulb. ) Replace the faulty bulb.
) Replace the faulty bulb. ) Reposition the bulb-holder by ) Push the bulb-holder back into
) Reposition the bulb-holder by pushing it in, tightening it by a its housing.
pushing it in, tightening it by a quarter turn clockwise.
) Reattach the clips.
quarter turn clockwise. ) Refit the rubber cover.
) Refit the rubber cover.
XI
191

Sidelamps Direction indicators Integrated direction indicator

side repeaters
) Rotate the bulb-holder a quarter The direction indicator bulb is locat- To change the repeater, press down-
turn anti-clockwise. ed underneath the main beam bulb. wards firmly on the zone indicated
) Remove it from its housing. ) Remove the rubber cover. by the arrow, then pull the repeater.
) Replace the faulty bulb. ) Pull on the bulb-holder to remove it. Repeaters can be obtained from
) Reposition the bulb-holder. ) Replace the faulty bulb. a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
) Rotate it a quarter turn clockwise ) Reposition the bulb-holder in the
to reposition in its housing. bracket and push it in.
XI
192

Changing daytime running Front foglamps (H11-55 W) Rear foglamp (P21 W)

lamps/sidelamps (LEDs)
For the replacement of this type ) Insert the key in the notch A, tilting ) Pass your hand underneath the
of LED lamp, contact a CITROËN the bulb-holder cover, located un- bumper to reach the bulb-holder.
dealer or a qualified workshop. derneath the bumper, then insert ) Rotate the bulb-holder a quarter
the key in the notch B to remove it. turn.
) Undo the lamp. ) Pull on the bulb-holder.
) Tilt the bulb-holder. ) Rotate the bulb a quarter turn to
) Change the faulty bulb. remove it.
) Reposition the bulb-holder. ) Replace the faulty bulb.
) Do up the lamp and refit the bulb- ) Fit the bulb.
holder cover firmly in place. ) Reposition the bulb-holder by
rotating it a quarter turn.
XI
193

Rear lamps (C4 Picasso) Lamps mounted on the ) Refit the lamp unit on the body
bodywork and do up the two screws.
) Reposition the plastic cover by
pressing on it.
Lamps mounted on the tailgate
1. Direction indicators ) Identify the faulty bulb.

(PY21W) ) With the boot open, press on the
2. Brake lamps/sidelamps plastic cover A, located close to
(P21/5W) the lamp unit, to release it from
3. Reversing lamp (P21W) its housing.
) Undo the two screws B on the
side of the lamp unit and detach ) Identify the faulty bulb.
the lamp unit by pulling it rear-
wards. ) With the boot open, remove the
plastic cover on the tailgate.
) Disconnect the connector linking
the lamp unit with the tailgate. ) Remove the bulb-holder from its
housing.
) Remove the bulb-holder.
) Replace the bulb.
) Replace the bulbs.
To remove a bulb, rotate it a
XI To remove a bulb, rotate it a quarter turn.
quarter turn.
To refit the bulb, rotate it a quar-
To refit the bulb, rotate it a quarter turn in the other direction.
ter turn in the other direction.
) Reposition the bulb-holder.
) Reposition the bulb-holder.
) Refit the plastic cover.
) Reconnect the connector to the
lamp unit.
194

Rear lamps (Grand C4 Picasso) Changing bulbs Number plate lamps

) Identify the faulty bulb. (W 5 W)
) With the tailgate open, undo the
3 screws located on the side of
the lamp unit and pull it rear-
wards to detach.
) Disconnect the connector linking
the lamp unit to the boot. Do not
disconnect the LEDs.
) Remove the seal.
) Replace the bulbs.
To remove a bulb, rotate it a
quarter turn.
To fit the bulb, rotate it a quarter
turn in the other direction.
1. Direction indicators (PY21W) ) Reposition the bulb-holder. ) Insert a thin screwdriver into one
2. Brake lamps (P21W) of the external holes of the lens.
) Refit the seal.
3. Reversing lamp (P21W) ) Push it outwards to unclip it.
) Reconnect the connector to the
4. Sidelamps (LEDs) lamp unit. ) Remove the lens.
For this type of lamp, contact a ) Arrange the harness in the open- ) Change the faulty bulb.
CITROËN dealer or qualified ing provided in the body.
workshop. ) Refit the lamp unit to the body
and fit and tighten the 3 screws.
XI
195

Third brake lamp with bulb Interior lighting Boot lamps (W5W)
(W5W)
) With the boot open, detach the
interior trim.
) Undo the nuts.
) Using a thin screwdriver, detach
the 3 retaining lugs.
) Remove the lamp via the exterior
of the tailgate.
) Change the faulty bulb(s).
To refit, carry out these operations in
reverse order.
Interior lamp (1/W5W) Detach the unit by pushing it rear-

wards.
Detach the cover of the interior
Third brake lamp (LEDs) lamp 1 with a thin screwdriver, close
to the button, to access the faulty Torch (Krypton 3.6 V)
bulb.
Map reading lamps (2/W5W)

Detach the cover of the interior lamp.
To access the faulty bulb, detach
the partition for the reading lamp 2
concerned, as necessary.
XI ) Open the tab.

) Push with a flat screwdriver in
For the replacement of this type the hole under the tab and re-
of LED lamp, contact a CITROËN cover the bulb unit.
dealer or a qualified workshop. ) Open the bulb unit fully to change
the bulb.
196

CHANGING A FUSE Changing a fuse Fuses under the dashboard

) Use the special tweezer A to ex-
Before replacing a fuse: tract the fuse from its housing
- the cause of the failure must be and check the condition of its el-
identified and corrected, ement.
- all electrical consumers must be ) Replace the failed fuse with a
switched off, fuse of the same rating (same
colour)
- your vehicle must be stationary,
ignition off. Use of a fuse of different rating
may cause a malfunction (risk of
Identify the failed fuse by reference fire).
to the tables and diagrams below. Your vehicle's electrical
If the failure occurs again soon after
replacing the fuse, have the electri- system is designed to oper-
cal system checked by a CITROËN ate with either standard or
dealer or a qualified workshop. optional equipment.
Before installing electrical equip-
ment or accessories on your vehi-
cle, consult a CITROËN dealer or a
Good Failed qualified workshop.
CITROËN declines all responsibil-
ity for the consequences and costs
that are caused by faults or repairs
on your vehicle resulting from the
installation of accessories that
are not supplied and/or not rec-
ommended by CITROËN and not
installed according to its instruc-
Access to tools tions, particularly when the energy
Tweezer A consumption of all of the additional
The extraction tweezer A is fitted on accessories connected exceeds
the back of the dashboard fusebox 10 milliamperes (Ma).
cover. XI
For access to it:
) unclip the cover by pulling at the
top right, then left,
) pull the cover down,
) remove the tweezer.
197

Fuses under the dashboard Table of fuses
Fuse N° Rating Functions

F1 15 A Rear screen wipe
F2 30 A Locking and unlocking earth
F3 5A Airbags and pretensioners
Multimedia, photochromatic rear view mirror,
F4 10 A particle filter, diagnostic socket, air conditioning,
manual headlamp height adjustment
Front windows, front door electronic control panel,
F5 30 A
panoramic sunroof
F6 30 A Rear windows
F7 5A Interior lamps, cooled glovebox, radio
Access to the fuses
) Undo the screw by a quarter turn Multifunction screen, radio, steering mounted
and pivot the housing. F8 20 A controls, multimedia, under inflation detection,
alarm, trailer
F9 30 A Multimedia, front 12 V sockets, torch, radio
F10 15 A Height corrector (suspension)
F11 15 A Brake switch, ignition switch
Parking sensors, automatic wipers and lighting,

F12 15 A passenger’s electric seat, lane departure warning
system, Hi-Fi amplifier, trailer
XI F13 5A Engine relay unit (BSM), driver’s electric seat
F14 15 A Air conditioning, Bluetooth® hands-free system, automatic

gearbox selector lever, airbags, instrument panel
F15 30 A Locking and unlocking
F16 - SHUNT
F17 40 A Heated rear screen
198

Access to the second dashboard Table of fuses

fusebox
F29 20 A Heated seats
F30 - Not used
F31 40 A Trailer relay unit
F32 15 A Rear 12 V socket
Parking sensors, automatic wipers and lighting,

F33 5A passenger’s electric seat, lane departure warning
system, Hi-Fi amplifier
F34 5A Trailer
After any operation on the fuses F35 - Not used
in the fusebox, check that the
fusebox cover is refitted correctly F36 20 A Hi-Fi amplifier
for their protection.
F37 10 A Air conditioning, lighting pack
F38 30 A Driver’s electric seat
F39 5A Fuel filler flap
F40 30 A Passenger’s electric seat, panoramic sunroof
XI
199

Fuses in the engine

compartment
Access to the fuses

) Detach and remove the cover.
After any operation, carefully refit

the cover. If the cover is not cor-
rectly positioned or not properly
closed, this could cause serious
problems on your vehicle. For the
same reason, take care not to spill
any liquid in the fusebox.
XI
All work on the maxi-fuses,
which are located in these
fuseboxes and which give
extra protection, must be carried
out by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
200

Table of fuses

F1 20 A Engine management
F2 15 A Horn
F3 10 A Screenwash pump
F4 20 A Headlamp wash pump
F5 15 A Engine components
Xenon dual-function directional headlamps, automatic headlamp height adjustment,

F6 10 A
clutch switch, protection switch box (BCP)
F7 10 A Automatic gearbox, engine coolant level switch, power steering

F8 25 A Starter motor
F9 10 A Stop lamp switch
F11 40 A Rear blower
F12 30 A Screen wipe
F13 40 A Built-in Systems Interface (BSI)
F14 30 A Air pump, heat exchange saver
F15 10 A Right-hand main beam
F16 10 A Left-hand main beam
XI
F17 15 A Left-hand dipped beam
F18 15 A Right-hand dipped beam
F21 5A Cooling fan relay
201

Fuses on the battery

After any operation, carefully refit
the cover. If the cover is not cor-
rectly positioned or not properly
closed, this could cause serious
problems on your vehicle. For the
same reason, take care not to spill
any liquid in the fusebox.
Access to the fuses

Fuses F7 to F12 are midi-
) Detach and remove the cover. fuses. All work on these
Fuses F1 to F6 are located on fuses must be carried out
the small board, clipped verti- by a CITROËN dealer or a
cally on the battery fusebox. qualified workshop.
Table of fuses

F1 5A Automatic gearbox actuator
XI F2 5A Stop switch
F3 5A Battery charge estimation ECU
F4 20 A ESP supply
F5 5A ESP supply
F6 20 A ECU for 6-speed electronic gearbox/automatic gearbox
202

12 V BATTERY Access to the battery

Before doing any work
Procedure for starting the engine Immobilise the vehicle: ap-
using another battery or for charging ply the parking brake, put
your flat battery. the gearbox in neutral*, then switch
off the ignition.
Check that all electrical equipment
is switched off.
The presence of this label, in Check that the battery posts and
particular with the Stop & Start terminals are clean. If they are cov-
The battery is located under the ered with sulphate (white or green
system, indicates the use of bonnet.
a 12 V lead-acid battery with deposit), disconnect them and
special technology and specification; For access to the (+) terminal: clean them.
the involvement of a CITROËN deal- ) Release the bonnet using the
er or a qualified workshop is essential interior lever, then the exterior
when replacing or disconnecting the safety catch,
battery. ) raise the bonnet and secure it Batteries contain harmful
with its stay, substances such as sul-
) lift the plastic cover for access to phuric acid and lead. They
the (+) terminal. must be disposed of in accordance
with regulations and must not, in
any circumstances, be discarded
After refitting the battery, the Stop & with household waste.
Start system will only be active after Take used cell batteries and vehi-
a continuous period of immobilisa- cle batteries to an authorised col-
tion of the vehicle, a period which lection point.
depends on the climatic conditions
and the state of charge of the bat- XI
tery (up to about 8 hours).
The Stop & Start battery does not

have to be disconnected for charging.
* or position P for an automatic gearbox.

203

Starting using another Disconnecting the (+)

battery terminal
If the battery in your vehicle is flat,
the engine can be started using a
slave battery (external or in another
vehicle) and jump leads.
First ensure that the slave

battery has a nominal volt-
age of 12 V and a capac- ) Connect the red lead to the (+)
ity at least equal to that of the flat terminal of the flat battery A,
battery. then to the (+) terminal of the
Do not try to start the engine by slave battery B.
connecting a battery charger. ) Raise the lever D fully to release
) Connect one end of the green or the clamp E.
Do not disconnect the (+) terminal black lead to the (-) terminal of
when the engine is running. the slave battery B (or the earth
point on the slave vehicle).
) Connect the other end to the Reconnecting the (+) terminal
earth point C on the broken-
down vehicle. ) Position the open clamp E of the
) Start the engine on the slave ve- cable on the positive post (+) of
hicle and leave the engine run- the battery.
ning for a few minutes. ) Press down on the clamp to po-
) Operate the starter on the bro- sition it correctly on the battery
ken-down vehicle and leave the post.
engine running. ) Lock the clamp by lowering the
If the engine does not start lever D.
XI straight away, switch off the ig-
nition and wait a few moments
before trying again.
) With the engine idling, discon- Do not force the lever as locking
nect the jump leads in reverse will not be possible if the clamp is
order. not positioned correctly; start the
procedure again.
204

Charging the battery using Charging Reinitialisation after

a battery charger ) Disconnect the (+) terminal. reconnection
If the battery of your vehicle is flat ) Follow the instructions on use After any reconnection of the bat-
or prior to taking the vehicle out of provided by the manufacturer of tery, switch on the ignition and wait
service for an extended period, you the charger. at least one minute before starting,
can charge the battery using a bat- ) Connect the red cable of the to allow time for the initialisation of
tery charger. charger to the (+) post of the bat- the electronic systems.
For information on the specification tery, then the black cable to the By referring to the corresponding
of battery chargers compatible with (-) terminal. sections, you should set or initialise
your battery, refer to a CITROËN ) Once charging is complete, dis- the following systems yourself:
dealer or a qualified workshop. connect the charger cables in re- - the date and time,
verse order.
- the anti-pinch on the driver's
electric window and the sunroof.
Before disconnecting
The charging operation - the panoramic sunroof blind,
) Go to the battery.
must be carried out in a - the multifunction screen set-
) Check that all of the openings - well ventilated area and tings,
doors, boot... - are closed but not well away from naked flames and
locked. - the audio system or navigation
sources of sparks, so as to avoid system settings,
) Wait at least four minutes after any risk of explosion and fire.
switching off the ignition. Do not try to charge a frozen bat-
tery; the battery must first be
thawed out to avoid any risk of ex-
plosion. If the battery has frozen,
before charging, have it checked Check that there no error message
It is recommended that the battery by a CITROËN dealer or a quali- or warning lamp comes on after
be disconnected if the vehicle is not fied workshop, who will ensure that switching on the ignition.
be used for more than a month. the internal components have not
been damaged and that the casing However, if minor problems persist
is not cracked, which would intro- after carrying out these operations,
duce the risk of a leak of toxic and contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
corrosive acid. XI
205

ENERGY ECONOMY MODE Switching to economy mode Exiting economy mode

System which manages the duration Once this period has elapsed, a These functions are reactivated au-
of use of certain functions to conserve message appears on the multi-func- tomatically next time the vehicle is
a sufficient level of charge in the tion screen indicating that the vehi- started.
battery. cle has switched to economy mode To resume the use of these functions
After the engine has stopped, you can and the active functions are put on immediately, start the engine and let
still use functions such as the audio standby. it run for at least 5 minutes.
and telematics system, windscreen If a telephone call is being made at
wipers, dipped beam headlamps, this time:
courtesy lamps, etc. for a maximum - it will be maintained for 10 minu-
combined duration of thirty minutes. tes with your Audio system or A flat battery prevents the
MyWay hands-free system engine from starting (refer
- it will be maintained for 10 minu- to the corresponding para-
tes with the NaviDrive, then it will graph).
transfer to your telephone de-
This period may be reduced con- pending on its model.
siderably if the battery is not fully
charged.
XI
206

TOWING THE VEHICLE Towing your vehicle Towing another vehicle

Procedure for having your vehicle
towed or for towing another vehicle
using a removable towing eye.
Access to the tools
) On the front bumper, unclip the ) On the rear bumper, unclip the
cover by pressing at the top left cover by pressing at the bottom
and pulling at the right. at pulling at the top.
) Screw the towing eye in fully. ) Screw the towing eye in fully.
) Install the towing bar. ) Install the towing bar.
) Switch on the hazard warning ) Switch on the hazard warning
lamps on the towed vehicle. lamps on the towed vehicle.
) Place the gear lever in neutral
According to equipment, the towing (position N on the electronic
eye is installed in the storage flap gearbox or automatic gearbox).
under the second row passenger
footwell or under the boot floor.
To gain access to it:
) open one of the rear doors or the
boot (according to equipment), XI
) open the flap or raise the floor
(according to equipment), Failure to observe this instruction
) remove the towing eye from the could result in damage to certain
holder. braking components and the ab-
sence of braking assistance the
next time the engine is started.
207

General recommendations
Observe the legislation in force in your country.
Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is higher than that of the towed vehicle.
The driver must stay at the wheel of the towed vehicle.
Driving on motorways and fast roads is prohibited when towing.
When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, always use an approved towing bar; rope and straps are pro-
hibited.
When towing a vehicle with the engine off, there is no longer any power assistance for braking or steering.
In the following cases, you must always call on a professional recovery service:
- vehicle broken down on a motorway or fast road,
- when it is not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, unlock the steering, or release the parking brake,
- towing with only two wheels on the ground,
- where there is no approved towing bar available...
XI
208

Driving with a trailer places greater ) To lower the engine speed, re-
demands on the towing vehicle and duce your speed.
the driver must take particular care. The maximum towed load on a long
incline depends on the gradient and
Towbar suitable for the attachment the ambient temperature.
of a trailer with additional lighting
and signalling. In all cases, keep a check on the
Driving advice coolant temperature.
Distribution of loads
) Distribute the load in the trailer
so that the heaviest items are as ) If the warning lamp and
close as possible to the axle and the STOP warning lamp
the nose weight approaches the come on, stop the vehicle
maximum permitted without ex- and switch off the engine
ceeding it. as soon as possible.
Air density decreases with altitude,
thus reducing engine performance.
Above 1 000 metres, the maximum Braking
towed load must be reduced by 10 % Towing a trailer increases the brak-
for every 1 000 metres of altitude. ing distance.
Refer to the "Technical Data" section To avoid overheating of the brakes
Your vehicle is primarily designed for details of the weights and towed on a long mountain type of descent,
for transporting people and luggage, loads which apply to your vehicle. the use of engine braking is recom-
but it may also be used for towing a mended.
trailer.
Tyres
We recommend the use of genuine ) Check the tyre pressures of the
CITROËN towbars and their har- Side wind towing vehicle and of the trailer,
nesses that have been tested and ) Take into account the increased observing the recommended
approved from the design stage sensitivity to side wind. pressures.
of your vehicle, and that the fit- Lighting
ting of the towbar is entrusted to Cooling ) Check the electrical lighting and XI
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified signalling on the trailer.
workshop. Towing a trailer on a slope increases
the temperature of the coolant.
If the towbar is not fitted by a
CITROËN dealer, it is imperative As the fan is electrically controlled, The rear parking sensors will be
that it is fitted in accordance with the its cooling capacity is not dependent deactivated automatically if a gen-
vehicle manufacturer's instructions. on the engine speed. uine CITROËN towbar is used.
209

ROOF BARS VERY COLD CLIMATE

Maximum load, distributed
over the roof bars (for a SCREEN*
For your safety and to avoid damage
to the roof and tailgate, the design of loading height not exceed- Removable protective screen which
your vehicle requires the use of roof ing 40 cm, except bicycle carrier): prevents the accumulation of snow
bars and roof boxes that are tested 80 kg. at the radiator cooling fan.
and approved by CITROËN. If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt
Regardless of the type of load car- your speed to the profile of the road
rier to be mounted on the roof (roof to avoid damaging the roof bars
box, bicycle carrier, ski carrier...), and the fixings on the roof.
you must fit transverse roof bars. Please refer to national legislation
in order to comply with the regula-
tions concerning the transport of
objects which are longer than the
vehicle.
Recommendations
) Distribute the load evenly, avoid-
ing overloading on one side.
Fitting
) Arrange the heaviest part of the
load as close as possible to the Bicycle carrier ) Offer up the very cold climate
roof. screen to the front of the lower
) Anchor the load securely and fit Do not attach a strap-fitting bicycle section of the front bumper.
a warning flag part of it is over- carrier to the following vehicle ver- ) Press around its edge to engage
hanging. sions: its fixing clips one by one.
) Drive gently, as the vehicle will - C4 Picasso 5-seater (all versions);
be more liable to the effects of - C4 Picasso 7-seater version with
side winds (vehicle stability may opening rear screen. Removal
be altered).
) Use a screwdriver as a lever to
) Remove the roof bars as soon release each fixing clip in turn.
as they are no longer needed.
XI
Do not forget to remove the very
cold climate screen:
- when the ambient temperature
exceeds 10 °C,
- when towing,
- at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
210

ACCESSORIES "Comfort": front and rear parking "Protection": anti-theft alarm,

sensors, isotherm module, recharge- wheel security devices, stolen ve-
A wide range of accessories and able torch, sun blinds, air deflector, hicle tracking system, breathalyser,
genuine parts is available from the fragrance cartridges... first aid kit, warning triangle, high vis-
CITROËN dealer network. ibility vest, dog guard, snow chains,
These accessories and parts have anti-skid covers, foglamps kit, tem-
been tested and approved for reli- porary puncture repair kit, booster
ability and safety. cushions and child seats...
They are all adapted to your vehicle
and benefit from CITROËN's recom- "Transport solutions": towbar har-
mendation and warranty. ness, boot carpet, boot liner, boot
spacers, transverse roof bars, bi-
cycle carrier, ski carrier, roof boxes,
towbars...
"Protection": mats*, seat covers,

"Style": Alloy wheels, wheel embel- mud flaps, sill protectors, bumper
lishers... protectors, vehicle covers...
XI
* To avoid any risk of jamming of
the pedals:
- ensure that the mat is posi-
tioned and secured correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of an-
other.
211

"Multimedia": Bluetooth® hands-free You can also obtain products for

system, audio systems, portable sat- cleaning and maintenance (exterior
ellite navigation system, DVD player, and interior), topping up (screen-
USB Box, speakers, 230 V/50 Hz wash...) and replacement cartridges
socket, 230 V/12 V power supply (for the temporary puncture repair
adaptor, WiFi on board... kit...) from the CITROËN dealer
network.
Installation of radio Depending on the legislation in

communication transmitters force in the country, it may be com-
Before installing any after-market ra- pulsory to have a high visibility
dio communication transmitter, you safety vest, warning triangle and
can contact a CITROËN dealer for spare bulbs and fuses available in
the specification of transmitters which the vehicle.
can be fitted (frequency, maximum
power, aerial position, specific instal-
lation requirements), in line with the
Vehicle Electromagnetic Compatibility The fitting of electrical
Directive (2004/104/EC). equipment or accessories
which are not recommend-
ed by CITROËN may result in a
failure of your vehicle's electronic
system and excessive electrical
consumption.
Please note this precaution. You
are advised to contact a CITROËN
representative to be shown the
range of recommended equipment
and accessories.
XI
212

T E C H N I C A L D ATA
MODELS: ENGINES AND GEARBOXES
Model codes: 5FS-0 5FV-8/P

RFJ-F
UA... UE... UD... 5FS-0/CU1 5FV-8/PCU1
PETROL ENGINES VTi 120 THP 155 VTi 143
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 598 1 598 1 997
Bore x stroke (mm) 77 x 85.8 77 x 85.8 85 x 88
EU standard maximum power (kW) 88 115 103
Maximum power engine speed (rpm) 6 000 6 000 6 000
EU standard maximum torque (Nm) 160 240 200
Maximum torque engine speed (rpm) 4 250 1 400 4 000
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes
Manual Electronic gearbox system Auto.

GEARBOXES
(5-speed) (6-speed) (4-speed)
OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)
Engine (with filter replacement) 4.25 - 5
XII
UA...: CITROËN Grand C4 Picasso (7-seat). UD...: CITROËN C4 Picasso (5-seat).

UE...: CITROËN Grand C4 Picasso (5-seat). ...CU1: commercial versions.
213

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)

Petrol engines VTi 120 THP 155 VTi 143
Gearboxes Automatic Electronic gearbox system Automatic

Model codes:
5FS-0 5FV-8/P RFJ-F
UA... UE... UD...
- Unladen weight 1 430 - 1 415 - 1 415 1 517 - 1 430 - 1 430 1 600 - 1 556 - 1 552
- Kerb weight 1 505 - 1 490 - 1 490 1 592 - 1 505 - 1 505 1 675 - 1 631 - 1 627
- Payload 770 - 700 - 525 703 - 630 - 610 660 - 514 - 538
- Gross vehicle weight

2 200 - 2 115 - 2 015 2 220 - 2 060 - 2 040 2 260 - 2 070 - 2 090
(GVW)
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient 3 300 - 3 315 - 3 315 3 420 - 3 410 - 3 390 3 660 - 3 570 - 3 590
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 100 - 1 200 - 1 300 1 200 - 1 350 - 1 350 1 400 - 1 500 - 1 500
- Braked trailer* (with load

1 300 - 1 500 - 1 500 1 500 1 500
transfer within GTW limit)
- Unbraked trailer 750 -745 - 745 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 60 60 60
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced
by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
XII The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1,000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1,000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your
country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when
214 the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.

9HZ-C 9HZ-H/P 9HR-8 9HR-8/P RHJ-H/P

Model codes:
9HZ-C/ 9HZ-H/ 9HR-8/ 9HR-8/ 9HR-8/PS RHJ-H/ RHR-J
UA... UE... UD...
CU1 PCU1 CU1 PCU1 PCU1
DIESEL ENGINES HDi 110 HDi 110 HDi 138
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 560 1 560 1 997
Bore x stroke (mm) 75 x 88.3 75 x 88.3 85 x 88
EU standard maximum power (kW) 80 82 100
Maximum power engine speed (rpm) 4 000 3 600 4 000
EU standard maximum torque (Nm) 240 270 270 320
Maximum torque engine speed (rpm) 1 750 1 750 2 000
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes
Particle emission filter (PEF) Yes Yes Yes
Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic

Manual gearbox Manual gearbox gearbox gearbox Automatic
GEARBOXES system system system system
(6-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed)
Engine (with filter replacement) 3.75 3.75 - - 5.25 5.25
XII
...S: model fitted with Stop & Start. UD...: CITROËN C4 Picasso (5-seat).
UA...: CITROËN Grand C4 Picasso (7-seat). ...CU1: commercial versions.
UE...: CITROËN Grand C4 Picasso (5-seat).
215

Model codes: RHE-8

RHE-8/P RHH-A
UA... UE... UD... RHE-8/CU1
DIESEL ENGINES HDi 150 HDi 163
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 997 1 997
Bore x stroke (mm) 85 x 88 85 x 88
EU standard maximum power (kW) 110 120
Maximum power engine speed (rpm) 3 750 3 750
EU standard maximum torque (Nm) 340 340
Maximum torque engine speed (rpm) 2 000 2 000
Fuel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter Yes Yes
Particle emission filter (PEF) Yes Yes
Manual Electronic gearbox system Automatic

GEARBOXES
Engine (with filter replacement) 5.25 - 5.25
XII
UA...: CITROËN Grand C4 Picasso (7-seat). UD...: CITROËN C4 Picasso (5-seat).
UE...: CITROËN Grand C4 Picasso (5-seat). ...CU1: commercial versions.
216


Diesel engines HDi 110
Gearboxes Manual Electronic gearbox system
Model codes:
9HZ-C 9HZ-H/P
UA... UE... UD...
- Unladen weight 1 530 - 1 484 - 1 489 1 539 - 1 494 - 1 499
- Kerb weight 1 605 - 1 559 - 1 564 1 614 - 1 569 - 1 574
- Payload 720 - 546 - 561 711 - 536 - 561
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 250 - 2 030 - 2 050 2 250 - 2 030 - 2 060
on a 12 % gradient 3 130 3 130
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 880 - 1 100 - 1 080 880 - 1 100 - 1 070

1 180 - 1 300 - 1 300 1 180 - 1 300 - 1 300
- Unbraked trailer 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 50 - 60 - 60 50 - 60 - 60
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1,000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1,000 metres of altitude. XII
country).
the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
217


Gearboxes Manual Electronic gearbox system Electronic gearbox system
Model codes:
9HR-8 9HR-8/P 9HR-8/PS
UA... UE... UD...
- Unladen weight 1 490 - 1 430 - 1 430 1 510 - 1 470 - 1 420 1 520 - 1 480 - 1 430
- Kerb weight 1 565 - 1 505 - 1 505 1 585 - 1 545 - 1 495 1 595 - 1 555 - 1 505
- Payload 760 - 670 - 620 740 - 630 - 640 730 - 620 - 630
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 250 - 2 100 - 2 050 2 250 - 2 100 - 2 060 2 250 - 2 100 - 2 060
on a 12 % gradient 3 130 3 130 3 130
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 880 - 1 030 - 1 080 880 - 1 030 - 1 070 750 - 900 - 940

1 180 - 1 330 - 1 380 1 180 - 1 330 - 1 370 1 050 - 1 200 - 1 240
- Unbraked trailer 750 750 - 750 - 745 750

- Recommended nose weight 60 60 60
XII must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1,000 metres of altitude.
country).
218


Gearboxes Electronic gearbox system Automatic
Model codes:
RHJ-H/P RHR-J
UA... UE... UD...
- Unladen weight 1 620 - 1 582 - 1 581 1 650 - 1 611 - 1 640
- Kerb weight 1 695 - 1 657 - 1 656 1 725 - 1 686 - 1 715
- Payload 700 - 558 - 559 700 - 559 - 510
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 320 - 2 140 - 2 140 2 350 - 2 170 - 2 150
on a 12 % gradient 3 620 - 3 590 - 3 540 3 550 - 3 520 - 3 550
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 300 - 1 450 - 1 400 1 200 - 1 350 - 1 400

1 500 1 500
transfer with GTW limit)
- Unbraked trailer 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 70 - 60 - 60 60
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. XII
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 62 mph (approx 100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your
country).
219


Diesel engines HDi 150 HDi 163
Gearboxes Manual Electronic gearbox system Automatic
Type codes:
RHE-8 RHE-8/P RHH-A
UA... UE... UD...
- Unladen weight 1 613 - 1 580 - 1 610 - 1 637 - 1 601 - 1 614
- Kerb weight 1 688 - 1 655 - 1 685 - 1 712 - 1 676 - 1 689
- Payload 695 - 685 - 520 - 688 - 689 - 536
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 308 - 2 265 - 2 130 - 2 325 - 2 290 - 2 150
on a 12 % gradient 3 508 - 3 515 - 3 530 - 3 525 - 3 490 - 3 550
on a 10 % or 12 % slope 1 200 - 1 250 - 1 400 - 1 200 - 1 200 - 1 400

1 400 - 1 500 - 1 600 - 1 500
transfer with GTW limit)
- Unbraked trailer 750 - 750

- Recommended nose weight 70 - 60
XII The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 62 mph (approx 100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your
country).

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)- COMMERCIAL VERSIONS

Petrol engines VTi 120 THP 155
Gearboxes Manual Electronic gearbox system
Model codes: UA5FS-0/CU1 UA5FV-8/PCU1
UA... UD... UD5FS-0/CU1 UD5FV-8/PCU1
- Unladen weight 1 560 - 1 591 1 600 - 1 590
- Kerb weight 1 635 - 1 666 1 675 - 1 665
- Payload 630 - 624 620 - 620
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)* 2 190 - 2 215 2 220 - 2 210
on a 12 % gradient** 3 290 - 3 415 3 420 - 3 410
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient*** 1 100 - 1 200 1 200 - 1 200
- Braked trailer (with load

- -
- Unbraked trailer 750 - 750 750 - 750

- Recommended nose weight 70 - 60 70 - 60
* If the maximum rear axle weight is exceeded when the vehicle is towing, the maximum speed is limited to 50 mph
(80 km/h) as defined by point 2.7 of the EU Directive.
** If the the gross vehicle weight is exceeded when the vehicle is towing, the maximum speed is limited to 50 mph
(80 km/h) as defined by point 2.7 of the EU Directive.
*** Maximum weight of the braked trailer within the GTW limit; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may
have an adverse effect on its road holding.
XII
221

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg) - COMMERCIAL VERSIONS

Diesel engines HDi 110 HDi 110 HDi 138 HDi 150
Gearboxes Electronic gearbox Electronic Electronic

Manual Manual Manual
system gearbox system gearbox system
Model codes UA9HZ-C/CU1 UA9HZ-H/PCU1 UA9HR-8/CU1 UA9HR-8/PCU1 UARHJ-H/PCU1 UARHE-8/CU1
UA... UD... UD9HZ-C/CU1 UD9HZ-H/PCU1 UD9HR-8/CU1 UD9HR-8/PCU1 UDRHJ-H/PCU1 UDRHE-8/CU1
- Unladen weight 1 571 - 1 635 1 600 - 1 646 1 630 - 1 630 - 1 665 - 1 691 1 685 - 1 680
- Kerb weight 1 646 - 1 710 1 675 - 1 721 1 705 - 1705 - 1 740 - 1 766 1 760 - 1 755
- Payload 634 - 620 620 - 624 620 - 620 - 620 - 624 620 - 620
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)* 2 205 - 2 255 2 220 - 2 270 2 250 - 2 250 - 2 285 - 2 315 2 305 - 2 300
on a 12 % gradient** 3 125 - 3 130 3 120 - 3 130 3 150 - 3 150 - 3 585 - 3 540 3 555 - 3 550
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient*** 920 - 875 900 - 860 900 - 900 - 1 300 - 1 225 1 250 - 1 250
- Braked trailer (with load

- - - - - -
- Unbraked trailer 750 - 750 750 - 750 750 - 750 - 750 - 750 750 - 750
- Recommended nose weight 40 - 60 40 - 60 70 - 60 - 55 - 60 70 - 60
* If the maximum rear axle weight is exceeded when the vehicle is towing, the maximum speed is limited to 50 mph (80 km/h)
as defined by point 2.7 of the EU Directive.
** If the the gross vehicle weight is exceeded when the vehicle is towing, the maximum speed is limited to 50 mph (80 km/h)
as defined by point 2.7 of the EU Directive.
XII *** Maximum weight of the braked trailer within the GTW limit; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may
have an adverse effect on its road holding.

DIMENSIONS (IN METRES)

Exterior (CITROËN Grand C4 Picasso and CITROËN C4 Picasso)
CITROËN Grand CITROËN

C4 Picasso C4 Picasso
A 2.730 2.730
B 4.590 4.470
C 0.990 0.990
D 0.870 0.750
E 1.510 1.510
F 1.540 1.540
G* 1.660 to 1.710 1.660 to 1.680
H 2.100 2.100
XII
I 1.830 1.830
* Depending on suspension and roof bars.

223

Interior (CITROËN C4 Picasso)
A 0.930 E 0.930
B 0.960/0.980 F 1.140
C 0.880/1.000 G 1.120
D 1.610/1.870 H 1.170
XII
224

Interior (CITROËN Grand C4 Picasso)
A 0.920 E 0.880
B 0.990/1.000 F 1.070
C 1.030/1.160 G 1.160
D 1.800/2.060 H 1.170
XII
225

IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS
Various visible markings for identifi- A. Manufacturer’s label B. Vehicle Identification

cation of the vehicle. Number (VIN)
The vehicle type and the identifica- Located on the left-hand door centre
tion number are also indicated on pillar. Located on the bodywork and be-
the registration document. 1. EU type approval number. hind the windscreen.
All CITROËN original replacement 2. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
parts are available exclusively within 3. Gross vehicle weight. C. Paint colour code
the dealer network. Tyre reference
4. Gross train weight.
For your safety and in order to re- Tyre pressures
main within the terms of the war- 5. Maximum weight on front axle.
ranty, you are advised to use only 6. Maximum weight on rear axle. Located on the driver's door front
CITROËN replacement parts. pillar.
Use the tyre pressures recom-

mended by CITROËN.
Check the tyre pressures regularly,
when the tyres are cold.
Never reduce the pressure of a hot
tyre.
When replacing tyres, it is essen-
XII tial to use the tyre sizes that are
recommended for your vehicle.
226

EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL
227

CITROËN LOCALISED EMERGENCY CALL CITROËN LOCALISED ASSISTANCE CALL
In an emergency, press this button for more than Press this button for more than 2 seconds to request
2 seconds. Flashing of the green LED and a voice assistance if the vehicle breaks down.
messageg confirm that the call has been made to the A voice message confirms that the call has been made*.
CITROËN Emergency team*.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The green The cancellation is confirmed by a voice message.
LED goes off.
A press (at any time) of more than 8 seconds on this button, cancels the
request. OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM
The green LED remains on (without flashing) when communication is When the ignition is switched on, the
established. It goes off at the end of communication. green LED comes on for 3 seconds
indicating that the system is operating
correctly.
This call is dealt with by the CITROËN Emergency team which receives If the orange LED flashes: there is a
locating information from the vehicle and can send a detailed alert to the system fault.
appropriate emergency services. In countries in which the team is not If the orange LED is on continuously: the
operational, or when the locating service has been expressly declined, backup battery must be replaced.
the call is dealt with directly by the emergency services (112) without the
vehicle location. In either case, contact a CITROËN.
If you purchased your vehicle outside the CITROËN dealer network,

we invite you to have a dealer check the configuration of these services
If an impact is detected by the airbag ECU, and independently and, if desired, modified to suit your wishes. In a multi-lingual country,
of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made configuration is possible in the official national language of your choice.
automatically.
For technical reasons, particularly to improve the quality of Telematic
* These services are subject to conditions and availability. services to customers, the manufacturer reserves the right to carry out
Consult a CITROËN dealer. updates to the vehicle's on-board telematic system.
228

EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL USING NaviDrive
CITROËN LOCALISED EMERGENCY CALL CITROËN LOCALISED ASSISTANCE CALL
Warning - the emergency call and the services are only active
if the internal telephone is used with a valid SIM card. With a Press this button for access to CITROËN services.
Bluetooth telephone and without a SIM card, these services are not
operational.
Select "Customer call" to request

q
any information about the CITROËN
In an emergency, press the SOS button until an audible marque.
signal is heard and a "Confirmation/Cancellation"
screen is displayed (if valid SIM card inserted).
Customer call
A call is made to the CITROËN Emergency team which
receives locating information from the vehicle and
can send a detailed alert to the relevant emergency
services.
Select "CITROËN Assistance" to make
In countries in which the team is not operational, or a roadside assistance call.
when the locating service has been expressly declined,
the call is sent to the emergency services (112).
CITROËN Assistance
If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and independently

of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made This service is subject
j to conditions and availability.
y Consult a
automatically. CITROËN dealer. If yyou have purchased
p your
y vehicle outside the
CITROËN dealer network, we invite you to have a dealer check the
The message "Deteriorated emergency call" associated with flashing configuration of these services and, if desired, modified to suit your
of the orange
g indicator lamp indicates a malfunction. Contact a wishes.
CITROËN dealer.
229

230

NaviDrive
MULTIMEDIA AUDIO/TELEPHONE SYSTEM
JUKEBOX FUNCTION (10 GB)/GPS (EUROPE)
CONTENTS
01 First steps p. 232
The NaviDrive is coded in such a way that it will only 02 Voice commands and p. 233
operate in your vehicle. steering mounted controls
03 Screen and main menu p. 235
04 Navigation - Guidance p. 239
05 Traffic information p. 249
06 Audio/Video p. 251
07 Telephone p. 260
For safety reasons, it is imperative that the driver carries 08 Configuration p. 264
out operations which require prolonged attention while
the vehicle is stationary. 09 Screen menu map p. 265
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the NaviDrive may switch off Frequently asked questions p. 271
after a few minutes.
231

01
Selection of the source:
radio, Jukebox, CD
and auxiliary (AUX, Cancellation of the Audio option
if activated on the current operation. Selection of the adjustments: front/rear,
Configuration menu). Selection of Long press: return previous/next left/right balance,
On/Off and Volume Long press: CD copy to wavebands FM1, to the current MP3/USB/ loudness, sound
adjustment. hard disk. FM2, FMast, AM. application. Jukebox folder. ambiences.
Selection of the display

in the screen between Selection and confirmation.
modes: TRIP, TEL, NAV
and AUDIO.
SIM card slot.
Long press on the SOS

button: emergency call.
Display the list of local
radio stations, CD tracks
Modification of the screen or MP3/USB/Jukebox
display. folders.
Long press: reinitialisation Long press: update the
of the system. local radio stations.
TA (Traffic Announcement) Access to Keypad for Automatic search for a lower/ Display the main menu
function on/off. "CITROËN" entering higher frequency.
Long press: access to the PTY services menu. descriptions Selection of the previous/next CD,
(radio Programme TYpes) mode. by successive MP3, USB or Jukebox track.
presses.
Long press: fast forward and
backward play.
232

02 VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
1 5 1 1 5
3
4
4 4
2
3 3
2 2
1. Volume increase. 1. Short press: 1. Displays the main screen.

2. Volume decrease. Activation of voice recognition. 2. Selection of the mode displayed (TRIP, TEL,
3. Mute. 2. WHEN THE TELEPHONE IS NOT IN USE: NAV or AUDIO).
4. RADIO: Long press: access to the telephone menu 3. Abandon the operation in progress
(phone book, call list, ...). and return to the previous display.
selection of the previous or next stored INCOMING CALL:
station. 4. Navigation through the menus.
Short press to accept. 5. Confirmation of the function selected.
MP3/JUKEBOX: Long press to reject the call.
selection of the previous or next directory. CALL IN PROGRESS:
5. RADIO: automatic search for a higher Short press to hang up.
frequency. Long press to access the telephone menu.
CD/MP3/JUKEBOX: 3. Personalisation:
selection of the next track. Short press: confirmation of the selection
CD/MP3: made using the dial.
continuous press: fast forwards play. 4. Rotation:
Move around the phone book, the call list.
Selection of personalisation.
233

02 VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3
VOICE COMMANDS radio memory 1 to 6/*
autostore
DISPLAYING THE LIST AND USING THEM previous/next
list
cd player previous/next track 1 to 250/*
1 Jukebox (if activated) track number/track previous/next
USB scan repeat
To display the list of available voice random play help/what can I say/cancel
commands, press the voice recognition
control to start the voice recognition, directory (CD-MP3 inserted)
then say HELP or the voice recognition list
command. call/guide to "Pre-recorded description"
telephone last number "Pre-recorded description"

voice box
voice mail
directory
message display "Pre-recorded description"
For the same operation, press and read
hold the MENU button and select the directory
"Voice commands list" function.
navigation stop/resume *
zoom in/out destination
view vehicle
Voice commands list
traffic info display
read
display audio
2 telephone
Press the voice recognition control to trip computer
start the voice recognition. Navigation
air conditioning
Say the words one by one and wait
for the audible confirmation signal previous/next for all level 1 and 2
between each word. stop
delete
The list which follows is exhaustive. yes/no
* help/what can I say/cancel for all level 1, 2 or *
234

03 SCREEN AND MAIN MENU
> COLOUR SCREEN
This displays the following information, via the audio control panel:
- time,
° - date,
- ambient temperature (if there is a risk of ice, you are warned by a
Telephone message),
- audio source displays (radio, CD, jukebox, ...),
Orange - telematic system displays (telephone, services, ...),
- check of openings (doors, boot, ...),
Time: - warning messages (e.g.: "Fuel level low") and vehicle function status
Date: messages (e.g.: "Auto lighting activated") displayed temporarily,
- trip computer information,
- GPS (Europe) satellite navigation system information.
Screen configuration: refer to the section - Screen menu map.
The system uses the complete and detailed NAVTEQ maps installed directly on the equipment's hard disk.
Updates of the maps of the UK and of the other European countries, supplied by our partner NAVTEQ, are available from the CITROËN network.
235

For maintenance of the

TRAFFIC INFORMATION: screen, the use of a
TMC information, messages. soft, non-abrasive cloth
(spectacles cloth) is
recommended without any
additional product.
MAP: orientation, details, AUDIO FUNCTIONS: radio,

display. CD, Jukebox, options.
TELEMATIC: telephone,
NAVIGATION GUIDANCE: directory, SMS.
GPS, stages, options.
CONFIGURATION: vehicle, display,

time, languages, voice, auxiliary
socket (AUX) parameters.
VEHICLE DIAGNOSTICS:
alert log, status of the
functions.
VIDEO: activation,
parameters. Long press on MENU: help.
236

DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE
CONTEXT
IN "ZOOM/SCROLL" MODE BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE

Press the OK dial to access short-cut
menus according to the display on the position info call list
screen. 1 1
select as destination call

1 1
NAVIGATION (IF NAVIGATION IS IN PROGRESS): select as stage phone book

1 1
resume/stop guidance store this position private mode/hands-free mode

1 1 1
divert route exit map mode place call on hold/resume call

1 1 1
route type guidance option

1 1
consult traffic info

1
INTERNAL TELEPHONE VEHICLE DIAGNOSTICS
zoom/scroll map
1
call list alert log
1 1
dial status of functions

1 1
phone book
1
voice mail
1
237

CD (MP3 OR AUDIO) JUKEBOX
copy CD to JBX/stop copy select playlist

1 1
activate/deactivate Introscan activate/deactivate Introscan

1 1
activate/deactivate random play activate/deactivate random play

1 1
activate/deactivate repeat activate/deactivate repeat

1 1
RADIO USB
enter a frequency copy USB to JBX/stop copy

1 1
activate/deactivate RDS eject USB

1 1
activate/deactivate REG mode activate/deactivate Introscan

1 1
hide/display "Radio Text" activate/deactivate random play

1 1
activate/deactivate repeat
1
238

04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Tip: for a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the
SELECTING A DESTINATION "Screen menu map" part of this section.
1 5
Press the MENU button. Press the dial to confirm the selection.
2 6
Turn the dial and select the Navigation Turn the dial and select the "Enter
Guidance function. an address" function.
Enter an address
3 7
Press the dial to confirm the selection. Press the dial to confirm the selection.
4 8
Turn the dial and select the When the country has been selected,
"Destination choice" function. turn the dial and select the "Town"
function.
Destination choice Town
239

9 12
10 13 Repeat steps 8 to 12 for the "Road" and "N°" functions.

Turn the dial and select the letters of
the town one by one confirming each
time by pressing the dial.
14 Select "OK" on the "Enter an address"
page.
Paris
OK
15
To speed up the process, the "Post code" can be Press the dial to confirm the selection.
entered instead of the name of the "Town".
Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the letters
and digits and "*" to correct (limit of 5 characters).
Select the "Store" function to record the address entered in
a directory record and press the dial to confirm the selection.
The points of interest (POI) indicate all of the service locations in
11 Turn the dial and select OK. the vicinity (hotels, various businesses, airports, ...).
OK Store POI
240

ADDING A STAGE
1 6 Select the "Add a stage" function

(9 stages maximum) and press the dial
During guidance, press the MENU to confirm.
button.
Add a stage
Turn the dial and select the "Navigation

2 guidance" function. 7 Enter for example a new address.
Enter an address
3 8
When the new address has been
Press the dial to confirm the selection. entered, select "OK" and press the dial
to confirm.
4 Turn the dial and select the "Journey 9

legs and route" function. Select OK and press the dial to confirm
the order of the stages.
Journey legs and route
5
Press the dial to confirm the selection. Select "Strict" (the stage must be completed in order to continue to
the next destination) or "Proximity" then press the dial to confirm.
241

04
GUIDANCE SPEECH SYNTHESIS
The volume of the Risk Areas POI alerts can only be adjusted 5
during the alert using the volume adjustment control.
During announcements, the volume of each speech synthesis Press the dial to confirm the selection.
function (guidance, traffic information...) can be adjusted directly
using the volume adjustment control.
6
1
Select the "Adjust speech synthesis"
Press the MENU button. function and press the dial to confirm.
Adjust speech synthesis

2 Turn the dial and select the "Navigation
guidance" function.
7 Press the dial then adjust the volume

of the speech synthesis or select the
"Deactivate" function and press the
dial to confirm.
3
Deactivate
Press the dial to confirm the selection.
8
Select "OK" and press the dial to
4 Turn the dial and select the "Guidance confirm.
options" function.
Guidance options OK
242

List of POI
243

UPDATING POIs DISPLAYING RISK AREAS POIs
1
The detailed procedure is available on the following website:
Press the MENU button.
"citroen.navigation.com".
2 Select "Map" and confirm by pressing

"OK".
Map
3 Select "Map details" and confirm by

pressing "OK".
Map details
4 Select "Transport and automobiles"

and confirm by pressing "OK".
Transport and automobiles
5 Select "Risk areas" and confirm by

pressing "OK".
Risk areas
244

The route presented depends directly on the guidance options.
GUIDANCE OPTIONS Changing these options may completely change the route.
2 Turn the dial and select the "Navigation 6

guidance" function. Turn the dial and select the "Define
calculation criteria" function.
Define calculation criteria
3 7
4 Turn the dial and select the "Guidance 8

Turn the dial and select, for example,
options" function. the "Distance/time" function.
Guidance options Distance/time
245

The volume of the Risk Areas POI alerts can only be adjusted SETTING RISK AREAS
during the alert.
ALERT PARAMETERS
9 1
Repeat steps 1 to 5 of the guidance option.
2
Turn the dial and select the "Traffic Turn the dial and select the "Set
10 risk area parameters" function, then
info" function if you wish to receive the
traffic information announcements. press the dial to confirm the warning
message. Press the dial to confirm the
selection.
Traffic info
Set risk area parameters

Tick this box for optimum operation of the traffic information,
diversions will be suggested.
3 Select:
- visual warnings,
- audible warnings with an
11 announcement duration (in seconds),
Press the dial to confirm the selection. - warn during guidance only, then
select OK and press the dial to
confirm.
OK
12 Select "OK" and press the dial to
confirm.
These functions are only available if the risk areas have been
OK downloaded and installed on the system.
246

ACTIONS ON THE MAP MAP ORIENTATION
For improved visibility, beyond the scale of 10 km, the map

1 automatically switches to North Orientation.
4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 then turn the

dial and select the "Map orientation"
function.
2
Turn the dial and select the "Map" Map orientation
function.
5
3 Turn the dial and select the orientation

Press the dial to confirm the selection. 6 of your choice.
Vehicle direction
North direction
4 Turn the dial and select the "Map
details" function. 3D view
Permits selection of the services
which can be seen on the map
(hotels, restaurants, risk areas...). 7 Select "OK" and press the dial to
confirm.
Map details OK
247

DISPLAYING THE MAP IN A WINDOW
OR IN FULL SCREEN MODE
5
2 Turn the dial and select the "Map"

function.
6
Turn the dial and select the "Map in
window" or "Full screen map" tab.
Map in window
3
Full screen map
7
4 Turn the dial and select the "Display confirm
map" function.
OK
Display map
248

05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION
The TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages provide information
CONFIGURING THE FILTERING OF relating to the traffic and the weather conditions, received in real time and
communicated to the driver in the form of audible announcements and
TMC ANNOUNCEMENTS icons on the navigation map.
The guidance system may then suggest a diversion route.
1 6
Select the "Geographic filter" function
Press the MENU button. and press the dial to confirm.
Geographic filter
Turn the dial and select the "Traffic
2 information" function.
7 Turn the dial and select the filter of
your choice.
Around the vehicle

3 On the route
8
confirm.
4 Turn the dial and select the "Filter
traffic information" function.
OK
Filter traffic information
The filters are independent and one replaces the other.

5 We recommend:
- a filter of 6 miles (10 km) around the vehicle in heavy traffic,
Press the dial to confirm the selection. - a filter of 30 miles (50 km) around the vehicle or a filter on
the route for motorway journeys.
249

CONFIGURING THE DISPLAY OF We recommend that you do not select the "New message display" tab for
TMC MESSAGES regions with heavy traffic.
1 5
6 Select the "Read messages" tab.

2 Turn the dial and select the
"Traffic information" function. Read messages
7 The Traffic Information Messages will

be read by the voice synthesiser.
Select the "New message display" tab.
3 The traffic information messages
are extended to the filters selected
Press the dial to confirm the selection. (geographic...) and can also be
displayed when guidance is not active.
New message display
4
Turn the dial and select the "Configure
message announcement" function. Select "OK" and press the dial to
8 confirm.
Configure message announcement OK
250

The external environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car
06 AUDIO/VIDEO parks, ...) may block reception, including in RDS mode. This is a normal
effect of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not
indicate any failure of the audio equipment.
RADIO RDS
SELECTING A STATION
1 1
Press the SOURCE button several Press the MENU button.
times in succession and select RADIO.
2 2
Press the BAND button to select a Select "Audio functions" then press
waveband: FM1, FM2, FMast, AM. "OK".
3 3 Select the "FM waveband preferences"

Briefly press one of the buttons to function then press "OK".
carry out an automatic search of the
radio stations.
FM waveband preferences
4 4 Select "Activate RDS" then press "OK".

Press one of the buttons to carry out a RDS appears on the screen.
manual search of the radio stations.
Activate RDS
Press the LIST button to display RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to the same station
the list of stations received locally by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain
(60 maximum). conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout
To update this list, press for more than the country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. This
two seconds. explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.
251

06
MP3 CD CD
INFORMATION AND ADVICE PLAYING A CD OR AN MP3 COMPILATION
Empty CDs are not recognised and may damage the system.
Insert circular compact discs only. Some anti-pirating
systems, on original discs or CDs copied using
a personal recorder, may generate malfunctions
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1.2 & 2.5 Audio Layer regardless of the quality of the original player.
3, is an audio compression standard which permits the recording of Insert an audio CD or an MP3 compilation in the player,
several tens of music files on a single disc. play begins automatically.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when

recording, the ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet file format is 1
recommended. If the player already contains a disc,
If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played press the SOURCE button several
correctly. times in succession and select CD to
It is recommended that the same recording format is always listen to it.
used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible
(4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet format is
recommended. 2 Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
Press the LIST button to display the list
The audio system will only play files with the extension ".mp3" with of tracks on the CD or of the folders of
a sampling rate of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of file the MP3 compilation.
(.wma, .mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters without using The play and display of an MP3 compilation may depend on the
special characters (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying disc burning software and/or the settings used. We recommend
problems. use of the ISO 9660 file system format.
252

06 AUDIO/VIDEO
USING THE USB PORT* The list of compatible equipment is available from CITROËN dealers.
1 CONNECTING A USB MEMORY STICK
The audio files are transmitted from a USB memory 1

stick to your audio system, to be listened to via the
vehicle's speakers.
Do not connect a hard drive or USB equipment other Connect the memory stick to the port, directly or using
than USB memory sticks in FAT 16 or FAT 32 format a lead. If the audio equipment is switched on, the USB
(NTFS not supported). This could damage your source is detected as soon as it is connected. Play
installation. begins automatically after a delay which depends on
the capacity of the USB memory stick.
The file formats recognised are .mp3 (mpeg1 layer 3 only).
USB memory stick (1.1, 1.2 and 2.0):

- the USB memory sticks must be in FAT or Do not connect a hard drive or USB equipment other than USB
FAT 32 format (NTFS not supported), memory sticks in FAT 16 or FAT 32 format (NTFS not supported).
- navigation through the file base is by means This could damage your installation.
of the steering mounted controls.
* Availability according to vehicle.

253

06 AUDIO/VIDEO
PLAYING AN MP3 USB MEMORY JUKEBOX
STICK COPYING AN MP3 USB MEMORY STICK ONTO THE HARD DISK
1 1 Insert a USB memory stick in the

Connect a USB memory stick to the port provided. space provided and press the MENU
button.
2 If another source is being played, Select "Audio functions" and press the
press the SOURCE button several 2 dial to confirm.
times in succession and select "USB"
to play it.
3 Press one of the buttons to select a

track on the USB memory stick. 3 Select "USB" and press the dial to
confirm.
Press the LIST button to display the
list of folders on the MP3 USB memory
stick. USB
To eject the USB memory stick, use the short-cut menu (press OK) 4 Select "Copy USB to jukebox" and
or press the MENU button, select "Audio functions", "USB", then press the dial to confirm.
select "Eject USB".
The play and display of an MP3 compilation may depend on the file Copy USB to jukebox
format used.
5 Select "Complete disc" to copy the

entire USB memory stick and press the
In order to be read, the USB memory stick must be formatted dial to confirm.
FAT 16 or 32. The player only reads USB memory sticks.
Complete disc
254

06
COPYING A CD ONTO THE HARD DISK
1 The "Auto creation" tab automatically copies the CD by default into

Insert an audio CD or an MP3 an album of the type "album n°...".
compilation and press the MENU
button.
Select the letters one by one and
select "OK" to confirm.
2 Select "Audio functions" then select 6
CD and press the dial to confirm. OK
Audio functions
The audio or MP3 CD is copied onto the hard disk. Copying
may take up to 20 minutes depending on the length the CD.
Select "Copy CD to jukebox" and press While copying is in progress, it is not possible to listen to albums
3 previously copied to the hard disk or to CDs.
the dial to confirm.
Copy CD to jukebox If it is not an MP3 CD, the Jukebox automatically compresses the
CD in MP3 format. The compression may take approximately
20 minutes depending on the length the CD. During this
compression phase, it is possible to listen to the CD or to albums
4 Select "Complete CD" to copy the previously copied to the hard disk.
entire CD and press the dial to confirm.
Complete CD A long press on the SOURCE button starts copying of the CD.
To stop the copy, repeat points 2 and 3.

5 Select "Stop copy" and press the dial to It is not possible to copy files from the Jukebox to a CD.
confirm. The "Stop the CD copy" action does not delete the files which have
Stop copy already been transferred onto the jukebox hard disk.
255

06 AUDIO/VIDEO
LISTENING TO THE JUKEBOX RENAMING AN ALBUM
1 Press the SOURCE button several 1

times in succession and select the
"Jukebox" function. Press the MENU button.
Jukebox
2 2 Select "Audio functions" and press the

dial to confirm.
Press the LIST button.
3 3 Select the "Jukebox" function and

press the dial to confirm.
Turn the dial to select the files.
Jukebox
4
Select the "Jukebox management"
function and press the dial to confirm.
Press the ESC button to return to the first file level.
Jukebox management
256

06 AUDIO/VIDEO
5 8
Select the album to be renamed and confirm.
OK
6 Select the "Rename" tab and press the
dial to confirm.
Rename
To rename the tracks of an album, follow the same procedure,
selecting the tracks to be renamed.
Use the ESC button to exit from the list of tracks.
7
Turn the dial and select the letters of
the album title one by one confirming
each time by pressing the dial.
Select the "Delete" function to delete an album or a

track from the Jukebox.
Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the letters of the album title
one by one.
Delete
257

06 AUDIO/VIDEO
USING THE AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX)
AUDIO (JACK/RCA) CABLE NOT SUPPLIED
Press the MENU button then select the "Configuration" function,

then "Sounds", then "Activate auxiliary source" to activate the
NaviDrive audio/telephone auxiliary input.
1
Connect the portable device
(MP3 player…) to the audio
sockets (white and red, RCA
type) located in the glovebox
using a suitable audio cable
(JACK or RCA).
Press the SOURCE button several

times in succession and select AUX.
Display and control is on the portable device.
It is not possible to copy the files onto the hard disk via the auxiliary
input.
258

06 AUDIO/VIDEO
You can connect video equipment (camcorder, digital camera, DVD player...)
VIDEO MENU to the three audio/video sockets, located in the glove box.
1 6 Turn the dial and select the "Video

After connecting the video equipment, parameters" function to set the display
press the MENU button. format, the brightness, the contrast
and the colours.
Turn the dial and select the "Video"

2 function. Video parameters
3 Press the dial to confirm the selection.

Turn the dial and select the "Activate

4 video mode" function to activate/ Pressing the DARK button disconnects display of the video.
deactivate the video.
Activate video mode
Pressing the SOURCE button several times in succession permits
the selection of an audio source other than that of the video.
5
Videos can only be displayed when stationary.
259

07 INTERNAL TELEPHONE
INSTALLING YOUR SIM CARD
(NOT SUPPLIED)
ENTERING THE PIN CODE
1 1
Enter the PIN code on the keypad.
Open the holder by pressing the button
using the tip of a pen.
PIN code
2 2
Install the SIM card

in the holder and Confirm the PIN code by pressing the
then insert it in the # button.
slot.
3
To remove the SIM card, repeat step 1.
When entering your PIN code, tick the "Store PIN" tab to gain
access to the telephone without having to enter this code when it is
used subsequently.
Your SIM card must be installed and removed with the NaviDrive
audio and telematics system switched off and the ignition off.
260

07 BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
The services offered by the telephone depend on the network, the SIM
CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used. Refer to your
telephone's manual and your operator to check which services you have
TELEPHONE access to. A list of mobile telephones which offer the best range of services
is available from dealers.
For reasons of safety, the driver should only carry out operations Select "Bluetooth activation mode",
which require prolonged attention when the vehicle is stationary then "Activated and visible". Press the
(pairing the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the hands-free kit). dial to confirm each operation.
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function. To find and change the name of the CITROËN audio/telephone,
repeat step 2 then select "Change the name of the audio/
The last telephone connected is reconnected telephone".
automatically.
2 4
Press the MENU button, select On yyour telephone,

p , select the name of
"Telematics", then "Bluetooth
the CITROËN audio/telephone. Enter the
functions". Press the dial to confirm
authentication code (0000 by default).
each operation.
261

CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH
TELEPHONE
Once the telephone has been connected, the system can

synchronise the address book and the call list. Repeat step 2
To change the authentication code, repeat step 2 then select then select "Phone book synchronisation mode". Select the
"Authentication code" and save the code of your choice. synchronisation of your choice and press the dial to confirm.
The synchronisation may take a few minutes.
To change the telephone connected, repeat step 2 then select "List

of matched peripheral equipment" and press OK to confirm. The
list of previously connected telephones (10 maximum) appears. The call list consists of calls made from the vehicle's telephone only.
Select the telephone of your choice, confirm, then select "Connect"
and press the dial to confirm.
262

07 USING THE TELEPHONE To select the telephone used, press MENU, then select "Telematics", then
"Bluetooth functions", then "Bluetooth activation mode". Then select:
- "Deactivated": to use the internal telephone,
- "Activated and visible": to use the Bluetooth telephone, visible to all
telephones,
CALLING A CONTACT - "Activated and not visible": to use the Bluetooth telephone, not visible
to other telephones, it is not possible to match a new telephone.
1 5
Press the PICK UP button to display Press the PICK UP button to call the
the telephone short-cut menu. number dialled.
6 Press the HANG UP button to end the

Select "Call list" or "Phone book" and press "OK". Select the call.
number required and confirm to make the call.
ACCEPTING OR REJECTING A CALL

2 Turn the dial and select the "Dial"
function.
Dial Press the PICK UP button to accept

a call.
3
Press the HANG UP button to reject
a call.
4
Dial the telephone number of your
contact using the alphanumeric Press the end of the steering wheel stalk for more
keypad. than 2 seconds to access the telephone menu: calls
log, directory, voice mailbox.
263

08 CONFIGURATION
The "Configuration" function gives access to the colour, brightness and
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME units settings and to voice commands.
This adjustment must be carried out whenever the battery has 5

been disconnected.
1
6 Turn the dial and select the "Set date

and time" function.
2 Turn the dial and select the
"Configuration" function.
Set date and time
3 Press the dial to confirm the selection.

8 Adjust the settings one by one

4 Turn the dial and select the "Display confirming by pressing the dial. Next
configuration" function. select the "OK" tab on the screen then
confirm.
Display configuration OK
264

09 SCREEN MENU MAP
around current place previous destinations
4
5
order/delete journey legs

3
divert route
1
MAIN FUNCTION 3
chosen destination
3
OPTION A
2
1
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE 2
GUIDANCE OPTIONS
option A1
3
define calculation criteria
SELECT DESTINATION 3
2 option A2
3
fastest
enter an address 4
3 OPTION B...
2
shortest
country: 4
4
town: search by name distance/time

4
4 5
road: GPS coordinates with tolls

4
4 3
N°/_: directory with ferry

4 4
3
curr. loc previous destinations traffic info

4 3 4
store JOURNEY LEGS AND ROUTE set speech synthesis

4 2 3
POI add a stage activate/deactivate road names

4 3 3
near enter an address delete last destinations

5 3
4
on the route directory STOP/RESUME GUIDANCE

5
4 2
265

09 SCREEN MENU MAP
supermarkets, shopping stations, bus stations
4 4
1
MAP 3
culture, tourism and shows 4
vehicle rental
culture and museums lay-bys, car parks

MAP ORIENTATION 4 4
2
casinos and nightlife service stations, garages

vehicle direction 4
4
3
cinemas and theatres DISPLAY MAP

north direction 4
2
3
full screen map
3D view tourism 3
4
3
map in window
MAP DETAILS shows and exhibitions 3
4
2
MOVE THE MAP/FOLLOW VEHICLE
administration and safety sports and open air centres 2
3 3
MAP DATABASE DESCRIPTION
town halls, town centre sports centres 2
4 4
universities, colleges golf courses

4 4
4
hospitals 4
skating rinks, bowling alleys
1
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
hotels, restaurants and shops winter sports resorts
3
4 READ MESSAGES
2
hotels parks, gardens

4
4 FILTER TRAFFIC INFORMATION
2
restaurants theme parks geographic filter

4
4 3
vineyards transport and automobile store all messages

3
4 3
business centres airports, ports store messages

4
4 3
266

09 SCREEN MENU MAP
SELECT TMC STATION CD
around the vehicle 2 2
4
automatic TMC copy CD to Jukebox
on the route 3 3
4
manual TMC copy complete CD
road information 3 4
3
list of TMC stations multiple selection
traffic information 3 4
4
current album
road closure 4
4
current track
size limit 1
AUDIO FUNCTIONS 4
4
eject CD
road condition RADIO FAVOURITES 3
4 2
USB
weather and visibility enter a frequency 2
4 3
copy USB to Jukebox
3
urban/city information activate/deactivate RDS mode
3 3
complete disc
4
parking activate/deactivate regional mode
4 3
multiple selection
4
public transport display/hide radio text
4 3
current album
4
demonstrations CD, USB, JUKEBOX FAVOURITES
4 2
current track
4
CONFIGURE MESSAGE ANNOUNCEMENT activate/deactivate Introscan (SCN)
2 3
eject USB
3
read messages activate/deactivate Random mode (RDM)
3 3
JUKEBOX
2
new message display activate/deactivate Repeat (RPT)
3
3 jukebox management
3
activate/deactivate display of CD info
3
267

09 SCREEN MENU MAP
jukebox configuration CITROËN assistance send one record
3 4 5
hi-fi (320 kbps) CITROËN service receive by infrared

4 4 5
high (192 kbps) messages received exchange with SIM card

4 4 4
normal (128 kbps) DIRECTORY send all records to SIM

4 2 5
playlist management managing directory files send one record to SIM

3 3 5
delete jukebox data consult or modify a file receive all SIM files
3 4 5
Jukebox status add a file receive a SIM file

3 4 5
delete a file exchange with Bluetooth

4 4
delete all files TEXT MESSAGES (SMS)

1
TELEMATICS 4 2
configure directory read received text messages

3 3
CALL
2
select a directory send a text message
4 3
call list
3
name directory write a text message
4 3
dial
3
select starting directory delete list of text messages
4 3
directory
3
file transfer TELEPHONE FUNCTIONS
3 2
mailbox
3
exchange by infrared network
4 3
services
3
send all records network search mode
5 4
customer contact centre
4
268

09 SCREEN MENU MAP
automatic mode text message ring
5 6
5
manual mode
3
calls diversion to mailbox n°
1
CONFIGURATION
networks available delete calls log
4 3 DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
2
length of calls BLUETOOTH FUNCTIONS

3 2 choose colour
3
reset activation mode adjust luminosity

4 3
3
manage PIN code deactivated set date and time

3 4
3
activate/deactivate activated and visible select units

4 4
3
save PIN code activated and not visible SOUND

4 4
2
modify PIN code list of matched peripheral equipment voice commands setting
4 3 3
call options change the name of the audio/telephone speech synthesis setting
3 3 3
configure calls authentication code guidance instructions volume

4 3 4
display my number phone book synchronisation mode other message volume

5 3 4
automatic reply after x ring(s) no synchronisation select female/male voice

5 4 4
ring options view telephone phone book activate/deactivate auxiliary source

4 4 3
for voice calls view SIM card phone book SELECT LANGUAGE
5 4 2
for text messages (SMS) view all phone books DEFINE VEHICLE PARAMETERS*
5 4 2
* The parameters vary according to vehicle. 269

09 SCREEN MENU MAP
Press the MENU button for more Press the Music button several times
than 2 seconds to access the in succession to access the following
following flow chart. settings.
1
VIDEO
VOICE COMMANDS LIST MUSICAL AMBIENCE
ACTIVATE VIDEO MODE 1
2
2
VIDEO PARAMETERS
1
AUDIO/TELEPHONE BASS
display formats DIAGNOSTICS

3
GPS COVERAGE TREBLE
2
adjust luminosity
3
UNIT BACKUP POWER
set colours 2
3 LOUDNESS CORRECTION
set contrasts UNIT DESCRIPTION
3 2
FR - RR BALANCE
1
NAVIGATION
DEMONSTRATION
LH - RH BALANCE
1
VEHICLE DIAGNOSTICS SERVICES
1
CONFIGURATION
ALERT LOG AUTO VOLUME CORRECTION
2
STATUS OF FUNCTIONS*
2
RESET TYRE PRESS. DETEC. SYS.*

2
Each audio source (Radio, CD, MP3,

Jukebox) has its own separate settings.
* The parameters vary according to the vehicle. Display short cuts version 8.2
270

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
The table below groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions.
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
sound quality between Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the different audio which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
sources (radio, CD...). CD...). the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the musical ambience "None" and
set the loudness correction to the "Active" position
in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio
mode.
The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection
automatically or is not audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. system which is not recognised by the audio
played by the player. equipment.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the Audio section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to inadequate quality, certain recorded
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The CD player sound is The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
poor. conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
271

The stored stations do An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the BAND AST button to return to the
not function (no sound, waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the
87.5 Mhz is displayed...) stations are stored.
The quality of reception The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened Activate the RDS function to enable the system
of the radio station to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the to check whether there is a more powerful
listened to gradually vehicle is travelling. transmitter in the geographical area.
deteriorates or the stored
stations do not function The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is reception, including in RDS mode. a failure of the audio equipment.
displayed...).
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Sound cut-outs of 1 to During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is
2 seconds in radio mode. permitting better reception of the station. too frequent and always on the same route.
With the engine off, When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating time Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
the audio equipment depends on the battery charge. charge.
switches off after a few The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode
minutes of use. and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
TRAFFIC INFO is On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the Wait until the traffic information is being received
selected. However, traffic information. correctly (displaying of the traffic information
certain traffic jams symbols on the map).
along the route are not
indicated in real time. In certain countries, only major routes (motorways, ...) are listed for the This phenomenon is normal. The system is
traffic information. dependent on the traffic information available.
The time taken to The performance of the system may slow down temporarily if a CD is Wait until the CD has been copied or stop the
calculate a route being copied onto the Jukebox at the same time as a route is being copying before starting the guidance function.
sometimes seems longer calculated.
than usual.
272

ANSWER SOLUTION
Does the emergency call Certain national regulations impose the presence of a SIM card in order Insert a valid SIM card in the slot on the system.
function work without a to make an emergency call.
SIM card?
The altitude is not On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to Wait until the system has started up completely.
displayed. receive more than 4 satellites correctly. Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least
4 satellites (long press on the MENU button, then
select AUDIO/TELEPHONE DIAGNOSTICS, then
GPS COVERAGE).
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel, ...) or the weather, This phenomenon is normal. The system is
the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary. dependent on the conditions of reception of the
GPS signal.
My SIM card is not The system accepts 3.3 V SIM cards, the old 5 V and 1.8 V SIM cards Contact your telephone operator.
recognised. are not recognised.
The route is not The exclusion criteria may conflict with the current location (exclusion of Check the exclusion criteria.
calculated successfully. toll roads on a motorway with tolls).
There is a long wait after When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of This phenomenon is normal.
inserting a CD. data (folder, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few seconds.
I cannot connect my The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the equipment - Check that your telephone's Bluetooth
Bluetooth telephone. may not be visible. function is switched on.
- Check that your telephone is visible.
273

274

MyWay
MULTIMEDIA AUDIO SYSTEM/BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
SATELLITE NAVIGATION SYSTEM FOR EUROPE BY SD CARD
CONTENTS
The MyWay is protected in such a way that it will only
operate in your vehicle. 01 First steps p. 276
02 Steering mounted controls p. 277
03 General operation p. 278
04 Navigation - Guidance p. 281
For safety reasons, the driver must carry out operations
which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is
05 Traffic information p. 289
stationary. 06 Radio p. 291
discharging of the battery, the MyWay switches off 07 Music media players p. 292
following the activation of the Energy Economy mode.
08 Bluetooth telephone p. 295
09 Configuration p. 298
10 Screen menu map p. 299
Certain functions described in this handbook will Frequently asked questions p. 303
become available during the year.
275

01
Engine not running:
- Short press: on/off. Long press: audio settings: front/rear Selection dial for the
- Long press: pause with CD fader, left/right balance, bass/treble, screen display and
play, mute for radio. musical ambience, loudness, automatic according to the menu.
volume, reinitialise settings. Access to the
Engine running: Short press: contextual "SETUP" menu.
- Short press: pause with CD Access to the menu or confirm. Long press: GPS
play, mute for radio. Radio Menu. Access to the Long press: contextual coverage and Access to the Phone
- Long press: reinitialise the Display the list of Music Menu. menu specific to the list demonstration Menu. Display the list of
system. stations. Display tracks. displayed. mode. calls.
Eject CD.
Adjust volume (each source
is independent, including Select previous/next radio
navigation messages and station.
alerts). Select previous CD or MP3
track.
Select previous/next line in
a list.
Buttons 1 to 6:
Select a pre-set radio Select previous/next radio
station. station in the list.
Long press: pre-set the Select previous/next MP3
current station. folder.
Select previous/next page in
a list.
Access to the "MODE" menu. Access to the Reader for Access to the ESC: abandon current operation.
Select successive display of: Navigation navigation SD Traffic Menu.
Menu. Display card only. Display the current
Radio, Map, NAV (if navigation in progress), recent traffic alerts.
Telephone (if conversation in progress), Trip destinations.
computer.
Long press: Black screen (DARK).
276

02 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
1 5 1 1 5
3
4
4 4
2
3 3
2 2
1. Volume increase. 1. Press. 1. Short press: provides access to the menu

2. Volume decrease. Repeat the current spoken navigation according to the display on the screen.
3. Successive presses mute/restore the sound. instruction. 2. Successive presses: provides access
2. Short press to make a telephone call. according to the current display on the
4. Rotation - associated with a pop-up. screen.
Radio - access the 6 stored stations: next or Pick up/Hang up.
MAP/NAV (if navigation is in progress), TEL
previous. Access the telephone menu. (if a conversation is in progress), RADIO or
Music players: previous/next track. Display the call list. MEDIA in progress, Trip computer.
5. Radio: next station. Long press to reject an incoming call. Long press: switch to black screen - Dark
Music players: next track. 3. Personalisation. (night driving).
Short press to confirm the choice made Touching a control restores the display.
using the dial. 3. ESC: abandon the current operation.
4. Rotation. 4. Rotation: selects the access to the short-cut
Scroll through the call list in the phone book. menus according to the current display.
Personalisation selection. 5. Confirms the choice displayed on the
screen.
277

03 GENERAL OPERATION
Press the MODE button several times in succession for access to the following menus:
RADIO/MUSIC MEDIA
PLAYERS
FULL SCREEN MAP
TELEPHONE
(If a conversation is in progress)
NAVIGATION
(If guidance is in progress)
TRIP COMPUTER
SETUP:
system language*, date and time*, display,
TRAFFIC:
vehicle settings*, unit and system settings, "Demo
mode". TMC information and messages.
* Available according to model.
For cleaning the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the
(spectacles cloth) is recommended, with no additional product. "Screen menu map" section.
278

03
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT
NAVIGATION (IF GUIDANCE IS IN TRIP COMPUTER:
A press on the OK dial gives access to PROGRESS):
short-cut menus according to the display Abort guidance Alert log
on the screen. 1 1
Repeat advice Status of functions

1 1
Block road
1
Route info
1
TELEPHONE:
Show destination
2
End call
1
Trip info
2
Hold call
1
Route type
3
Dial
1
Avoid
3
DTMF-Tones
1
Satellites
3
Private mode
1
Zoom/Scroll
2
Micro off
1
Voice advice
1
Route options
1
279

03 GENERAL OPERATION
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS: RADIO: FULL SCREEN MAP:
Traffic info (TA) In FM mode Abort guidance/Resume guidance

1
1 1
Play options Traffic info (TA) Set destination

1
2 1
Normal order RDS POIs nearby

2
2 1
Random track Radiotext Position info

2
2 1
Repeat folder Regional prog. Map settings

2
2 1
Scan AM Zoom/Scroll
2
2 1
Select music In AM mode

1
1
TA
2
Refresh AM list
2
FM
2
280

Insert the SD card in the front panel reader and leave it there to use the
Navigation functions.
SELECTING A DESTINATION The navigation SD card data must not be modified.
Map data updates are available from CITROËN dealers.
1 4
Select the "Address input" function
Press the NAV button.
Address input
5
Once the country has been selected,
The list of the last 20 destinations appears under the Navigation turn the dial and select the town
Menu function. function. Press the dial to confirm.
2 Press the NAV button again or select 6

the Navigation Menu function and Select the letters of the town one
press the dial to confirm. by one confirming each time by
pressing the dial.
Navigation Menu
3
Select the "Destination input"
function and press the dial to A pre-set list (by entering the first few letters) of the towns in the
confirm. country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on the virtual
keypad.
Destination input
281

7 9
Turn the dial and select OK. Then select "Start route guidance"
Press the dial to confirm. and the press the dial to confirm.
To speed up the process, the post code can be entered directly Start route guidance
after selecting the "Postal code" function.
Use the virtual keypad to enter the letters and digits.
Select the route type:

8 "Fast route", "Short route" or "Optimized route" and press the dial
Repeat steps 5 to 7 for the "Street" to confirm.
and "House number" functions. It is also possible to select a destination via "Choose from address
book" or "Choose from last destinations".
Choose from address book Choose from last destinations

Select the "Save to address book" function to record the address
entered in a directory file. Press the dial to confirm the selection.
MyWay allows up to 500 contact files to be recorded. Map settings
You can zoom in/zoom out on the map using the dial.
It is possible to move the map or select its orientation via the short-
cut menu of the FULL SCREEN MAP.
During guidance, pressing this button Press MODE until the map is displayed full screen. Press the dial
repeats the last guidance instruction. then select "Map settings". Select "2.5D Map" or "2D Map" and in
the latter case, select "North Up" or "Heading Up".
To clear a destination; from steps 1 to 3, select "Choose from last destinations".

A long press on one of the destinations displays a list of actions from which you can select:
Delete entry
Delete list
282

SETTING AND NAVIGATING TO MY
"HOME ADDRESS"
4
To be set as the "Home address", an address must first be Select your home address and confirm.
entered in the address book, for example from "Destination Then select "Edit entry" and confirm.
input"/"Address input" then "Save to address book".
Edit entry
1
Press the NAV button twice to display
the Navigation Menu.
5
Navigation Menu
Select "Set as home address" and
confirm to save.
2
Select "Destination input" and confirm. Set as "Home address"
Then select "Choose from address
book" and confirm.
Destination input
3 To start navigation towards "Home address", press NAV twice

Select "Address book" and confirm. to display the Navigation Menu, select "Destination input" and
Then select "Search entry (complete confirm.
address book)" and confirm. Then select "Navigate HOME" and confirm to start guidance.
Address book
283

The route selected by the MyWay system depends directly on the route
ROUTE OPTIONS options.
Changing these options may change the route completely.
1 5
Select the "Route dynamics"
function.
Press the NAV button. This function gives access to the
"Traffic independent" or "Semi-
dynamic" options.
Route dynamics
2 Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
6
Select the "Avoidance criteria"
function. This function provides
Navigation Menu access to the AVOID options
(motorways, toll roads, ferries).
3
Select the "Route options" function
and press the dial to confirm. Avoidance criteria
Route options
7
Turn the dial and select the
"Recalculate" function to take into
4 Select the "Route type" function account the route options selected.
and press the dial to confirm. This Press the dial to confirm.
function allows you to change the
route type.
Recalculate
Route type
284

Stopovers can be added to the route once the destination has been
ADDING A STOPOVER selected.
1 5
Enter a new address, for example.
Address input
2 6
Press the NAV button again or select Once the new address has been
the Navigation Menu function and entered, select OK and press the dial
press the dial to confirm. to confirm.
Navigation Menu OK
3 7
Select the "Stopovers" function and Select "Recalculate" and press the
press the dial to confirm. dial to confirm.
Stopovers Recalculate
4
Select the "Add stopover" function
(5 stopovers maximum) and press The stopover must be completed or deleted in order for the
the dial to confirm. guidance to continue to the next destination. Otherwise, the
MyWay will always return you to the previous stopover.
Add stopover
285

SEARCHING FOR POINTS OF INTEREST The points of interest (POI) indicate all of the service locations in the
(POI) vicinity (hotels, various businesses, airports...).
1 6 Select the "POI in city" function to

search for POIs in the city required.
Press the NAV button. Select the country then enter the
name of the city using the virtual
keypad.
POI in city
the Navigation Menu function and
Navigation Menu A list of cities present in the country selected can be accessed via
the LIST button on the virtual keypad.
3 Select the "POI search" function and
POI search 7
Select the "POI in country" function
to search for POIs in the country
required.
4 Select the "POI nearby" function to
search for POIs around the vehicle. POI in country
POI nearby
8
5 Select the "POI near destination" Select the "POI near route" function
function to search for POIs near the to search for POIs near the route.
point of arrival of the route.
POI near route
POI near destination
286

This icon appears when several POIs are grouped
04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon
shows details of the POIs.
LIST OF PRINCIPAL POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)

Service station Airport Cinema
LPG station Railway station Theme parks
Garage Bus station Hospital
CITROËN Port Pharmacy
Motor racing circuit Industrial estate Police station
Covered car park Supermarket School
Car park Bank Post office
Rest area Vending machine Museum
Hotel Tennis court Tourist information
Restaurant Swimming pool Automatic speed camera*
Refreshment area Golf course Red light camera*
Picnic area Winter sports resort Risk area*
Cafeteria Theatre
* According to availability in the country.
287

To activate or deactivate vocal guidance, with guidance active and
the map displayed in the screen, press the dial and then select or
NAVIGATION SETTINGS deselect "Voice advice".
Voice advice
1 The adjustment of the volume for the Risk Areas POIs is used only
during the transmission of an alert.
5 Select the "POI categories on Map"
function to select the POIs to be
displayed on the map by default.
the Navigation Menu function and POI categories on Map
6
Navigation Menu Select "Set parameters for risk
areas" for access to the "Display
on map", "Visual alert" and "Sound
3 alert" functions.
Select the "Settings" function and
Set parameters for risk areas
Settings
UPDATING POIs
4 Select the "Navi volume" function
and turn the dial to set the volume
of each voice synthesiser (traffic
information, alert messages…). The detailed procedure for updating POIs is available at the
following internet address: citroen.navigation.com.
This requires an SDHC (High Capacity) compatible reader.
Navi volume
288

05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages contain information on
traffic and weather conditions, received in real time and transmitted to
the driver in the form of audible announcements and symbols on the
navigation map.
CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AND The navigation system can then suggest an alternative route to avoid a
traffic problem.
DISPLAY OF TMC MESSAGES
1 4 Select the "Geo. Filter" function and

Press the TRAFFIC button. press the dial to confirm.
Geo. Filter
5
The list of TMC messages appears under the Traffic Menu sorted Then select the radius of the filter in
in order of proximity. miles (km) required in accordance
with the route, press the dial to
confirm.
When all of the messages on the
2 Press the TRAFFIC button again or route are selected, the addition of a
select the Traffic Menu function and geographical filter is recommended
press the dial to confirm. (within a radius of 3 miles (5 km) for
example) to reduce the number of
Traffic Menu messages displayed on the map.
The geographical filter follows the
movement of the vehicle.
3 Select the filter of your choice:
Messages on route
All warning messages
The filters are independent and their results are cumulative.
Only warnings on route We recommend a filter on the route and a filter around the vehicle of:
All messages - 2 miles (3 km) or 3 miles (5 km) for a region with heavy traffic,
- 6 miles (10 km) for a region with normal traffic,
The messages appear on the map
and on the list. - 30 miles (50 km) for long journeys (motorway).
To exit, press ESC.
289

PRINCIPAL TMC SYMBOLS RECEIVING TA MESSAGES
1 Black and blue triangle: general information, for example: - the station transmits TA messages.
- the station does not transmit TA messages.
- TA messages are not activated.
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert

messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a
radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic
report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the
message.
2 Red and yellow triangle: traffic information, for example:
1
With the current audio source
displayed on the screen, press the
dial.
2
The shortcut menu for the source appears and gives access to:
TA
3
Select Traffic Announcements (TA)
and press the dial to confirm and go
to the associated settings.
290

The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...)
06 RADIO may interfere with the reception, including in RDS following mode. This
phenomenon is a normal result of the way in which radio waves are
transmitted and does not in any way indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
SELECTING A STATION RDS - REGIONAL MODE
1 1
Press the RADIO button to display When the current radio station is
the list of stations received locally displayed on the screen, press the
sorted in alphabetical order. dial.
Select the station required by turning
the dial and press to confirm.
2 The radio source short-cuts menu appears and provides access to
the following short-cuts:
TA
While listening to the radio, press one of the RDS

buttons to select the previous or next station on Radiotext
the list.
Regional prog.
AM
3
A long press of one of the buttons starts the Select the function required and
automatic search for a station with a lower or press the dial to confirm to gain
higher frequency. access to the corresponding settings.
RDS, if displayed, allows you to continue listening to the same

Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad for more than station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However,
2 seconds to store the current station. in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be
Press the button on the numeric keypad to recall the stored radio assured throughout the entire country as radio stations do not
station. cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of
the station during a journey.
291

07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
CD, MP3/WMA CD
INFORMATION AND ADVICE
The MyWay will only play audio files with the extension ".mp3"
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1, 2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3 with a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbps and the extension
and the WMA format, an abbreviation of Windows Media Audio and ".wma" with a speed of between 5 Kbps and 384 Kbps.
the property of Microsoft, are audio compression standards which
permit the recording of several tens of music files on a single disc. It also supports the VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other type of file (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when

recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet
standard.
If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played
correctly. It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, without
using special characters (e.g.: " ? ; ù) to avoid any play or display
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always problems.
used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible
(4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
recommended.
292

SELECTING/PLAYING MUSIC
CD, MP3/WMA CD
1 4
Select the music source required:
Press the MUSIC button. CD, MP3/WMA CD. Press the dial to
confirm. Play begins.
The list of tracks or MP3/WMA files appears under Music Menu. Press the up or down button to select
the next/previous folder.
2 Press the MUSIC button again or 6

Press one of the buttons to select a
select the Music Menu function and music track.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or rewind play.
Music Menu
3
Select the "Select music" function
and press the dial to confirm. The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may
depend on the recording programme and/or the settings used.
We recommend the ISO 9660 file standard.
Select music
293

USING THE EXTERNAL INPUT (AUX)
JACK/USB AUDIO CABLE NOT SUPPLIED
1
Connect the portable device (MP3/
WMA player…) to the auxiliary JACK
socket or to the USB port, using a
suitable audio cable.
2 Press the MUSIC button then

press it again or select the Music
Menu function and press the dial to
confirm.
Music Menu
3 Select the "External device" function

and press the dial to activate it.
External device
4
Select the AUX music source and
press the dial to confirm. Play begins
automatically.
The display and management of the controls is via the portable

device.
294

* The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the
PAIRING A TELEPHONE compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the telephone
manual and with your network provider for details of the services
FIRST CONNECTION available to you.
3 For a first connection, select

For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention "Search phone" and press the dial to
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth confirm. Then select the name of the
mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the MyWay must be telephone.
carried out with the vehicle stationary. The ignition must be on.
Search phone
4 Enter the authentication code on the telephone.

Visit www.citroen.co.uk for more information (compatibility, more The code to be entered is displayed on the screen
help, ...). of the system.
Some telephones offer automatic reconnection of
the telephone every time the ignition is switched on.
A message confirms the pairing.
1
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function Pairing can also be started from the telephone (refer to the
and ensure that it is "visible to all" (refer to the telephone instructions).
telephone instructions).
Once the telephone has been connected, MyWay can synchronise
the address book and the call list. This synchronisation may take a
few minutes*.
2
To change the telephone connected,
Press the PHONE button. press the PHONE button, then select
Phone Menu and press the dial to
confirm.
295

* The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the telephone
CONNECTING A TELEPHONE manual and with your network provider for details of the services
available to you.
For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention

on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth Once the telephone has been connected, MyWay can synchronise
mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the MyWay must be the address book and the call list. This synchronisation may take a
carried out with the vehicle stationary. The ignition must be on. few minutes*.
Visit www.citroen.co.uk for more information (compatibility, more 1

help, ...). When a telephone is already
connected, to change it press the
PHONE button, then select Phone
1 Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function Menu and press the dial to confirm.
and ensure that it is "visible to all" (refer to the
telephone instructions).
The last telephone connected is reconnected
automatically. 2
A message confirms the connection. Select "Connect phone". Select the
telephone and press to confirm.
2
Connect phone
Press the PHONE button.
The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears

on the multifunction screen. Select the telephone required for a
new connection.
296

RECEIVING A CALL MAKING A CALL
1 1
Press the PHONE button.
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed
display on the multifunction screen.
The list of the last 20 calls made and received in the vehicle
appears under Phone Menu. You can select a number and press
the dial to make the call.
2 Select the Phone Menu function and
2
to refuse and confirm by pressing press the dial to confirm.
the dial.
Phone Menu
Yes No Select "Dial number", then dial the
telephone number using the virtual
keypad.
3 Dial number
To hang up, press the PHONE button
or press the dial and select "End call"
then confirm by pressing the dial. It is also possible to select a number from the address book. You
can select "Dial from address book". The MyWay can record up to
1 000 entries (telephone numbers).
End call Press the end of the steering mounted control for more than two
seconds to gain access to the address book.
It is possible to make a call directly from the telephone; park the

A short press on the steering mounted vehicle as a safety measure.
TEL button accepts the incoming call
or ends the call in progress. A long To delete a number, press the PHONE button then press and hold
press rejects the incoming call. on a call number to display a list of actions including:
Delete entry
Delete list
297

09 CONFIGURATION
The SETUP function gives access to the following options: System
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME language, Date & Time, Display (Brightness, Colour, Map colour), Vehicle,
Units, System.
These settings must be entered again if the battery has been 5

disconnected.
Select the "Date format" function and

1 press the dial to confirm.
Press the SETUP button.
2 6
Select the "Date & Time" function
Confirm the format required using
the dial.
Date & Time Select the "Time format" function and
3 Select the "Set date & time" function

Confirm the format required using the dial.

Set date & time
Pressing the SETUP button for more than 2 seconds gives
access to:
4 Description of the unit
Adjust the settings one by one using
the direction arrows and confirm by GPS coverage
means of the dial.
Demo mode
298

10 SCREEN MENU MAP
Within 6 miles (10 km) Vocal
1
MAIN FUNCTION 3 4
Within 30 miles (50 km) Loudness

3 3
OPTION A
2
Within 60 miles (100 km) Speed dependent volume
3 3
option A1
3
Reset sound settings
3
option A2
3
OPTION B...
2
1
"Music" Menu RADIO
Select music 1
"Radio" Menu
2
Sound settings Waveband

1
"Traffic" Menu 2 2
Balance/Fader FM
3
Messages on route 3
2
Bass/Treble AM
3
Only warnings on route 3
2
Equalizer Manual tune
2
All warning messages 3
2
Linear Sound settings
2
All messages 4
2
Classic Balance/Fader
3
Geo. Filter 4
2
Jazz Bass/Treble
3
Within 2 miles (3 km) 4
3
Rock/Pop Equalizer
3
Within 3 miles (5 km) 4
3
Techno Linear
4 4
299

Classic Start route guidance Rearrange route
4 4 3
Jazz Postal code Replace stopover

4 4 3
Rock/Pop Save to address book Delete stopover

4 4 3
Techno Intersection Recalculate

4
4 3
Vocal
4 City district Fast route
4 4
Loudness
3 Geo position Short route
4 4
Speed dependent volume
3
Map Optimized route
4 4
Reset sound settings
3
Navigate HOME POI search
3 2
Choose from address book POI nearby

3 3
Choose from last destinations POI near destination

1
"Navigation" Menu 3 3
TMC station information POI in city

3 3
Abort guidance/Resume guidance
2
Stopovers POI in country
Destination input 2 3
2
Add stopover POI near route
Enter new address 3 3
3
Country Address input Route options

4 2
4
City Navigate HOME Route type

4 4 3
Street Choose from address book Fast route

4 4 4
House number Choose from last destinations Short route

4 4 4
300

Optimized route
4
Route dynamics 1
"Phone" Menu 1
"SETUP" menu
3
Traffic independent System language*

4 2 2
Semi-dynamic Dial from address book Deutsch

4 2 3
Avoidance criteria Call lists English

3 2 3
Avoid motorways Connect phone Español

4 2 3
Avoid toll roads Search phone Français

4 3 3
Avoid ferries Phones connected Italiano

4 3 3
Recalculate Disconnect phone Nederlands

3 4 3
Settings Rename phone Polski

2 4 3
Navi volume Delete pairing Portuguese

3 4 3
POI categories on Map Delete all pairings Date & Time*

3 4 2
Set parameters for risk areas Show details Set date & time
3 4 3
Display on map Settings Date format

4 2 3
Visual alert Select ring tone Time format

4 3 3
Sound alert Phone/Ring tone volume

4 3
Enter mailbox number

3
* Available according to model.
301

Display Units
2 2
Brightness Temperature
3 3
Colour Celsius
3 4
Pop titanium Fahrenheit

4 4
Toffee Metric/Imperial
4 3
Blue steel Kilometres (Consumption: l/100)

4 4
Technogrey Kilometres (Consumption: km/l)

4 4
Dark blue Miles (Consumption: MPG)

4 4
Map colour System

3 2
Day mode for map Factory reset

4 3
Night mode for map Software version

4 3
Auto. Day/Night for map Automatic scrolling

4 3
Vehicle**
2
Vehicle information
3
Alert log
4
Status of functions
4
** The parameter settings vary according to vehicle.
302

the different audio which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
sources (radio, CD...). CD...). the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
position, select the Linear musical ambience and
mode.
The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any - Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
automatically or is not audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. right way up.
played by the player. The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not - Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
recognised by the audio equipment. be played if it is too damaged.
CD: consult the advice in the Audio section.
play DVDs.
- Because of their quality level, certain
writeable CDs will not be played by the audio
system.
poor. conditions.
an ambience.
303

not function (no sound, waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the
87.5 Mhz is displayed...). stations are stored.
The quality of reception The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened Activate the RDS function to enable the system
of the radio station to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the to check whether there is a more powerful
listened to gradually vehicle is travelling. transmitter in the geographical area.
stations do not function
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...). The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
reception, including in RDS mode. a failure of the audio equipment.
304

TA is selected. However, On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the Wait until the traffic information is being received
certain traffic jams traffic information. correctly (displaying of the traffic information
along the route are not symbols on the map).
indicated in real time.
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the This phenomenon is normal. The system is
traffic information. dependent on the traffic information available.
I receive a speed camera The system announces all speed cameras located in a conical zone Zoom the map to view the exact position of the
alert for a camera which forward of the vehicle. It may detect speed cameras on nearby or parallel speed camera.
is not on my route. roads.
The audible speed Audible alerts are not active. Activate audible alerts in Navigation Menu,
camera alert is not Settings, Set parameters for risk areas.
working.
The alert volume level is set to minimum. Increase the speed camera alert volume.
The altitude is not On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to Wait until the system has started up completely.
displayed. receive more than 3 satellites correctly. Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least
3 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then
select GPS coverage).
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, This phenomenon is normal. The system is
the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary. dependent on the conditions of reception of the
GPS signal.
The route is not The exclusion criteria may conflict with the current location (exclusion of Check the exclusion criteria.
calculated successfully. toll roads on a motorway with tolls).
305

There is a long waiting When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of This phenomenon is normal.
time after inserting a CD. data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few seconds.
I cannot connect my The telephone's Bluetooth function may be deactivated or the equipment - Check that your telephone's Bluetooth
Bluetooth telephone. may not be visible. function is activated.
- Check that your telephone is visible.
A telephone connected The volume level depends on both the system and the telephone. Increase the MyWay volume setting, possibly to
by Bluetooth is inaudible. maximum, and increase the telephone volume
level if necessary.
306

Audio System
AUDIO SYSTEM/BLUETOOTH
CONTENTS
01 First steps p. 308
Your Audio system is coded in such a way that it will
only operate in your vehicle. 02 Steering mounted controls p. 309
03 Main menu p. 310
04 Audio p. 311
05 USB Box p. 314
06 Bluetooth functions p. 317
07 Configuration p. 320
For safety reasons, the driver must carry out operations 08 Screen menu map p. 322
which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is
stationary. Frequently asked questions p. 327
discharging of the battery, the audio equipment may
switch off after a few minutes.
307

01 FIRST STEPS
2 9
3 4 5 6 7 8
1
11
10
15
5 14
4 13
3 12
2
1. On/Off and volume adjustment. 7. Display the list of local stations, the tracks on 12. Selection of lower/higher radio frequency.
2. CD eject. the CD or the MP3 folders. Selection of previous/next CD.
3. Selection of the display on the screen from 8. Abandon current operation. Selection of previous/next MP3 folder.
the modes: 9. TA (Traffic Announcement) function on/off. Selection of previous/next USB equipment
Audio (AUDIO), Trip Computer (TRIP) and Long press: access to the PTY (Types of radio folder/genre/artist/playlist.
Telephone (TEL) functions. programme) mode. 13. Display main menu.
4. Selection of source: 10. Confirmation. 14. Buttons 1 to 6:
radio, audio CD/MP3 CD, USB, auxiliary 11. Automatic search for a lower/higher frequency. Selection of a stored radio station.
connection, Streaming. Selection of previous/next CD, MP3 or USB track. Long press: storing of a station.
5. Selection of FM1, FM2, FMast and AM
wavebands. 15. The MUTE button cuts off or restores the sound.
6. Setting audio options: front/rear balance, left/
right balance, loudness, sound ambience.
308

02 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
1 5 1 1 5
4
4
2
3 3
2 2
1. Volume increase. If your vehicle is fitted with the Bluetooth system: 1. Displays the main screen.
2. Volume decrease. 1. Press: activation of telephone voice 2. Selection of the type of information displayed
3. Mute. recognition (if the telephone offers this on the right-hand side of the screen for the
function). monochrome screen A.
4. RADIO:
2. Press: displays the phone book, of the call 3. Abandon the operation in progress
selection of the previous or next stored list.
station. and return to the previous display.
CD/MP3/USB: 4. Navigation through the menus.
selection of the previous or next directory. 5. Confirmation of the function selected.
CD CHANGER: selection of the previous or If your vehicle is fitted with the Bluetooth
next CD. system: pick up an incoming call or hang up
a call which is in progress.
5. RADIO: automatic search for a higher
frequency.
CD/MP3/CD CHANGER/USB:
selection of the next track.
CD/MP3/CD CHANGER:
continuous press: fast forwards play.
309

03 MAIN MENU
TELEPHONE:
Bluetooth hands-free,
AUDIO FUNCTIONS: pairing, management
radio, CD, USB, options. of a call.
> MONOCHROME SCREEN C
TRIP COMPUTER: PERSONALISATION-

entering of distances, CONFIGURATION:
alerts, status of functions. vehicle parameters,
display, languages.
> MONOCHROME SCREEN A
For a detailed global view of the

menus available, refer to the
"Screen menu map" section.
310

The external environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, ...)
04 AUDIO may block reception, including in RDS mode. This is a normal effect of the
way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not indicate any failure
of the audio system.
RADIO
SELECTING A STATION
RDS
1 1
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select the SOURCE Press the MENU button. MENU
radio.
2
2 Select AUDIO FUNCTIONS then
Press the BAND AST button to select BAND press OK.
a waveband: FM1, FM2, FMast, AM.
AST
3
3 Select the FM WAVEBAND
Briefly press one of the buttons to
carry out an automatic search of the PREFERENCES function then press OK.
radio stations.
4
4 Select ACTIVATE RDS then press OK.
Press one of the buttons to carry out RDS appears on the screen.
a manual search up/down for radio
frequencies.
In radio mode, press OK directly to activate/deactivate RDS
mode.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to
display the list of stations received The RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to the same
locally (30 stations maximum). LIST
REFRESH
station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain
To update this list, press for more conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the
than two seconds. country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. Under conditions
of very weak reception, the system may change to a regional station.
311

04 AUDIO
CD
RECEIVING TA MESSAGES
PLAYING A CD
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert Insert circular compact discs only.
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs or CDs copied using a
radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic personal recorder, may cause faults which are no reflection on
report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is the quality of the original player.
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of Without pressing the EJECT button, insert a CD in the player, play
the message. begins automatically.
1 To play a disc which has already been

Press the TA button to activate or inserted, press the SOURCE button SOURCE
deactivate traffic messages. several times in succession and

select CD.
2
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of tracks on

the CD.
3
fast forward or backward.
312

04 AUDIO
MP3 CD MP3 CD
PLAYING AN MP3 COMPILATION INFORMATION AND ADVICE
Insert an MP3 compilation in the player.

The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1.2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3,
The audio equipment searches for all of the music tracks, which is an audio compression standard which permits the recording of
may take anything between a few seconds and several tens of several tens of music files on a single disc.
seconds, before play begins.
On a single disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 files
spread over 8 folder levels. However, it is advisable to keep to In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when
a limit of two levels to reduce the access time before the CD is recording, the ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet file format is
played. recommended.
While the CD is being played, the folder structure is not followed. If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played
All of the files are displayed on a single level. correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording format is always used
1 To play a disc which has already for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible
been inserted, press the SOURCE SOURCE (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.
button several times in succession In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet format is
and select CD. recommended.
2
Press one of the buttons to select a The audio system will only play files with the extension ".mp3" with
track on the CD. a sampling rate of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of file
(.wma, .mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of directories of It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters without using
the MP3 compilation. special characters (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying
problems.
3
fast forward or backward play. Empty CDs are not recognised and may damage the system.
313

05 USB BOX
The list of compatible
p equipment
q p and the compression rates supported
USING THE USB BOX are available from CITROËN dealers.
1 CONNECTING A USB MEMORY STICK
This unit consists of a USB port and an auxiliary

Jack socket*. The audio files are transmitted Connect the memory stick to the port, directly or
1 using a lead. If the audio equipment is switched
from a portable device - digital player or a USB
memory stick - to your Audio system and heard on, the USB source is detected as soon as it
via the vehicle's speakers. is connected. Play begins automatically after a
delay which depends on the capacity of the USB
memory stick.
The file formats supported are .mp3 (mpeg1 layer
3 only), .wma (standard 9 only, 128 kbits/sec
2 compression), .wav and .ogg.
USB memory stick (1.1, 1.2 and 2.0) or Apple® Certain playlist formats are supported (m3u, ...)
player of generation 5 or later:
On reconnection of the previous memory stick
- USB memory sticks should be formatted FAT used, play is resumed automatically with the last
or FAT 32 (NTFS not supported), track played.
- the Apple® player lead is essential,
- navigation through the file database is also
possible by means of the steering mounted
controls. The system puts together playlists (temporary memory) created
over a period which depends on the capacity of the USB device.
The other sources are available during this time.
The playlists are updated each time the ignition is switched off or
3 each time a USB memory stick is connected.
Other Apple® players of earlier generations and
players using the MTP protocol*: When connecting for the first time, the classification suggested
is by folder. When you reconnect, the classification selected
- play via Jack-Jack lead only (not supplied), previously is retained.
- navigation through the file database is from
the portable device.
* According to vehicle.
314

05 USB BOX
USING THE USB PORT
2 3 Press one of these buttons to gain

Press and hold LIST to display the access to the previous/next track on
different classifications. the classification list currently being
Select by Folder/Artist/Genre/Playlist, played.
press OK to select the classification Press and hold one of the buttons for
required, then press OK again to confirm. fast forward or backward play.
4 Press one of these buttons to gain

- by Folder: all folders containing audio access to the previous/next Genre,
files recognised on the peripheral Folder, Artist or Playlist on the
LIST
REFRESH
device. classification list currently being

- by Artist: all of the artist names played.
defined in the ID3 Tags, classified in
alphabetical order.
- by Genre: all of the genres defined in
the ID3 Tags. CONNECTING AN APPLE® PLAYER VIA THE USB PORT
- by Playlist: in accordance with the
playlists recorded on the USB device.
1 The lists available are Artist, Genre and Playlist (as defined in the
Apple® player).
Selection and Navigation are described in steps 1 to 4 above.
Press LIST briefly to display the
previously selected classification.
Navigate through the list using the left/ LIST
REFRESH
right and up/down buttons. Do not connect a hard disk or USB connection device other
than audio equipment to the USB port. This could damage your
Confirm the selection by pressing OK. installation.
315

05 USB BOX
USING THE AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX) ADJUSTING THE VOLUME OF
JACK socket or USB port (according to vehicle) THE AUXILIARY SOURCE
1
The auxiliary input, JACK or USB, allows the connection of
a portable device (MP3 player...).
First adjust the volume of your portable device.
Do not connect a device to both the JACK socket and the USB port
at the same time.
1 2
Connect the portable device (MP3

player…) to the JACK socket or to Then adjust the volume of your audio
the USB port, using a suitable cable system.
(not supplied).
Press the SOURCE button several SOURCE

The display and control is via the portable device.
times in succession and select AUX.
316

06
The services offered depend on the network, the SIM card and the
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used.
SCREEN C Consult your telephone's manual and your operator to find out which
(Available according to model and version) services are available to you.
PAIRING A TELEPHONE/FIRST CONNECTION 5 The first 4 telephones recognised are displayed in this window.
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention The TELEPHONE menu permits access to the following functions
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth in particular: Directory*, Call list, Pairing management.
mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your
audio equipment must be carried out with the vehicle stationary
and the ignition on. * If your telephone is fully compatible.
Go to www.citroen.co.uk for more information (compatibility, more 6 Select the telephone to be connected from the list. Only one
help, ...). telephone can be connected at a time.
1 Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function 7 A virtual keypad is displayed in the

and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone screen: enter a code with at least 4 digits.
configuration.
Confirm by pressing OK.
2 A message is displayed in the screen of the

Press the MENU button. 8
MENU telephone chosen. To accept the pairing, enter the
same code on the telephone, then confirm with OK.
In the menu, select: If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not limited.
3
- Bluetooth telephone function -
Audio 9 A message that the pairing has been successful appears in the
- Bluetooth configuration
OK
screen.
- Perform a Bluetooth search The automatic connection authorised is only active after the
telephone has been configured.
4 A window is displayed with a message that a search is in progress. The directory and the call list can be accessed after the
synchronisation period.
317

06 BLUETOOTH FUNCTIONS
RECEIVING A CALL MAKING A CALL
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed 1

display in the vehicle's screen. From the Bluetooth telephone function Audio menu, select Manage
the telephone call then Call, Call list or Directory.
2
Select the YES tab on the display 2 Press this button for more than two seconds for
using the buttons and confirm by OK access to your directory, then navigate with the
pressing OK. thumb wheel.
Or
To dial a number, use your telephone's keypad,
with the vehicle stationary.
Press this button to accept the call.

ENDING A CALL
1 During a call, press this button for more than

2 seconds.
Confirm with OK to end the call.
318

06 BLUETOOTH FUNCTIONS
BLUETOOTH AUDIO STREAMING*
3
Wireless transmission of the telephone's music files via the audio Activate the streaming source by
equipment. The telephone must be able to manage the appropriate pressing the SOURCE button**.
Bluetooth profiles (Profiles A2DP/AVRCP). The tracks to be played can be
controlled as usual via the buttons on
the audio system control panel and
SOURCE
the steering mounted controls***.

1 The contextual information can be
Initiate the pairing between the telephone and the
vehicle. This pairing can be initiated from the vehicle's displayed on the screen.
telephone function menu or via the telephone's keypad.
See steps 1 to 9 on the previous pages. During the
pairing phase, the vehicle must be stationary with the * Depending on the compatibility of the telephone.
key in the ignition.
** In certain cases, playing of the Audio files must be initiated from the
keypad.
*** If the telephone supports the function.
Select the telephone to be connected from the telephone function
2 menu.
The audio system connects to a newly paired telephone
automatically.
319

07 CONFIGURATION
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME
SCREEN A
1 5
Press the MENU button. MENU

Press to confirm the selection. OK
2 6
Using the arrows, select DISPLAY Adjust the setting.

CONFIGURATION.
3 7

4 8
Using the arrows, select YEAR. Start again from step 1 then set
MONTH, DAY, HOUR, MINUTES. OK
320

07 CONFIGURATION
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME
SCREEN C
1 5
Press the MENU button. MENU

2 6
Using the arrows, select Using the arrows, select ADJUST
PERSONALISATION DATE AND TIME.
CONFIGURATION.
3 7

4 8
Adjust the settings one by one
Using the arrows, select DISPLAY confirming by pressing the OK
CONFIGURATION. button. Next select the OK tab on the OK
screen then confirm.
321

08 SCREEN MENU MAP
MONOCHROME A 1
RADIO-CD 1
OPTIONS
RDS SEARCH DIAGNOSTICS
2 2
REG MODE CONSULT

2 3
1
MAIN FUNCTION CD REPEAT ABANDON
2 3
OPTION A RANDOM PLAY

2
2
OPTION A1
3
OPTION A2
3
1
VEHICLE CONFIG*
OPTION B...
2
REV WIPE ACT

2
GUIDE LAMPS
2
* The parameters vary according to vehicle.
322

08 SCREEN MENU MAP
1
UNITS 1
DISPLAY ADJUST 1
LANGUAGE
YEAR FRANCAIS
2 2 2
FUEL CONSUMPTION: KM/L - MONTH ITALIANO

2 2
L/100 - MPG
2
DATE NEDERLANDS
2 2
HOUR PORTUGUES
2 2
MINUTES PORTUGUES-BRASIL
2 2
12 H/24 H MODE DEUTSCH

2 2
ENGLISH
2
ESPANOL
2
323

08 SCREEN MENU MAP
MONOCHROME C Press the OK dial for access to short-cut menus according to the display
on the screen:
RADIO CD/MP3 CD USB
activate/deactivate RDS activate/deactivate Intro activate/deactivate track repeat (of the

1 1
current folder/artist/genre/playlist)
activate/deactivate REG mode activate/deactivate track repeat 1
1
(the entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
activate/deactivate radiotext 1
1
activate/deactivate random play (of the

current folder/artist/genre/playlist)
activate/deactivate random play 1
(the entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
1
324

08 SCREEN MENU MAP
MONOCHROME C AUDIO FUNCTIONS TRIP COMPUTER

1 1
Pressing the MENU button displays: ENTER DISTANCE TO DESTINATION

FM BAND PREFERENCES 2
2
alternative frequencies (RDS) Distance: x miles

3 3
activate/deactivate ALERT LOG

4 2
regional mode (REG) Diagnostics

3 3
activate/deactivate STATUS OF THE FUNCTIONS*

4 2
radio-text information (RDTXT) Functions activated or deactivated

3 3
activate/deactivate
4
2
PLAY MODES
3
album repeat (RPT)
activate/deactivate
4
track random play (RDM)

3
activate/deactivate
4

325

08 SCREEN MENU MAP
1
PERSONALISATION-CONFIGURATION 1
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
DEFINE THE VEHICLE PARAMETERS* Bluetooth configuration
2 2
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION Connect/Disconnect a device

2
3
video brightness adjustment Telephone function

3
3
normal video Audio Streaming function

4
3
inverse video
4 Consult the paired device
4
brightness (- +) adjustment
4 Delete a paired device
4
date and time adjustment
3 Perform a Bluetooth search
4
day/month/year adjustment
4 Call
2
hour/minute adjustment
4
Calls list
3
choice of 12 h/24 h mode
4
Directory
4
choice of units
3
Manage the telephone call
2
l/100 km - mpg - km/l
4
Terminate the current call
3
°Celsius/°Fahrenheit
4
Activate private mode
3
CHOICE OF LANGUAGE
2
326

the different audio which may result in audible differences when changing source the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
sources (radio, CD...). (radio, CD...). the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
position, select the musical ambience "None" and
mode.
The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any - Check that the CD is inserted in the player
automatically or is not audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. the right way up.
played by the player. The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not - Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
recognised by the audio equipment. be played if it is too damaged.
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
play DVDs.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The message "USB The battery of the peripheral may not be sufficiently charged. Recharge the battery of the peripheral device.
peripheral error" is
displayed on the screen.
The Bluetooth connection The USB memory stick is not recognised. Reformat the memory stick.
is cut. The memory stick may be corrupt.
poor. conditions.
an ambience.
327

not function (no sound, waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which
87.5 Mhz is displayed...). the stations are stored.
The traffic announcement The radio station is not part of the regional traffic information network. Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic
(TA) is displayed. I do information.
not receive any traffic
information.
The quality of reception The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to Activate the RDS function to enable the system
of the radio station or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which to check whether there is a more powerful
listened to gradually the vehicle is travelling. transmitter in the geographical area.
stations do not function The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is reception, including in RDS mode. a failure of the audio equipment.
displayed...).
The message "the audio In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature is too Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to
system is overheated" high, the audio equipment switches to an automatic thermal protection allow the system to cool.
appears on the display. mode leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of the playing of
the CD.
328

VIDEO PACK
DVD/AUDIO CD/MP3 PLAYER
For reasons of safety, the driver should only carry out

operations which require prolonged attention while the
vehicle is stationary.
CONTENTS
The player is compatible with the following formats:
DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD+RW, CD-R, CD-RW, VCD and 01 First steps p. 330
SVCD.
Using the AUX1 and AUX2 inputs, this pack permits
the connection of auxiliary systems (camcorder, 02 Configuration p. 332
games console, etc.).
The audio equipment only plays audio files with the
extension ".mp3" with a sampling rate of 32 KHz to 03 Basic functions p. 333
48 KHz.
04 Screen menu map p. 335
Frequently asked questions p. 336

All of the functions of the video pack are described in the
separate manual supplied with your vehicle.
329

01 FIRST STEPS
INFRA-RED
MONITORS AND DVD/CD PLAYER
HEADPHONES
The headphones are supplied with the

video pack.
The presence of an object between the infra-
red cell on the monitor and the headphones
may result in a reduction in the sound quality.
1
2
3
The monitors are located in 1
the tops of the front seats.
5 2
3
The DVD/CD player is
located on the centre
console. 6
9 8 7 Supply: 2 batteries R03/AAA 1.5 V.
1. Monitor positioning handles. 6. LED: 1. 2 channel stereo.

2. Folding and pivoting TFT/LCD screen. On green: player in operation. 2. On/Off.
3. Infra-red cell. Flashing: receiving information or ejecting 3. Volume adjustment.
4. DVD/CD player opening provided for the the disc.
disc. 7. AV1 AUDIO input.
5. On/Off. 8. AV2 AUDIO input.
DVD/CD eject. 9. VIDEO input.
330

01 FIRST STEPS
REMOTE CONTROL
18
8 1
17
7 3 2
1. Power On/Off, Eject. 12. Change chapter.
2. Selection of the source from With SHIFT: change title.
DVD, audio CD and AUX. 13. Previous chapter.
3. Change screen. 14. Stop play.
4. DVD screen adjustments 15. RETURN:
(brightness, contrast, …). Numeric keypad
Short press: return to
5. Selection confirmation. the previous menu. 16
6 4
6. Fast forward/backward. Long press: return to the main
In the menus: move the cursor menu.
left/right, up/down. 16. Display the main DVD menu. 15
5 5
7. Volume increase/decrease. 17. ZOOM: Selection of different
8. Play/Pause. image formats.
9. Next chapter. 18. Display/mask the screen. 6
10. SHIFT: activation of the yellow Power: 2 batteries R03/AAA 1.5 V.
buttons.
14
4 8
11. Selection of the audio 7
language.
13
3 9
With SHIFT: selection of the
subtitle language. 12
2 11 10
331

02 CONFIGURATION
SETUP MENU VIDEO SETTINGS
1 1
Press the SETUP button. The "Settings" menu
appears on the screen.
Press the SETUP button.
2
Select the "Video settings" menu using the and
buttons.
The "Settings" menu appears on the screen: 3

"Video settings", "Languages", "Users", "Default The "Video settings" menu appears on the screen:
settings". "Brightness", "Contrast", "Colour", "Back-lighting".
Select the options using the and buttons.
4
Select the input required using the and
3 buttons.
Press the OK button to confirm your choice. 5

Press the OK button to confirm your choice.
The setting is saved.
332

03 BASIC FUNCTIONS
SETTING UP THE MONITORS
1 3
Pivot the monitor upwards until it is

Release the table using the button in contact with the upper part of the
and tilt it down. seat.
A notch locks it in position.
2
The monitor is not a touch screen.
Do not press directly on the surface of the monitor, this may
damage the LCD screen.
Using the positioning handles,

extract the monitor from the casing.
333

BASIC FUNCTIONS
VIDEO PACK ON/OFF LOADING/EJECTING A DVD/CD
1 1
To load a disc, insert it carefully, printed face

To switch on the system, switch on the vehicle's uppermost, until it is fully inserted.
ignition.
2 Play begins automatically.
Press the POWER/EJECT button on the DVD/CD

player or on the remote control.
3
Press the POWER/EJECT button on the DVD/CD

player or remote control.
4
When the ignition is off, the video pack will switch off automatically
after approximately ten minutes to avoid discharging the battery.
Remove the disc carefully.
334

04 SCREEN MENU MAP
1 SETTINGS 1 LANGUAGES 1 DEFAULT SETTINGS
2 AUDIO 2 ARE YOU SURE?
1 VIDEO SETTINGS 2 SUBTITLES 3 YES
2 SETTINGS 3 NO
2 BRIGHTNESS
2 CONTRAST
2 COLOUR
BACK-LIGHTING
2 1 USERS
2 USER 1
2 USER 2
2 USER 3
335

The table below groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning the video pack.
QUESTION SOLUTION
The player does not start. - Check the vehicle's fuses.
The player does not react to pressing of the - The remote control batteries are flat. Replace them.
remote control buttons. - The remote control sensor is hampered by objects or is dirty. Remove all objects on the remote control
receiver or clean the surface using a damp cloth.
- The video pack has overheated. Let it cool for a few minutes.
Image or sound interference while playing The player cannot read the disc. The disc may be damaged or dirty.
a DVD. The image remains frozen during
play.
The player does not play the disc inserted. - The format of the disc does not correspond to the specifications of the player.
- If it is cold, condensation may have formed on the laser. Wait approximately 5 minutes to allow
the humidity to evaporate.
When a DVD/VCD/SVCD is played, - Remove the disc.

the image is of poor quality. - Using the SETUP button, adjust the brightness and insert the disc again.
No image is displayed on the monitor. - Press the SOURCE button until the image appears.
- Press the SCREEN ON/OFF button.
There is no sound in the audio headphones. - Increase the volume using the VOLUME +/- buttons on the remote control or using the dial on
the headphones.
- Check that the correct channel is selected on the headphones.
- Press the SOURCE button until the sound arrives.
- Replace the headphone batteries.
The start-up screen does not appear - Insert another disc.

following ejection of the disc. - Switch the system off and then on again.
336

VISUAL SEARCH
EXTERIOR
Remote control key....................... 78-83

- opening/closing
- anti-theft protection
- guide-me-home lighting
- starting
- battery Very cold climate screen.................. 210
Exterior lighting
Accessories .............................. 211-212 controls ...................................... 94-97
Panoramic sunroof ............................ 91 Headlamp adjustment........................ 98
Roof bars ......................................... 210 Directional lighting ............................. 99
Changing bulbs......................... 194-196 Wipers ............................................. 100
- rear lamps Changing bulbs......................... 190-193
- 3rd brake lamp - front lamps
- number plate lamp - front foglamps
- side repeaters
Lane departure
warning system............................. 168
Fuel tank ............................................ 92
Parking sensors ........................ 169-170

Door mirrors....................................... 76
Towbar ............................................. 209
Side spotlamps .................................. 98
Towing ............................................. 207
Boot ................................................... 90
Temporary puncture Doors ............................................ 88-89
repair kit ................................. 183-185 Under-inflation detection.................. 127 - opening/closing
Changing a wheel ..................... 186-189 Braking assistance .......................... 128 - central locking
- tools Trajectory control ............................. 129 - emergency control
- removing Pneumatic suspension ............. 171-172 Child lock ......................................... 125
Opening rear screen .......................... 90 Tyre pressures ................................. 226 Electric windows ........................... 86-87
337

VISUAL SEARCH
Courtesy lamps................................ 103

Sun visor.......................................... 105
Toll/parking ticket windows .............. 105
5-speed manual gearbox ................. 147 Child surveillance mirror .................. 105
Electronic gearbox Rear view mirror ................................ 77
system ................................... 149-152
Automatic
gearbox.................................. 156-159
Hill start assist ................................. 146
NaviDrive .................................. 231-273
Setting the date/time........................ 264
MyWay ...................................... 275-306
Setting the date/time........................ 298
General: ventilation/heating/air Audio system ............................ 307-328
conditioning ............................... 56-57 Setting the date/time........................ 320
Manual air conditioning................. 58-59
Digital air conditioning .................. 60-63
Additional air conditioning.................. 64
Interior fittings ........................... 106-108
- glovebox
- storage
- cool storage
- mat
Dashboard fuses ...................... 197-199
Centre console ................................ 107

Opening the bonnet ......................... 174 Smoker's kit ..................................... 107
Changing a fuse .............................. 197 Emergency or
Electric parking assistance call ...................... 130, 227
brake...................................... 139-145 Lane departure
warning system............................. 168
338

VISUAL SEARCH
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (CONTINUED)
Instrument panels ......................... 31-32

Warning lamps .............................. 33-41
Indicators ...................................... 42-43
Gear shift
indicator ........................................ 148 Multifunction screens .................... 45-53
Mileage recorders .............................. 44 - Screen A
- Screen C
Lighting dimmer ................................. 44
- MyWay colour screen
- NaviDrive colour screen
Exterior lighting
controls ...................................... 94-97
Direction indicators .......................... 126
Hazard warning lamps ..................... 126

Steering mounted controls........ 160-161 Scented air freshener ................... 65-66
Speed limiter............................. 162-163
Cruise control ........................... 164-165
Parking space sensor ............... 166-167
Wiper controls........................... 100-102

Trip computer ............................... 53-55
Door mirrors....................................... 76
Electric windows, deactivating ...... 86-87
Interior mood lighting ....................... 104

Alarm ................................................. 84
Headlamp adjustment........................ 98
Stop & Start ..................................... 153
Opening the fuel filler flap .................. 92 Horn ................................................. 126
Parking sensors ........................ 169-170 Steering wheel adjustment ................ 77
339

VISUAL SEARCH
INTERIOR
Rear fittings .............................. 109-110
- rear tables
- footwell storage
Side blinds ........................................110
- side blinds
- rear blind (Grand C4 Picasso)
Seat belts.................................. 131-134
Boot fittings ................................ 111-115

- rear parcel shelf
- modubox (C4 Picasso)
- net and luggage cover
(Grand C4 Picasso) Video pack ................................ 329-336
- bag hook
- separation net
(Grand C4 Picasso)
- lashing rings
- luggage net
(Grand C4 Picasso) Mats ................................................. 108
Torch .................................................116
Airbags ..................................... 135-138

Rear seats (3rd row) .......................... 74 Deactivating the passenger's
Seat modularity/ front airbag ................................... 136
configuration ................................... 75
Front seats.................................... 67-69

Rear head restraints .......................... 70 - manual
Rear seats (2nd row) .................... 70-73 - electric
Conventional child seats........... 117-121
ISOFIX child seats .................... 122-124
Child lock ......................................... 125
340

VISUAL SEARCH
TECHNICAL DATA - MAINTENANCE
Petrol engines.................................. 213

Petrol weights .................................. 214
Diesel engines .......................... 215-216
Diesel weights .......................... 217-220
Petrol/Diesel weights,
commercial versions .............. 221-222
Dimensions ............................... 223-225
Identification markings ..................... 226
Bleeding the Diesel fuel filter ........... 175
Running out of fuel, Diesel .............. 176
Fuses at the battery ......................... 202
Battery ...................................... 203-205
Energy economy mode.................... 206
Checking levels ........................ 179-180

- oil
- brake fluid
- power steering fluid Engine compartment
- coolant fuses ...................................... 200-201
- screenwash/headlamp wash fluid
Changing Checking components .............. 181-182

bulbs ...................................... 190-193 - battery
- air/passenger compartment filter
- oil filter
- particle filter (Diesel)
- brake pads/discs
Opening the bonnet ......................... 174

Under the bonnet, petrol .................. 177
Under the bonnet, Diesel ................. 178
341

ALPHABETICAL INDEX
A ABS and EBFD systems........ 128 A Automatic operation of hazard C Centre console....................... 107
Accessories ........................... 211 warning lamps ..................... 126 Changing a bulb..... 190, 194, 195
Accessory socket, 12 V ......... 107 Automatic rain sensitive Changing a fuse..................... 197
Access to the 3rd row .............. 72 windscreen wipers ....... 100, 101 Changing a wheel .................. 186
Adjusting headlamps ............... 98 Auxiliary sockets ........... 258, 259, Changing a wiper blade ......... 102
Adjusting head restraints ... 67, 70 294, 314, 316 Changing
Adjusting seat belt height....... 131 the date................ 264, 298, 321
Adjusting the steering wheel .... 77 Changing the remote
Airbags, curtain.............. 137, 138 B
Backup starting ...................... 203 control battery........................ 82
Airbags, front ......................... 138
Bag hook................................ 112 Changing
Airbags, lateral ............... 137, 138
Air conditioning .................. 29, 56 Battery ........................... 181, 203 the time ................ 264, 298, 321
Air conditioning, additional....... 60 Battery, charging .................... 203 Checking levels.............. 179, 180
Air conditioning, digital ............. 60 Battery, remote control ....... 82, 83 Checking the engine
Air conditioning, manual .......... 58 Battery compartment oil level................................... 43
Air distribution adjustmentt ... 58, 60 fuse box ............................... 197 Checks........... 177, 178, 181, 182
Air filter...................................
r 181 Blind for panoramic sunroof..... f 91 Child lock ............................... 125
Air flow ..................................... 29 Blinds ............................. 105, 110 Children ................. 120, 123, 124
Air flow adjustment .................. 60 Bluetooth Child seats .................... 117, 119
Air recirculation .................. 58, 60 (hands-free) ......... 295, 296, 317
Child seats, conventional ....... 120
Air vents................................... 56 Bluetooth
(telephone) .......... 261, 295, 296 Child surveillance mirrorr ........ 105
Alarm ....................................... 84 Cigar lighterr ........................... 107
Bonnet ................................... 174
Anti-lock braking system CITROËN call button ............. 229
Bonnet stay ............................ 174
(ABS) ................................... 128 CITROËN services ................ 229
Boot ......................................... 90
Anti-pinch........................... 86, 91 Closing the boot ................. 79, 90
Boot lamp....................... 116, 196
Anti-theft .................................. 80 Closing the doors............... 79, 88
Brake discs ............................ 182
Armrest, front ........................... 67
Brake lamps ................... 194, 195 Cold climate screen ............... 210
Ashtray, portable .................... 107
Brake pads............................. 182 Cold storage ......................... 107
Assistance call ............... 130, 228
Brakes.................................... 182 Concertina boards ................... 74
Athermic windscreen ............. 105
Braking assistance system .... 128 Connectors, audio......... 108, 253,
Audible warning ..................... 126
Audio streaming 254, 294, 314, 316
(Bluetooth) ........................... 319 Control panel ......................... 276
Audio C Capacity, fuel tank ................... 92 Coolant level .......................... 180
system ......... 307, 309, 322, 324 Cargo net .............................. 114 Courtesy lamps.............. 103, 196
Automatic illumination CD MP3 ................. 252, 293, 313 Cruise control......................... 164
of headlamps ................... 94, 97 Central locking ............. 79, 88, 89 Cup holderr ............................. 107
342

ALPHABETICAL INDEX
D Date E Electronic engine G G.P.S...... 239, 242, 245, 247, 281

(setting)........ 264, 298, 320, 321 immobiliserr ...................... 80, 83 Gearbox, automatic ....... 156, 182
Daytime running Emergency boot release .......... 91 Gearbox,
lamps ..................... 96, 190, 193 Emergency braking system .... 128 electronic ............. 149, 153, 182
Deactivating the passenger Emergency call ...... 130, 228, 229 Gearbox,
airbag................................... 135 Emergency warning lamps .... 126 manual......... 147, 148, 153, 182
Deadlocking ............................. 79 Energy economy mode.......... 206 Gear efficiency indicatorr ........ 148
Demisting Engine, Diesel.................. 93, 178 Gear leverr ................................ 29
the rear screen ................ 58, 60 Engine, petrol................... 93, 177 Gear lever,
Diesel additive level ............... 180 Engine compartment...... 177, 178 automatic gearbox ............... 156
Dimensions ............................ 223 Engine compartment Gear lever, electronic
Dipped beam ........... 94, 190, 191 fusebox ................................ 197 gearbox system ................... 149
Dipstick ............................ 43, 179 Engine oil level Gear lever, manual gearbox x .... 147
Directional lighting ................... 99 indicatorr ......................... 43, 179 Glove box............................... 106
Direction indicators ....... 126, 190, Engines.......................... 213, 215 Guidance ............... 239, 245, 281
192, 194, 195 Environment....................... 29, 83
Doors ....................................... 88 ESP/ASR ............................... 129
Doors emergency control......... 89 H Halogen headlamps............... 190
Door trays ...................... 104, 108 Hands-free kit ........ 295, 296, 317
Driving positions F Filling with fuel ................... 92, 93 Hard disk (copy)............. 254, 255
(memorising).......................... 69 Hazard warning lamps ........... 126
Fitting a wheel........................ 188
DVD playerr ............................ 330 Headlamp adjustment.............. 98
Fitting roof bars ...................... 210
Dynamic emergency Headlamps, directional ...... 98, 99
Flashing indicators................. 126
braking................................. 139 Headlamp wash ..................... 101
Foglamps, rear.........................
r 95 Headlamp wash reservoirr ...... 180
Folding the rear seats..... 70, 72, 74 Head restraints, front ............... 67
Fragrance cartridge ................. 65 Head restraints, rearr ................ 70
E
EBA (Emergency braking Front foglamps................. 95, 193 Heated seats............................ 68
assistance) .......................... 128 Front seats ..........................67-69 Heating .............................. 29, 56
Eco-driving .............................. 29 Fuel.................................... 29, 93 Height and reach adjustment,
Eco-driving (advice) ................. 29 Fuel consumption .................... 29 steering wheel ....................... 77
Fuel filler cap ........................... 92 Hill start assist........................ 146
Economical driving .................. 29
Fuel filler flap ........................... 92
Economy mode ...................... 206 Fuel gauge............................... 92
Electric window controls .......... 86 Fuel tank .................................. 92 I Identification plates ................ 226
Electronic brake force Fusebox, dashboard .............. 197 Indicator lamps, status............. 39
distribution (EBFD) .............. 128 Fuses ..................................... 197 Indicators, direction................ 126
343

ALPHABETICAL INDEX
I Inflating tyres ........................... 29 L Lighting, interiorr ............. 103, 196 M Multifunction

Inputs for audio Lighting bulbs screen.................. 45, 47, 50, 52
system ......... 258, 294, 314, 316 (replacement) ...... 190, 194, 195 Music media players .............. 292
Instrument panel lighting.......... 44 Lighting control stalk ................ 94 MyWay ............. 50, 276, 278, 299
Instrument panels .............. 31, 32 Lighting dimmerr ........... 31, 32, 44
Instrument panel Lighting on reminderr ................ 95
screen...................... 31, 32, 148 Lighting pack.......................... 104 N Navigation...................... 239, 281
Interior mood lighting ............. 104 Loading .................................... 29 Net ......................................... 112
ISOFIX child seats ..........122-124 Loading/unloading Number plate lamps............... 195
ISOFIX mountings ................. 122 assistance............................ 171
Load space coverr .................. 111
Localised assistance
J Jack ....................................... 186 call ............................... 228, 229 O Oil filter...................................
r 181
JACK socket .................. 314, 316 Localised Oil level ............................ 43, 179
Jukebox (playing)................... 256 emergency call ............ 228, 229 Opening the bonnet ............... 174
Locating your vehicle ............... 80 Opening the boot ............... 78, 90
Locking from the inside............ 88 Opening the doors ............. 78, 88
Luggage retaining net ............ 115 Opening the panoramic
K Keeping children sunroof blind .......................... 91
safe ............... 117, 120, 122-124 Opening the rear screen .......... 90
Key in ignition warning ............. 81 Operation indicator
Key with remote M Main beam ............... 94, 190, 191
lamps ................... 33, 36, 38, 39
control.........................78-80, 83 Maintenance ............................ 29
Map (colour screen)............... 247
Map reading lamps ........ 103, 196
P Paint colour code ................... 226
L Labels, identification .............. 226 Markings, identification .......... 226
Panoramic glass sunrooff ......... 91
Lamps, rear....................
r 194, 195 Mat ......................................... 108
Parcel shelf, rear....................
r 109
Lamps, warning Menu, main ............ 236, 237, 310 Parking brake......................... 182
and indicatorr .............. 33, 36, 37 Mini fuel level ........................... 92 Parking brake, electric ........... 139
Lane Departure Warning System Mirror, rear view ....................... 77 Parking sensors, front............ 170
(LDWS)................................ 168 Mirrors, doorr ............................ 76 Parking sensors, rear.............
r 169
LED daytime running lamps..... 96 Modubox ................................ 112 Parking space sensor ........... 166
Level, brake fluid.................... 179 Modularity, seats ...................... 75 Particle emission filter.... r 180, 181
Level, headlamp wash ........... 180 Motorway function (direction Passenger compartment
Level, power steering fluid ..... 179 indicators) ............................ 126 filter......................................
r 181
Levels and checks ..........177-180 Mountings for ISOFIX seats .... 122 Player, CD MP3 ..... 252, 293, 313
Lighting, guide-me home..... 96, 97 MP3 CD ................. 252, 293, 313 Pneumatic suspension........... 171
344

ALPHABETICAL INDEX
P Port, R Reversing lamp .............. 194, 195 S Short-cut menus ............ 279, 280
USB ..... 108, 253, 254, 314, 316 Rigid panel ............................... 72 Sidelamps ...94, 96, 190, 192-195
Priming the fuel system ......... 175 Risk areas (update) ....... 244, 288 Side repeaterr ......................... 192
Protecting Roof bars ............................... 210 Spare wheel ........................... 186
children ......... 117, 120, 122-124 Routine checks .............. 181, 182 Speed limiter..........................
r 162
Puncture ........................ 183, 186 Running out of fuel (Diesel) .... 175 Speedometerr ..................... 31, 32
Spotlamps, side ....................... 98
Stability control (ESP)............ 129
R Radio ............................. 291, 311 S Safety for children............ 86, 125 Starting the vehicle .................. 81
Reading lamps, rearr ...... 104, 109 Scented air freshenerr .............. 65 Steering lock ............................ 81
Rear foglamp ......................... 193 Screen, colour 16/9........... 50, 52, Steering mounted
Rear screen, opening .............. 90 236, 265, 278, 299 controls ................ 233, 277, 309
Recharging the battery .......... 203 Steering wheel,
Screen,
Regeneration of the particle fixed centred controls .......... 160
monochrome........ 310, 322, 324
emissions filter.....................
r 181 Stopping the vehicle ................ 81
Screen, monochrome A ........... 45
Reinitialising the electric Stop & Start ...................... 55, 63,
Screen, monochrome C ........... 47
windows................................. 86 92, 153, 174, 181, 203
Screen,
Storage .................................. 109
Reinitialising multifunction ........ 45, 47, 50, 52 Storage compartments .......... 106
the remote control.................. 82 Screen, rear video ......... 333, 334 Storing driving positions........... 69
Remote control .... 78, 79, 83, 331 Screen-wash reservoir...........r 180 Sun visor................................
r 105
Removable screen Screen menu Sun visor flap ......................... 105
(snow shield) ....................... 210 map...... 265, 299, 322, 324, 335 Synchronising
Removing a wheel ................. 188 Screenwash, front.................. 101 the remote control.................. 82
Removing the mat.................. 108 Screenwash fluid level ........... 180 Synthesiser, voice .................. 242
Repair kit, puncture................ 183 Seat adjustment ........... 67, 68, 70 System, navigation ................ 281
Replacing bulbs ..... 190, 194, 195 Seat belts....................... 131, 134 Systems, ASR and ESP......... 129
Replacing fuses ..................... 197 Seat configurations .................. 75
Replacing the air filterr ............ 181 Seats, rearr ................... 70, 72, 74
Replacing the oil filterr ............ 181 Security bolts ......................... 188 T Table of weights ..... 213, 215, 221
Replacing the passenger Serial number, vehicle ........... 226
Tables of engines........... 213, 215
compartment filter................
r 181 Service indicatorr ................ 42, 43
Replacing wiper blades.......... 102 Servicing ...................... 29, 42, 43 Tables of fuses....................... 197
Resetting Settings (Menus).................... 332 Technical
the service indicator............... 43 Setting data.............. 213, 215, 221, 223
Resetting the trip recorderr ....... 44 the clock ...... 264, 298, 320, 321 Telephone ..............229, 260-262,
Rev counterr ....................... 31, 32 Shelf.........................................
f 70 295, 296
345

ALPHABETICAL INDEX
T Temperature adjustment .... 58, 60 V Vehicle identification .............. 226

Temperature control Ventilation ................................ 56
for heated seats..................... 68 Video...................................... 259
Temporary tyre repair kit ........ 183 Video menu ............................ 259
Third brake lamp.................... 196 Video pack ............................. 329
TMC (Traffic info) ........... 249, 289
Toll/car park cards.................. 105
Tools ...................................... 186 W Warning lamps ....................37-39
Torch .............................. 116, 196 Wash-wipe, rear.....................
r 100
Total distance recorderr ............ 44 Weights .................. 213, 215, 221
Towbarr ................................... 209 Welcome lighting ................... 104
Towing another vehicle .......... 207 Wheel, changing .................... 186
Traction control (ASR) ........... 129 Window controls ...................... 86
Traffic information Windscreen zones for toll/car
(TA) ...................... 290, 291, 312 park cards ............................ 105
Traffic information Wiper, rearr ............................. 100
(TMC) .................. 249, 289, 290 Wiper control stalk ......... 100, 101
Trip computer......................
r 53-55 Wipers............................ 100, 101
Trip distance recorderr .............. 44
Tyre pressures ....................... 226
Tyres ........................................ 29
Tyre under-inflation X Xenon headlamps .................. 190
detection .............................. 127
U Under-inflation
(detection)............................ 127
Unlocking ................................. 78
Unlocking from
the inside ......................... 88, 89
Update risk areas........... 244, 288
Updating the date .......... 320, 321
Updating the time........... 320, 321
USB Box ................................ 108
USB Reader...................
r 253, 314
346

347

348

This handbook describes all of the equipment Automobiles CITROËN declares, by application of the
available in the whole range. provisions of the European regulation (Directive 2000/53)
Your vehicle will be fitted with some of this equipment relating to End of Life Vehicles, that it achieves the
described in this document, depending on its trim objectives set by this regulation and that recycled materials
level, version and the specification for the country in are used in the manufacture of the products that it sells.
which it is sold. Reproduction or translation of all or part of this handbook
The descriptions and illustrations are given without is prohibited without written authorisation from Automobiles
any obligation. Automobiles CITROËN reserves the CITROËN.
right to modify the technical specifications, equipment
and accessories without having to update this edition
For any work on your vehicle, use a qualified workshop
of the handbook.
that has the technical information, competence and
This document is an integral part of your vehicle. It
equipment required, which a CITROËN dealer is able
should be passed on to the new user in the event of
to provide.
sale or transfer. Printed in the EU
Anglais
07-11

11C4P.0040
Anglais
2011 – DOCUMENTATION DE BORD
4Dconcept
Diadeis
Seenk
Edipro
CRÉATIVE TECHNOLOGIE

Grand c4 Picasso

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Grand c4 Picasso

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.

com manuals search engine

CITROËN lets you view your vehicle's Connect to http://service.citroen.com:

4 | finally, click on the heading of your choice.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your vehicle is fitted with only some of the

a complete product range,

bringing together technology and a permanent spirit of innovation,

Key getting to know each system,

each control, each setting,

refer to the page indicated

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

■ Eco-driving 29 ■ Ventilation 56 ■ Lighting controls 94

■ Monochrome screen A 45 ■ Remote control key 78 ■ Interior fittings 105

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IX - DRIVING 139 Î 172 XI - PRACTICAL AUDIO and

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Stop & Start

Stop & Start reduces fuel consump-

Front/rear parking sensors

Parking space sensor Xenon directional headlamps

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Opening rear screen

Pneumatic rear suspension

Exterior side spotlamps Door mirrors

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Remote control key Bonnet opening/closing Fuel tank

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Opening rear screen Opening the tailgate Modubox (CITROËN

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Luggage cover in two Luggage cover blind

Temporary puncture repair kit

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

6-speed electronic gearbox system Electric parking brake

Speed limiter/Cruise control Interior mood lighting

162, 164 104

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

It automatically and progressively

Door mirror foldback

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Front seats Manual adjustments Electric adjustments

1. Adjustment of seat height, angle

Heated seat control (lo-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Panoramic sunroof blind

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fully hot to Maximum to

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Instrument panel Seat belts not fastened/ Manual central locking

passengers’ seat belts are unfastened.

with the MyWay or NaviDrive 41

Automatic central locking

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Front airbags Child lock ISOFIX mounting system

The 3 second-row seats of your vehicle

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

SECOND ROW SEATS

"Comfort" position Longitudinal adjustment

Placing a seat in the "comfort"